Home

Xerox 550 All in One Printer User Manual

1. Code Description and Remedy 016 732 The form specified in the emulation setting is not registered in the host computer Resend the form data 016 735 An attempt was made to print a job template while it was being updated Wait a while and then instruct it to print again 016 748 Printing is not possible due to insufficient disk space Reduce the number of pages in print data for example by dividing the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies 016 749 A PJL command syntax error occurred Check the print settings or correct the PJL command 016 756 The use of the service is restricted Contact the Key Operator 016 757 A wrong password was entered Enter the correct password 016 758 The account is not authorized for copying Contact the Key Operator 016 759 The maximum number of copies has been reached Contact the Key Operator 016 760 An error occurred during PostScript processing Take one of the following actions Set for optimized speed in the print driver e Increase the size of the print page buffer e Increase PostScript memory 016 761 An error occurred during image processing Set for optimized speed in the print driver and instruct the machine to print again If this does not rectify printing set for highest compatibility to ensure printing and try again 016 762 A print language not supported on the machine was specified Specify t
2. 258 Maximum Stored Pages ommo 209 229 234 Memory Full Procedure 5 208 228 233 Memory Settings CentreWare Internet Services cee 178 Meta Data Scan E mail cents 131 Millimetres INCNES ooo eee eeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaas 204 Mirror Image Negative Image Copy 0 65 Mixed Size Originals COPY aen e e dote ea 61 Fax Internet Fax eccceceeeseseeeeeeeneteeeeeeeeaes 92 Scan E mail sirate an aE E NE 127 MOTE Ea ntegin eeeid paabtevra seamed aasameoercaeas 42 Multiple Up Copy ceeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 71 N NetWare conosco died 214 Network Scanning Job template cooocococccccccccccccccccnnnannnnnnnnncnnnnn 116 Network Settings 2 0 0 cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneaees 212 Next Recipient Fax Internet Fax 2 008 82 Non Copy Job Complete Tone 05 193 NTP Time Synchronization oooococnnnnncocincncncnnns 191 numbering documents 000 0 eee cette eeeeeeeneeeees 74 O Odd Page 2 Sided coccccoococccccconoccnicccanancnnncnananns 201 Offset Stacking Center Output Tray 200 Offset Stacking Finisher Tray cceeeee 200 OMOT Swithin cece ee iei ier 38 On hook Manual Send Receive Fax 106 On hook Others Fax seeen 103 Operation of Up Down Buttons ee 204 operational Safety 2 eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeaes 19 Ordering supplies
3. documents 1 Select Auto Exposure on the E dede ba Image Quality screen Ed Cancel 2 Select On to enable the feature O 3 Select Save O Scan Options This section describes how to configure the settings for optimum scanning For information refer to the following Scan Resolution page 124 Bound Originals page 125 Scan Size page 126 Mixed Size Originals page 127 Border Erase page 127 Reduce Enlarge page 128 1 2 3 Press the lt All Services gt button Enter the recipient s E mail Address dise on the control panel Select a scan type on the tou ch O Scan Resolution 9 Bound Originals Scan Size 200dpi Off Auto Size Detect screen O LJ Select the Scan Options tab a peas a ae TAO Ctr 00 Scan Resolution Use this feature to select the resolution for scanning the document The greater the resolution selected the larger the size of the stored image file More time will also be required to complete the scan job 124 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Scan Options NOTE If you select Grayscale on the Original Type screen you cannot select 600dpil NOTE For mixed size originals and double sided originals you can select up to 600dpil 1 Select Scan Resolution on the Scan Options screen 2 Select the required option 3 Select Save Bound Originals Us
4. Mirror Image Select On to create a mirror image of the document Negative Image Select On to invert all the black images on the page to white and all the white images to black Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 65 3 Copy Original Orientation This feature allows you to specify the orientation of the documents The document orientation must be specified before using the following features Independent X Y 2 Sided Mixed Size Originals Border Erase Margin Shift Multiple Up Repeat Image Memory 100 1 1 Select Original Orientation on the Scan Options screen Ready to Copy Quantit Quantity Original Orientation 2 Select the required option Head to Top Select the orientation of your originals 3 Select Save O i Head to Left O El Head to Top Select this option when the top of the document is orientated towards the back of the machine Head to Left Select this option when the top of the document is orientated towards the left of the machine Output Format Copy This section describes features that enhance the appearance of a copy job For more information on the features available refer to the following Booklet Creation page 67 Covers page 69 Transparency Separators page 70 Multiple Up page 71 Poster page 71 Repeat Image page 72 Annotation p
5. Paper Type Use this feature to set the paper type for each tray 1 Select Paper Type on the Setup Menu screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Paper Type 2 Perfo rm the necessary Items Current Settings O pe rati ons 2 Tray 2 Transparency 3 Tray 3 Plain 3 S el ect C ose K 4 Tray 5 Bypass Labels J Settings Tray 1 5 Bypass Sets the paper type loaded in each tray System Administrator Settings This feature allows you to customize many settings on the machine to suit your particular requirements The machine enters the Key Operator mode only when a correct System Administrator Login ID is entered Before shipment the default System Administrator Login ID is set to 11111 The System Administrator Settings screen allows you to start procedures for changing the default System Administrator Login ID For more information refer to the following System Administrator Login ID page 257 System Administrator Password page 257 Maximum Login Attempts page 258 256 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide System Administrator Settings 1 Select System Administrator Settings on the System Settings screen 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close System Administrator Login ID System Administrator Settings System Administrator Login ID System Administrator Passwor Maxim
6. 065 238 Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size 5 238 Fax Internet Fax cccccccccccessseeeeeeeeeseseeees 77 78 Fax Internet Fax procedure cooococccccccccccccccccicaninns 78 faxing 2 sided document cocococccccccccccnccccnnnnncnannnn nono 88 adding name and phone number 96 adjusting density level eee 90 confirming remote machine response prior to transmission 0055 106 COUNTY COJE aire EAEE E 77 inserting comments in body text 97 printing transmission report eee 98 receiving transmission result mail 98 retrieving from remote machines 103 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 357 19 Index SCAN OPUONS siria itsntadas icaetas 90 scanning different size originals simultaneously n 92 selecting Original YDE seniii iraani 89 selecting communication mode n s 94 selecting Fax Internet Fax n se 87 selecting image quality ooooonnnnncnnnnnnnnccccnnn 90 selecting original type s es 90 send OPTIONS coccocccocccccccccccccncccnnnnanan ono nccnnnnnnns 93 sending documents to multiple recipients 82 sending documents to remote machines 84 setting remote machines output 99 setting send priority and time o 94 specifying destinations oocoonnnniccnnnnnanccccnnnn 81 specifying internet fax profiles 102 s
7. NOTE Select Delete Settings if you just want to clear the current setting for the selected item Name Enter a name up to 64 characters to be assigned to the job flow sheet Description Enter a comment up to 128 characters to be saved with the job flow sheet Send as Fax Displays the screen for registering fax destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Send as Internet Fax Displays the screen for registering Internet Fax destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Send as E mail Displays the screen for registering e mail destinations or changing the settings of registered destinations You can register up to 100 destinations Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 249 11 Setups Transfer via FTP 1 Displays the screen for specifying a server to which documents are to be sent using the FTP protocols Transfer via FTP 2 Displays the screen for specifying another server to which documents are to be sent using the FTP protocols Transfer via SMB 1 Displays the screen for specifying a server to which documents are to be sent using the SMB protocols Transfer via SMB 2 Displays the screen for specifying another server to which documents are to be sent using the SMB protocols Print Specify the number of copies to be printed out and the paper
8. 1 Select Fax Control on the Fax Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Fax Control 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch mese Gironi aios Send Header Pol ing On A between screens 2 Doc for Polling Auto Delete Off 3 P rf th 3 Rotate 90 degrees On ertorm the necessary 4 Sender ID On operations 5 Transmission Interval 8 Seconds ly a 4 Select Close Send Header Polling Sets whether to use the Send Header feature when you send documents with the Store for Polling feature on the On hook Others screen If you select On remark RESEND or space start time and date of transmission sender name destination name G3 ID and quantity will be added at the top of each page of the document Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 231 11 Setups Doc for Polling Auto Delete Sets whether to delete the document data for the Store for Polling feature on the On hook Others screen from the memory automatically after the remote machine polled your document Rotate 90 degrees Sets whether to rotate the image automatically to be sent without reducing the document size as far as possible when you select Auto in the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Scan Options screen Sender ID Sets whether to notify the remote machine of the machine s fax number when you send documents with G3 Auto in the C
9. oooooooccnnnnninninnn 218 E mail Internet Fax settings eee 238 emulation PCL parameters seccecceceeeeeeeeteeees 144 PDF parameters ecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 147 emulation parameters Print ooo 144 Emulation Settings CentreWare Internet Services 0000 175 Entered USCrs eiai a iieiea dada 285 environmental compliance c ceeeeeeeeees 24 Error History Report ceeeeeeees 280 283 Ethernet Setting c ccceecssscccceeessnceecerteseceees 215 Ethertalk ssion aa ae a aa 214 Extended Tray Module ocononccccccnncconccccnnanonoos 200 F F Code osnan ai 85 100 E lea teed aensts 94 fault clearance procedure cccceeeeteeeees 315 fault COdES citan danita 329 Fault TONG eiii cnica ici da 193 Faults Machine Status cccceceeeeteeeees 283 Fax long fax document sirere ei ee 78 Fax Billing Data Auditron Administration 263 Fax Control Fax Mode settings 231 Fax Defaults Fax Mode settings 230 Fax documents for confidential polling 133 FAX function regulatory information s e 22 Fax Mode settings eeeeeeeeeeeees 229 281 Fax Receiving Mode aa 232 Fax Receiving Mode Machine Status 278 Fax signals initial indias 84 Fax Transfer Add Sender Header 238 Fax Transfer from Address Book
10. 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Sa E gt Coy lt All Services gt button lt Clear All gt button 2 Select Copy on the All Services screen Ensure that the Basic Copying screen is displayed ED cor CD Ema NOTE If the Authentication feature eo Cb is enabled you may be required to enter the user ID and password if one is set up If you need assistance contact the Key Operator Select the required service All Services 3 Select the button for the feature required If More is selected select Save to confirm the selected feature or Cancel to return to the previous screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 47 3 Copy If necessary select one of the tabs and configure the copy settings For information on the individual tabs refer to the following Basic Copying page 49 Image Quality Copy page 56 Scan Options Copy page 58 Output Format Copy page 66 Job Assembly page 75 3 Enter the Quantity The maximum copy quantity is 999 1 Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies required The number entered is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the touch screen NOTE To cancel an incorrect entry E OOO ED 000 Ol DQO lt gt o press the lt C gt button and enter the DO correct q
11. Paper Jams in Cover A Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover A using green levers A1 and A2 Follow the messages on the touch screen and remove jammed paper from the specified location Green Lever A1 1 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 2 Ifthe jammed paper is inside the fuser unit rotate the green lever A1 in the direction of the arrow to feed the paper from the top of the fuser unit 3 Pull out the paper from the machine in the direction of the arrow 4 Close the Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray Green Lever A2 1 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 318 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Paper Jams 2 Ifthe jammed paper is inside the fuser unit lower the green lever A2 in the direction of the arrow to open the fuser unit cover 3 If the jammed paper is found in the fuser unit hold the green lever and carefully remove the paper from the machine WARNING Do not touch the fuser unit because it may be hot 4 Close the Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray Paper Jams in Cover B Follow the steps below to rectify paper jams in Cover B 1 Open Cover B while lifting up the release lever 2 Remove the j
12. ococcccnnncnoncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno Ozone Safety Information ooooooccccnnnnnnconccccccccnccnnnnnnn For Consumables etica arabe Radio Frequency Emissions cccceeseeereeeeeeees Product Safety Certification ooonnooocccnnnninicccnnccnnns Regulatory Information serraje ts CEM oi AA d ee ia For FAX FUNCION escitas cit Regulatory Information for RFID 2 Product OvVervieW occccccccccencenncennnennnennncnnenanennnnnnnnnnnnns Machine Componenti ccccccccccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees System COMO 2 4 acerca staat cchtecaeradtedece ach atdeldianhdnaces Services and Features ccccceeeeessseceeeeeeeesesenecees Power Ona Oricon aia Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents A in aa a a a a a aaa ae 38 A O 38 Ground Fault Interrupter GFI oooooooncconicinicicococoncconcconnonnnro nono no nnnnonnnnnnnns 38 Power Saver Mode ooooocococcocccoccconononnnonononnnnnnnnononcnnonononnnnnnnnnononeninnnnenoss 39 Changing the Default Time Settings oooooooccccccccccncconcccncccnnnononess 40 A O ES 42 ES E esbgadewacs ces 42 ESA Sii ai dan 43 VOD STAlUS A EA E chattels 43 EAS a E E a E E 43 Job Interrupt A a aa a a 43 Recycled A A dane 44 O 45 Copying Procedure sd raid 45 1 Load the DOCUMENTS ococccnccnnncnnncnnnonicnnnnnnnnenncnnnnnnnnnnnn naar ren 45 2 Select the Features ooocococcnnnccnnccnnccnncnencnnncnncnnnncnn
13. Can be added to the standard 2 tray configuration to provide high volume paper sources Tray 3 can hold a maximum of 800 sheets of 20 Ib bond or 80 g m paper in Letter or A4 size long edge feed Tray 4 can hold 1 200 sheets of 20 Ib bond or 80 g m paper in Letter or A4 size The Tandem Tray Module is referred to as TTM in this manual 34 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide System Controls System Controls The following diagram shows the names and functions of the buttons on the control panel 13 12 S 1 2 3 4 E A O OO DOO 70 Button Function 1 lt Log In Out gt Displays the log in screen to enter the System Administrator Menu screen or when the Authentication feature is enabled DO NOT press this button again after you have logged in This will log you out immediately 2 lt Help gt This button is non functional on this machine 3 lt Language gt Changes the languages displayed on the touch screen NOTE Certain characters may be garbled when you change languages 4 lt Power Saver gt green light Indicates whether the machine is in power saver mode Also cancels Low Power Mode or Sleep Mode 5 lt Clear All gt Resets to the default settings and displays the first screen for the current pathway 6 lt Interrupt gt Temporari
14. Paper Supply The available paper trays are displayed on the touch screen together with the media size and orientation preset for each tray When changing the size or type of media in the tray the tray must be reprogrammed by the Key Operator to match the media being loaded For more information on reprogramming the tray contact the Key Operator For information on the sizes and types of media supported for the machine refer to the Paper and Other Media chapter Ready to Copy Quantit 1 Quantity Basic Copying Image Quality Job Assembly Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 2 Sided Copy Output E 10 Dro EA sie Ds Ds De sD Di HoH CD To Left Do aas a20 GBQ2r2t ton 2 Staps Lef I Dr 43244 Dessiro 2 10 COD To Right gt More Dv Cmo more Auto Allows you to select an appropriate tray automatically according to the document size amount of reduction or enlargement and related features settings NOTE When Auto is selected in Reduce Enlarge even if Auto is selected in Paper Supply 100 is selected automatically in Reduce Enlarge Presets Allows you to select a paper tray from the three preset trays set up by the Key Operator The tray number paper size and orientation are also displayed for all trays except Tray 5 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 51 3 Copy More Displays the Paper Supply screen Paper Supply Scree
15. ccceeeeseeeeeeettteeeeeeeeaes 20 ContentsBridge Utility ee eee 141 Control Panel ie a a Es 35 MAINTAINING aa eer R A 306 Control Panel Alert Tone n se 193 control panel and touch screen ceee 306 Control Panel Select Tone 193 CONVENTIONS AEE E TE EE 14 Copy Control Copy Mode Settings 208 Copy Defaults Copy Mode Settings 206 Copy Job Complete Tone ococincicccccoccccccnnccnnnn 193 Copy Mode Settings oooomocccccninnnnninnnnnncm 205 280 Copy Output doed iaa lads aaaea aei lad legal 54 copying 2 Sided Copies ne 53 2 sided copies of facing pages s 59 adding stamp date page number 5 73 adjusting copy density 00 00 eeeeeeeeeees 57 adjusting sharpness 57 attaching COVED reeek naa AEAEE AEE E 69 creating booklet i is 67 documents coccccccnconoonnnccnnccnncnnnnnnnnannn ono nccnnnnnnn 45 enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets 71 erasing background cooooococccccnnnononccininnnnnncnnnns 58 erasing edges and margin shadows 61 facing pages onto separate sheets 59 inserting blank sheets between transparencies sseeeeeeeeees 70 mirroring and reversing image 0 cee 65 multiple copies on one sheet 008 72 multiple documents on one sheet 71 numbering document 74 reducing and enlarging seeen 50 rotating IMAGE screenie e AERE 64 scanning diffe
16. 027 737 An error occurred during reading of data from the job template server Check the access rights of the directory in which the job template is stored 027 739 Could not find the specified job template server Check the path name to the job template server 027 740 Could not log in to the job template server Verify that the correct log in user name password and other information are entered 027 741 Could not connect to the job template server Ask the network administrator to check the network or server 027 742 The job template could not be stored to memory due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 334 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 027 743 The settings on the job template server are incorrect Check the settings of the job template server 027 744 There is a problem in the domain name of the job template server Make sure that the DNS server connection and the domain name are registered to the DNS server 027 745 The address of the DNS server is not registered on the machine Register the address of the DNS server on the machine or set the address of the job template server as an IP address 027 746 The protocol setting of the job template server is not correct Set up the correct port 027 750 Fax forwarding printing or Internet Fax forwarding was attempte
17. For example Select Original Type on the Image Quality screen e Select Save Text in lt Angle Brackets gt Indicate that these are names of the hard buttons numeric or symbol buttons lights on the control panel or symbols on the power switch label For example e Press the lt Machine Status gt button to display the Machine Status screen e Press the lt C gt button on the control panel to clear the suspended job Italic Typeface Warnings The Italic typeface is used to indicate references to other sections and chapters For example For information on cleaning the document glass refer to the Maintenance chapter on page 305 e Paper Supply page 51 Warnings are statements that alert you to the possibility of personal harm For example WARNING This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 15 1 Before Using the Machine Cautions Notes Cautions are statements that suggest the possibility of mechanical damage as a result of an action For example CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure Notes are statements that provide additional information For example NOTE If the document feeder is not fitted to the machine this feature is not available Related Information Sources The following
18. The following table shows the relationship with the job flow sheet for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled The job flow sheet operations available vary depending on whether the job flow sheet was created using Mailbox on the Setup Menu screen or Job Flow Sheets on the Setup Menu screen Created using Mailbox on the Setup Menu screen Generally Shared Mailbox Shared by Personal Key Operators Job Flow Operations R i General Key General Key General Key General Key Users Operators Users Operators Users Operators Users Operators Create X X O X X O X X Display O O O O O O X O Edit O O O O X O X O Copy O O O O O O X O Delete O O O O X O X O Select Run O O O O O O X O Link to O O O O O O X O Mailbox Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 289 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration O Operation available X Operation not available The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user NOTE Job flow sheets created from Mailbox on the Setup Menu screen can only be used changed copied and deleted from the mailbox where they were created The applicable users are all the users that can use the mailbox NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them except for chan
19. Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 323 16 Problem Solving 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Finisher Transport Cover F Document Jams 2 If a double sided document is 3 Close the inner cover and then If a document jams in the document feeder the machine stops and an error message is displayed on the touch screen Clear the document jam according to the instructions displayed and then reload the document in the document feeder Follow the steps below to clear document jams in the document feeder 1 Open the document feeder cover and then remove the jammed document If prompted on the touch screen turn the green wheel to feed the jammed document out of the document feeder Green Wheel jammed underneath the inner cover open it and turn the green wheel to remove the document E srta the document feeder cover 324 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Troubleshooting Tables Troubleshooting Tables If you are experiencing difficulties using the machine check the suggestions in the following tables for advice If this does not remedy the problem refer to Fault Clearance Procedure on page 315 Symptom Recommendation The machine will not power on Check the power cord Check that the power switch is in the ON position Check that the RESET but
20. 355 19 Index C C DUON roroi o ate alee 35 Canada illegal copies oooooonnnnnnininnnnninnnnnnnn 29 cautions and limitations 16 CE Mark iii iaa cit das 21 CentreWare Internet Services a se 149 Change Settings Scan E mail e 115 changing initial screen and language s 194 changing default time settings eee 40 Charge Print Stored Documents 00 270 Charge Print Settings Auditron Administration ooooooocccnnnnncnnniccncccccnos 262 Check Mailbox ccccccceeeeeeeeeseenetenteeeeeeees 133 cleaning A A carseat eevee nad eed 305 Clear All button 0 22 ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeees 35 Comments Setup Menu cecceeeeeees 256 comments in fax body text eeen 97 Comments List ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeees 282 Common ItOMS ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetseneaeeees 281 common settings Setups sssi 190 Communication Mode Fax Internet Fax 94 Company LOGO meias aririk ieaiai rs manana 236 completed jODS cooooooccccccinccocccccnnacncncnananoncncnnnnn 269 confidential Internet Fax documents 133 Configuration c occonocccccnnnoonccccconannnccncnannncccnnnnns 161 constant velocity transport glass maintaining coononccccnnnnanccccnnnnonnncccn nan ncnnnnnnnn 306 Consumables CentreWare Internet Services 159 consumables Machine Status oocoonnninncnnnn 282 consumables Safety
21. Cleaning the Machine Proper maintenance is important for the smooth operation of any equipment NOTE When cleaning the machine do not use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners Do not pour fluids directly onto any area Avoid supplies that are not specifically listed as approved in this documentation they can cause poor performance and create a dangerous situation Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children NOTE Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation supplied with the machine Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 305 15 Maintenance The Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass To ensure optimum print quality at all times clean the document glass and constant velocity transport glass monthly or more often if needed This helps avoid streaks smears and other marks on the printed output Cl Constant velocity transport glass 1 To clean the glass areas use a lint free cloth lightly dampened with water or Xerox Lens and Mirror Cleaner 2 Clean the white tabs located on the under side of the document glass cover and in the document feeder to
22. Dre Left E Staples Lef 7 Top Right P More Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 49 3 Copy Reduce Enlarge In addition to 100 size for copies reduced or enlarged copies within the range of 25 400 can be produced by selecting one of the Reduce Enlarge features Ready to Copy Quantit Quantity Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 7 Sided Copy Output o Dro Sl Der Dr Du HoH Top Lett Des 43248 B22 Hite DD staples Lef I Di sa esr Dei ET Right Doe Dv Dv EB Were Basic Copying 100 Makes copies at the same size as the document Auto Automatically reduces enlarges the image of the document to fit on the paper size selected NOTE If this option is enabled you cannot select Auto in Paper Supply or Auto Size Detect for Paper Size in Tray 5 Bypass The Tray 1 is selected automatically even if Auto is selected in Paper Supply If Auto Size Detect is selected for Paper Size in Tray 5 Bypass pressing the lt Start gt button will result in an error Presets Allows you to select a reduction enlargement ratio from the two most frequently used presets set up by the Key Operator More Displays the Reduce Enlarge screen Reduce Enlarge Screen Allows you to select or specify the reduction enlargement ratio on this screen 1 Select More for Reduce
23. Group Locates destinations registered in group codes Keyboard This feature allows you to select a destination quickly using a 3 digit code assigned to it An asterisk on the screen keypad or the control panel can be used to specify multiple speed dial codes and a pound sign to designate a group code Enter this data Results 123 Dials the destination assigned to the speed dial code 123 12 Dials the speed dial codes 120 129 The asterisk represents all numbers from 0 to 9 qa Dials all speed dial codes registered in the machine 01 Dials the group code 01 A group code is a speed dial code that can contain up to 20 destinations and begins with a pound sign Up to 50 group codes can be registered For information on how to register speed dial codes refer to Address Book in the Setups chapter on page 250 1 Press the lt Speed Dial gt button 2 Enter a 3 digit code NOTE If the 3 digit code entered is correct the destination is displayed If it is incorrect you are prompted to re enter a 3 digit code O OOS 2 lt Speed Dial gt button You can use the screen keyboard to enter text information such as an e mail address Two input modes are available Alphanumeric and Symbol 1 Select Keyboard on the Basic Features screen 2 Select the keys on the screen to enter the required information 3 Select
24. Mired Size Originals corcel Save 2 Select On to enable the es atin Pe ocn as feature Ou eas 3 Select Save RI NOTE If you disable this feature and make copies of the mixed sized originals the size of the first page will be the size for all the copies Border Erase This feature allows you to erase black shadows or unwanted marks such as hole punch marks from each edge or the center of the copy Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 61 3 Copy NOTE If you do not use this feature when copying bound documents or copying documents with the cover open black shadows may appear around the edge or in the center of the copies NOTE To use this feature the document orientation must be specified to indicate top of the document for Original Orientation on the Output Format screen 1 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options screen Ready to Copy Border Erase 2 Perform the necessary operations Q wor mu 3 Select Save vex Erase a a A g g Y Normal Use the preset values to select the amount to be erased from the edge or center of the documents Presets are set up by the Key Operator If you do not want to erase any edge and or center width select Variable Erase and select 0 0 using the scroll buttons Variable Erase Allows you to adjust the amount of deletion from the edge or center of the documents Enter the amount you
25. NOTE You can also specify a combined destination without pressing the Next Recipient button using the keypad on the control panel Speed Dial and Address Book Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 81 4 Fax Internet Fax Next Recipient Use this feature to send the document to more than one destination You can enter destinations using the numeric keypad or speed dialing You can also use the Address Book to quickly look up and enter destinations registered for speed dialing The maximum number of destinations that you can designate at one time is 200 Memory 100 Next Recipient Scan Options Send Options On hook Others 1 Enter the first destination Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To me ae Select Next Recipient Basic Features Image Quality Y 2 Sided Originals Original Type Resolution J iFax Fax A Sided SD vent E sonas E Sided H to H Dre amp Photo rire m Address Book W Sided H to T Phi C Superfine 400dpi Doe C Superfine 600dpi U Keyboard 2 3 Enter the next destination 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required NOTE You can return to the previous entry by pressing the lt C gt button on the control panel Address Book Use this feature to quickly look up and enter the destinations registered for speed dialing The destinations in the Address Book are listed by the speed dial codes they
26. No Filtering No filtering is applied to the job flow sheets When logged in with a particular user ID Job flow sheets owned by users other than the logged in user are not displayed Shared Sheets Administrator Displays all the job flow sheets except for those owned by the logged in user or other users e Personal Sheets Displays job flow sheets owned by the logged in user Without log in Job flow sheets owned by particular users are not displayed e System Administrator Displays job flow sheets managed under the Key Operator s name 248 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu Non System Administrator Displays job flow sheets owned by other than the Key Operator NOTE Options on this screen differ depending on the operating user No Filtering No filtering is applied to the target documents Mailbox Documents Filtering is applied to mailbox documents Scanned Documents Filtering is applied to scanned documents Create New Job Flow Sheet Screen Use this feature to create a new job flow sheet 1 Select Create on the Job Flow Sheets screen Choose an tem and select Change Settings Create New Job Flow Sheet Cancel Save 2 Perform the necessary pi aent bad y o operations 2 Drop EN ae 3 S t S 3 Send as Fax 1 Entries elec ave 4 Send as Fax Not Set 5 Send as E mail Not Set y
27. S a SS N S gt NS La eee Fone IS S Tray 5 Bypass Tray E A Tray 2 MS gt gt y E Two Tray Module Optional NE N Q Center Output Tray NOTE Depending on the configuration the Document Glass Cover is attached instead of the Document Feeder Two optional paper trays can be attached Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 33 2 Product Overview TEL y LINE 1 E LA SF L Finisher Tray Finisher Optional Tray 4 Tray 3 i Tandem Tray Module Optional TEL Located on the back of the machine Connect a telephone to this jack if required LINE 1 Located on the back of the machine Connect a telephone cable to this jack Then connect the other end to the wall jack Finisher Allows you to staple or sort copies automatically The Finisher Tray can hold 1 000 sheets of 20 Ib bond or 80 g m paper in Letter A4 size or smaller Duplex Module Allows you to make double sided copies The Duplex Module can be used when paper is supplied from Tray 1 2 3 or 4 For more information refer to 2 Sided in the Copy chapter on page 53 Trays 3 8 4 At the base of the machine the following optional trays will be available depending on the configuration e Two Tray Module Can be added to the standard 2 tray configuration Each tray can hold 500 sheets of 20 Ib bond or 80 g m paper e Tandem Tray Module
28. Tray 2 Cover B Tray 3 4 Two Cover C aL Tray Module Optional 316 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Paper Jams Finisher Transport Cover F Tray 3 Tandem Tray Module Optional Tray 4 Tandem Tray Module Optional Paper Jams in Cover A page 318 Paper Jams in Cover B page 319 Paper Jams in Cover C page 320 Paper Jams in Cover E page 320 Paper Jams in Trays 1 2 and 3 4 Optional page 321 Paper Jams in the Tandem Tray Module Optional page 321 Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass page 322 Paper Jams in the Duplex Module Cover D Optional page 322 Paper Jams in the Finisher Optional page 323 Media jams happen for a variety of reasons Check the guidelines below to reduce potential jams in the machine Use only recommended media Refer to Supported Paper Sizes in the Paper and Other Media chapter on page 185 and Machine Specifications in the Specifications chapter on page 341 for a list of recommended media types Protect unused media by storing it in its wrapper on a flat surface The orientation of the media in the paper tray must match the orientation of the documents Check the maximum fill line in the tray to make sure the paper tray is not overloaded Do not use media that is torn wrinkled or folded Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 317 16 Problem Solving
29. 11 Setups Network Settings Port Settings This screen allows you to change the default settings for the network configuration There are eight main setup options available For more information refer to the following NOTE Items shown in these setting screens may vary depending on a usage environment For more information on network setups refer to the System Administration Guide Port Settings page 212 Protocol Settings page 215 Machine E mail Address Host Name page 216 POP3 Server Settings page 217 SMTP Server Settings page 218 Domain Filter page 219 Remote Authentication Server Settings page 219 Other Settings page 220 1 2 3 Select Network Settings on the System Settings screen Network Settings S el ect th e req u red O pti on B Port Settings m Protocol Settings B Machina Emal Address Host Name Select Close i m POP3 Server Settings E SMTP Server Settings m Domain Filter Remote Login b Server Settings B Other Settings This feature allows you to set print mode port status communication mode auto eject time for each communication port 1 Select Port Settings on the NAAA Network Settings screen erre 2 Perform the necessary Items Current Settings operations 2 USB Enabled 3 S t Cl 3 LPD Enabled J elec osej NetWare Enabled J Enabled J y Parallel Use this feature to specif
30. 302 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Overview of Auditron Administration Scan The items you can manage for scan jobs using the Auditron Administration feature are as follows Services pULISHUC ALON User Type Manageable Items Required E mail Yes Entered Scanned pages sent pages Scan to Mailbox Yes Entered Scanned pages stored pages Scan to FTP SMB Yes Entered Scanned pages uploaded pages Network Scanning Yes Entered Scanned pages sent pages Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 303 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration 304 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 15 Maintenance There will be times when the machine will require maintenance tasks to be carried out Information contained in this chapter will assist with these tasks Ordering Supplies A variety of supplies such as a drum toner cartridge cleaning solvents editing markers and staples are available for the machine To obtain supplies contact the local Xerox office giving the company name the product number and its serial number Use the space below to record the telephone number Supplies Telephone Number NOTE If you are not using the drum toner cartridge recommended by Xerox the performance of the machine may not be at its optimum level Use the drum toner cartridge recommended for this product
31. Build Job on the Job Assembly screen Memory 100 Quantity 1 Cancel save 2 Select the required option Sample Set O Off Select On to make a proof set of your 3 Select Save Qe sam ek ct Peon On cancel the job on The sample set is counted as part of the quantity selected Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 75 3 Copy Sample Set Prints one set of the job prior to printing the whole quantity You can choose whether or nat to print more sets after checking the print result e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature After copying one set of the job the job is suspended Select Start to copy the remaining sets or Stop to stop the job NOTE Copies produced by Sample Set are counted towards the total copy count After each section of the document is scanned the following screen is displayed B L Quantity O 1 Stop Originals 1 Last Original Change Settings Start Chapter Division Displays the Chapter Division Separators screen The following options are available e Off Disables the feature e Chapter Division Automatically splits chapters When using the double sided copy option the first page of the next set is copied onto the front of the paper This means the back of last paper copied will be blank if the
32. Enter the recipient s name Recipient Address 1 10 Enter the recipient s e mail address Comment Enter the comment to Internet Fax Internet Fax Profile Select the Internet Fax profile Send as E mail Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name 1 10 Enter the recipient s name Recipient Address 1 10 Enter the recipient s e mail address Subject Enter the e mail subject File Format Select the file format FTP Transfer Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name Enter the recipient s name Server Name Enter the FTP server address Path Enter the path to the directory in which the data is uploaded User Name Enter the user ID for the account Password Enter the password for the account File Format Select the file format Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 165 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Mailbox SMB Transfer Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name Enter the recipient s name Server Name Enter the server address Volume Name Enter the volume name Save in Enter the folder name where the data is saved User Name Enter the user ID for the account Password Enter the password for the account File Format Select the file format Security Allows you to configure and view security settings General S
33. Entered Users Hob Flow Operations Generally Mailbox Shared by Key Personal Personal Shared Operators own other Create Xx Xx O Xx Display Edit Copy Delete Select Run XI XIX XxX XxX Xx X XJ XxX XxX XxX XxX Xx O O x O x O O O 0 O O XI XIX XxX Xx Xx Link to Mailbox Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 291 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration Key Operators JOB ROW Operations Generally Mailbox SharedbyKey Personal Shared Operators ersona Create X X O X Display O O Edit O O O O Copy O O O O Delete O O O O Select Run O O O O Link to Mailbox O O O O O Operation available X Operation not available The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user Types of Mailboxes The following three types of mailboxes can be used with the machine Generally Shared Mailbox This is a mailbox created by a General User without using the Authentication feature When the Authentication feature is not enabled this mailbox is shared and its settings may be changed by all users When the Authentication feature is enabled this mailbox can only be operated by a Key Operator Key Operator Shared Mailbox The Key Operator Shared Mailbox is a mailbox created by a Key Operator When the Authentication feature is not enabled this ma
34. GFI device on the machine automatically cuts all electrical power If power is interrupted locate the RESET button on the back of the machine If the GFI has been triggered the RESET button will be in the tripped position To restore power to the machine press the RESET button 38 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Power Saver Modes Before using the machine press the TEST button If the GFI is working properly the RESET button should pop up If it does press the RESET button RESET button D TEST button NOTE If the RESET button pops back up when you press it or if power is not restored by this procedure contact the Xerox Welcome Center Power Saver Modes The machine has energy saving features that significantly reduce power consumption during inactivity The lt Power Saver gt button is located on the upper right portion of the control panel and lights up when the power saving feature is enabled The power saving feature operates in the following two modes e Low Power Mode Sleep Mode O lt p o EE O t OOO T lt Power Saver gt light button Low Power Mode The machine automatically switches to the Low Power Mode after a certain period of time from the last copy fax scan or print operation In this mode the touch screen is turned off and the Power Saver light is on The Low Power Mod
35. Mailbox Documents Report Auto Print On J ly Job History Report Specify whether to automatically print a Job History Report for every 50 jobs Activity Report Specify whether to automatically print an Activity Report for every 100 fax jobs An Activity Report shows the result of transmissions and receptions Transmission Report Undelivered Specify whether to automatically print an Undelivered Transmission Report for fax jobs An Undelivered Transmission Report shows the list of documents not yet transmitted Transmission Report Cancelled Specify whether to automatically print a Cancelled Transmission Report for fax jobs when fax transmission jobs are interrupted A Cancelled Transmission Report shows the list of documents where transmission was cancelled Mailbox Documents Report Specify whether to automatically print a Mailbox Documents Report for fax jobs A Mailbox Documents Report shows the accumulation of documents in the Private Mailbox For more information refer to Remote Mailbox in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 100 Broadcast Multi Poll Report Specify whether to automatically print a Broadcast Multi Poll Report for fax jobs A Broadcast Multi Poll Report shows the results of transmissions and polling requests to multiple remote machines Relay Broadcast Report Specify whether to automatically print a Relay Broadcast Report for fax jobs A Relay Broadcast Report shows the result of fax tra
36. Not Set 3 Select Close 5 Remote Server Port Number 88 y Authentication System Allows you to select the remote authentication service Remote Server Setup Select the method of specifying the KDC Key Distribution Center server Remote Server IP Address Allows you to enter the IP address of the KDC server in the form of vw xxx yyy zzz Remote Server Name Allows you to enter the KDC server name in the style of FADN within a maximum of 255 characters Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 219 11 Setups Remote Server Port Number Allows you to enter the port number for the KDC server communication within the range of 1 65535 Remote Server Realm Name Allows you to enter the KDC realm name within a maximum of 64 characters Other Settings This feature allows you to select the e mail receiving protocol from either SMTP or POP3 1 Select Other Settings on the AAN Network Settings screen aa 2 Perform the necessary a gt operations 3 Select Close Change Settings E mail Receive Protocol Allows you to select the protocol for receiving e mail Print Mode Settings This screen allows you to change the default settings for the printer configuration For more information refer to the following NOTE Key Operator access is required for this feature Allocate Memory page 221 Other Settings page 223 1 2
37. Select a desired option Customize the settings by System Settings performing operations as necessary System seins fF Setu Menu System Administrator For some options select Change AENA Settings to change the settings or to icon enter characters through the screen keyboard For information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 System Settings This screen allows you to select features of the settings you want to configure or change For more information refer to the following Common Settings page 190 Copy Mode Settings page 205 Network Settings page 212 Print Mode Settings page 220 Scan Mode Settings page 224 Fax Mode Settings page 229 E mail Internet Fax Settings page 238 Mailbox Stored Document Settings page 243 Application Communication Settings page 244 1 Select System Settings on the System Settings screen System Settings 2 Select th e req u red option m Common Settings m Copy Mode Settings m Network Settings 3 Select Close D Print Mode Settings D Scan Mode Settings DB Fax Mode Settings ear y Mailbox Stored Application o E mail iFax Settings m Document Settings B Communication Settings Common Settings This screen allows you to configure or change machine settings common to main features such as copy fax and scan For more information refer to the following Machine
38. Select the Output Format tab 4 Select the required option Image Compression Memory 100 5 Email Ade CC 9 Image Compression O Read Receipts MDN J Normal Split Send m Split by page Use this feature to select the ratio of data compression 1 Select Image Compression on the Output Format screen 2 Select the compression level 3 Select Save Read Receipts MDN cancel save Image Compression a High a Normal B J The feature only works when Grayscale is selected E This feature allows you to request the recipients to notify you by e mail that they have received your e mail attachment NOTE The selections for this feature are displayed only when you have selected E mail 1 Select Read Receipts MDN on the Output Format screen 2 Select On to enable the feature 3 Select Save Split Send Read Receipts MDN Cancel Save This feature is used to request the recipient to send a confirmation mail to the sender indicating the mail delivery status o O Support for MON must be provided by the recipient When sending data by e mail use this feature to divide scanned data into multiple e mail using the preset number of pages NOTE The selections for this feature are displayed only when you have selected E mail Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 12
39. Setti ng s screen Create Check m Reset User Accounts System Administrator User Accounts Copy Meter m User Details Setup m Charge Print Settings B Fax Billing Data m Remote Login Setup m ogi Setn de 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close 258 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Login Setup Auditron Administration Create Check User Accounts This section describes how to register user IDs and user names login name and password for authenticating accesses attempted through the network for scanning services and impose restrictions on the maximum number of pages to be copied or scanned Up to 500 user accounts can be registered 1 Select Create Check User rd select Create Delete Accounts on the Login Setup freee lem Accmme Auditron Administration screen wo use iot Norma Go to 001 0001 2 Select an item number ME E 00 500 3 Select Create Delete f elec reate elete 004 Not in Use 005 Not in Use y 4 Perform the necessary operati ons Account No 001 Create Delete 5 Select Close g B ES User Name Account Limit J usert T 100 0 a tenes Reset Account UserlD Allows you to enter a user ID using the screen keyboard You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters including spaces as a user ID User Name Allows you to enter a user name using the screen keyboard You can enter up
40. Use this button to check the machine status the billing meter the status of the toner cartridge or print various reports For more information refer to the Machine Status chapter Job Interrupt Use this feature to temporarily suspend the currently processed job to allow an urgent job to be initiated NOTE The machine identifies a convenient point to interrupt the current job 1 Press the lt Interrupt gt button on x A the control panel O O O O 2 Enter the commands for the new lt gt job you require ZO E gt ES 3 Press the lt Start gt button on the O control panel 7 CP O OOO 4 To restart the interrupted job press the lt Interrupt gt button again and press the lt Start gt button lt Interrupt gt button NOTE Interrupted jobs cannot be promoted released or deleted in the Print Queue Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 43 2 Product Overview Recycled Paper The use of recycled paper in the machine benefits the environment with no degradation in performance Xerox recommends recycled paper with 20 post consumer content which can be obtained both through Xerox and other office suppliers Contact your Xerox representative or go to www xerox com for more information on other types of recycled paper 44 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 3 Copy This chapter conta
41. and tilde Transport Protocol IPX SPX Configure the IPX SPX settings Frame Type Select the frame type Auto Automatically configures the active frame type Ethernet Il Selects Ethernet frame type Ethernet 802 3 Selects IEEE802 3 frame type Ethernet 802 2 Selects IEEE802 3 IEEE802 2 frame type Ethernet SNAP Selects IEEE802 3 IEEE802 2 SNAP frame type Network Address Displays the network address in the XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX format SLP SLP will only be displayed when NetWare is selected in Port Status and TCP IP is selected as the Transport Protocol Active Discovery Allows you to enable or disable the automatic detection of the SLP directory agent Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 171 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Protocol Settings TCP IP Allows you to configure the following TCP IP settings Host Name Enter the host name Get IP Address Allows you to set the method for obtaining the IP address by selecting the drop down menu to access the following options e Manual The user will specify all the addresses DHCP The address will automatically be set via DHCP BOOTP The address will automatically be set via BOOTP RARP The address will automatically be set via RARP DHCP Autonet The address will be automatically set by Autonet via DHCP IP Address Enter
42. are assigned You can also look up a destination by the index character a letter or a number assigned to the destination when registered for speed dialing For information on how to register destinations for speed dialing refer to Address Book in the Setups chapter on page 250 Memory 100 1 Select Address Book on the Basic Features screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Next Recipient Address Book A lane Smith 002 1003 gt 2 Select the destinations as a a E i d cn a ua 001 500 required ASE non m a ma Y _ Address List___JCABCDE J FGH J KLMNO PORST fuV zf 0 9 J Grow J Address List Lists all the destinations registered for speed dialing You can look up a destination using Go to and Select to Enter Number Go to The speed dial code you enter in this field is displayed at the top of the list You can specify the code between 001 500 Enter Number Displays a cursor in the Go to field when you select it The screen changes automatically to display the speed dial code you entered in Go to Letters Locates a destination by the index letter assigned to it The following five tabs are available ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST UV Z 0 9 Locates a destination by the index number assigned to it 82 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Specifying Destinations Speed Dial
43. documents For more information on this screen refer to the following Mailbox list Select a mailbox for saving scanned data Go to Specify the start number of a mailbox from which mailboxes are to be displayed using the numeric keypad on the control panel Document List Allows you to print or delete documents in the selected mailbox Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 115 5 Scan E mail 1 Press the lt All Services gt button Select a mailbox to store docurnents pe ee on the control panel 2 Select Scan to Mailbox on the m ma ma ma Go to 001 200 gt UN Boxl Box2 Box3 Box fa touch screen 007 008 Not in Use dot i 3 Select a mailbox for saving scanned data my For more information on mailboxes refer to the Check Mailbox chapter Job Templates Network Scanning This section describes how to scan and send documents to a specified server using a job template A job template can be created on the machine or remotely using the CentreWare Scan Services According to the settings in the template documents are automatically scanned saved in the TIFF JPEG or PDF format and then sent to a specified server For information on how to program a job template refer to Services in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 151 For information on how to select a scan job template refer to the following The name of a template created o
44. e Binary Select this when the communication protocol is in the binary format e TBCP Select this to switch between the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats USB Allows you to configure the USB port settings Auto Eject Time Allows you to specify the time when the paper will be automatically ejected from the printer if no data are sent to the printer Adobe Communication Protocol Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Select one of the following options e Normal Select this when the communication protocol is in the ASCII format Binary Select this when the communication protocol is in the binary format e TBCP Select this to switch between the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats Protocol Settings EtherTalk Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Printer Name Enter the printer name for EtherTalk Zone Name Enter the EtherTalk zone name Printer Type This is a display only item SMB Allows you to configure the SMB protocol settings as following Workgroup Enter the workgroup name Host Name Enter the host name Maximum Sessions Allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions TBCP Filter This is only displayed when PostScript is enabled 170 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Fea
45. in the Document List in a mailbox e Incoming confidential fax documents 25 Refer to Polling in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 103 e Incoming confidential Internet Fax documents y Refer to Polling in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 103 Bo e Fax documents for confidential polling Refer to Store for Polling in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 104 e Scanned documents amp Refer to Save in Scan to Mailbox in the Scan E mail chapter on page 115 You can also link a mailbox to a job flow sheet to process the stored documents manually and automatically For more information refer to Document List on page 134 Check Mailbox You can check print or delete documents in the private mailboxes displayed on the Check Mailbox screen Some mailboxes however may require you to enter a password depending on the operation you attempt Private mailboxes created by other users are inactive and inaccessible to you For information on how to create a mailbox refer to Mailbox in the Setups chapter on page 245 1 Press the lt All Services gt button Memory 100 Select a Mailbox to store documents on the control panel o A 002 003 oo4 ae NOTE If the Authentication feature Box fe f Boxd a eS is enabled you may be required to TN 006 007 os gt Box5 enter a user ID and a password if une Un es Document List one is set up If you need a e sE les
46. n 341 Machine Specifications ooooooooooooococcconccoonconcnonononcnnnnnnnnnnnonnnononononenonons 341 Paper Supply zaerensir i aar a a Gee aa 343 Paper Output Sere a sven a aa a e e a 344 Electrical Specifications coooconcncoconcnonnnoconononononononononononincnnonenonnns 344 Specifications for the Fax Feature cocooocccociciccococococcoocconnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnn nro 345 Cisco ia 347 Tenms Dedo a a a a a 347 AAA gq 355 12 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 1 Before Using the Machine Welcome to the Xerox family of CopyCentre WorkCentre products This User Guide provides detailed information technical specifications and procedures for using the integral features of the machine Xerox Welcome Center If you need assistance during or after product installation visit the Xerox website for on line solutions and support http www xerox com support If you require further assistance contact our experts at the Xerox Welcome Center A local representative telephone number may have been provided when the product was installed For convenience and future reference please record the telephone number in the space below Welcome Center or local representative telephone number Xerox US Welcome Center 1 800 821 2797 Xerox Canada Welcome Center 1 800 93 XEROX 1 800 939 3769 When you call the Welcome Center you will need the serial number which is located on the left side of t
47. 1 Load the Documents 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 2 Select the Features oooooooocoonccoocccnccnnccnnccnnconnnnnnnnos 3 Specify the Destination coommnnaninnonirnnernnnns sos 4 Start the Fax Internet Fax Job ococccccccccccccncos 5 Confirm the Fax Internet Fax Job in the Job Status Stop the Fax Internet Fax JOD ooccccccccccccccccccnnccs Specifying Destinations cceseeseseeceeeeeeeeeseeneeees Next Recipient ooocccccccccnnccnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnninininininin Address BOOK andinas tive niet Wate Speed Dio ria Keyboard A niati iaaea enaa TA adheres dates Relay Broadcast iis ccc cscsiecencccanysittuecs cerraran cove Special Characters oooooocccccccnnccncncnnncnnncnnnonnnonineninons Basic Features Fax Internet FaX oooccccccccnccnnccnnnnnnnnno Internet FAX cacon dianas 2 Sided Originals io ett dl Receeeseaetvee is Resolution ococcccccciccnncccncncononnnonnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnninininnnnnnns Original Type cra ii Image Quality Fax Internet FAX oooooocccccccccocococanccccccnnnns Original TP ire Goes et Ligmten Dark eIy piierne e a Aa aatan lo Scan Options Fax Internet Fax oococccccccccccnnncconcnnnnno Bound Orgias asii iia SCAN SIZE ii E EOS Mixed Size OTIgINalS ccoo iria Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents Reduce Enlarge ooooooocoooccncconcconccnnncnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninenio
48. 124 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Select a scan type on the touch Q Lighten Darken Contrast Sharpness O Auto Exposure L D Normal Normal Off screen a LJ a 3 Select the Image Quality tab Lighten Darken Contrast Use this feature to specify brightness and density levels for scanning documents NOTE Contrast will be displayed if you select Grayscale on the Original Type screen 1 Select Lighten Darken Use Address Book or Keyboard to enter the Save In location Contrast on the Image Quality Minen Darken Contrast screen Lighten Darken Contrast j 2 Select the brightness or density ae Bw g A level Normal Norrnal 0 3 Select Save Datker vee et y Lighten Darken Specifies the brightness level for black and white documents Contrast Specifies the contrast level for grayscale documents Sharpness Use this feature to increase or decrease the sharpness level of fine lines and edges Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 123 5 Scan E mail Memory 100 Select Sharpness on the Image Quality screen Enter the recipient s E mail Address cce Save Sharpness Select the sharpness level y Sharper 2 Select Save Norma Softer ly Auto Exposure Use this feature to specify whether or not to suppress the background color of
49. 158 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Status Trays Paper Tray Output Tray This page displays the status of the paper tray and output tray Click on the sign to expand the menu Trays Lists the available paper trays namely Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 optional Tray 4 optional and Tray 5 Bypass NOTE Trays displayed will depend on the configuration Status Displays the status of the paper tray as Ready Empty Not Available or Unknown NOTE The status of the paper tray may be displayed as Unknown if the machine is in the power saver mode Paper Remaining Displays the percentage of paper remaining in each tray in 25 increments Paper Size Displays the size of paper loaded in each tray Paper Type Displays the type of paper loaded in each tray Priority Displays the priority set for each tray when Auto Tray Switching is selected The highest priority is number 1 The greater the number the lower the priority Trays Lists the available output trays NOTE Trays displayed will depend on the configuration Status Displays the status of the output tray NOTE If the output tray becomes full remove the stack from the output tray Consumables The consumables menu displays the status of the drum cartridge toner cartridge and the staple cartridge The status indicates when you need to replace each item Click on the sign to expand the menu
50. 16K 194 0 267 0 SEF X X O oO X LEF O X O O 0 8K 267 0 388 0 SEF O X Oo 0 oO Postcard 100 0 148 0 LEF X X O X X Prepaid 148 0 200 0 SEF xX X O Xx X Postcard 4x6 101 6 152 4 SEF X X O O X LEF X X O X X Photo 2L 127 0 177 8 SEF xX X O oO X 5x7 Youkei 0 120 0 235 0 LEF Xx X O xX X Envelope Commercial 104 8 241 3 LEF xX X O xX X 10 Envelope Monarch 98 4 190 5 LEF X X Oo Xx X Envelope DL Envelope 110 0 220 0 LEF X Xx O X X C4 Envelope 229 0 324 0 SEF X X O X X C5 Envelope 162 0 229 0 LEF Xx X O xX X O Available X Not available 186 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Supported Paper Sizes and Types Non standard Sizes Tray 1 2 2 Tray 3 4 Tray 3 4 Tray 5 Na Paper Size Two Tray TTM Bypass Duplex Module Finisher Module Width 140 to 297 mm 89 to 297mm 89 to 297 mm 5 5 to 11 7 3 5 to 11 7 3 5 to 11 7 Length 182 to 432 mm Not Available 99 to 432mm 127 to 432 mm Not Available 7 2 to 17 0 3 9 to 17 0 for Tray 5 Bypass 182 to 432 mm for Tray 1 4 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 187 10 Paper and Other Media Supported Paper Types The following table lists the paper types supported for each paper tray duplex module and the finisher f Tray 2 3 4 Paper Type To aa Tray 1 Two Tray E pot ee Finisher
51. 261 System Administrator Login ID 0 0 eee 257 System Administrator Password 257 System Administrator Settings oooomoonnccc 256 system CONTTO S sirar irr ende se ani anaE T EKRENE 35 System Settings SCtUDS i s 190 System Settings Procedure 189 T Tandem Tray Module ccescececeeeesetteeeeeeeees 34 PAPE JAMS iinun uaea 321 Tandem Tray Module TTM oaeee 184 Target Computers CentreWare Internet Services 00006 149 TCP IP Gateway Address c ceeeeeeeeeeees 216 TCP IP Get IP Address 215 TCP IP IP Address ooo eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenneeeees 215 TCP IP IP Filter cccceeccecceeeeceeeeeteteeeeeeeees 216 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 363 19 Index TCP IP Subnet Mask oneens 216 Template CentreWare Internet Services 152 MFR OF Mad Si i tetas 229 TIFF Logical Printer List aree a 281 TIFF Settings List es ia Eaa 281 Vian a Taa 191 time settings Changing default seireirecroeeuri ean 40 Time Zone aeia a aaaea eia 191 Toner cartridge coonoocccccnnnocccccccnnonncccnnnnnnncninnnno 309 toner cartridge INSOMMING a ie 310 e iin E ERER 309 TOUCH Sree can EA 33 touch screen maintamniNhg iia a 306 Transfer Protocol Scan to FTP SMB 117 Transmission Interval ooooooonnnnnnnccnncncccccncnncnnco 232 Transmission Report Cancelled 198 Transmission Rep
52. Courier Bold 66 ITC Bookman Demi Italic 26 Courier Bold Italic 67 Helvetica Narrow 27 Letter Gothic 68 Helvetica Narrow Oblique 28 Letter Gothic Italic 69 Helvetica Narrow Bold 29 Letter Gothic Bold 70 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique 30 Albertus Medium 71 New Century Schoolbook Roman 31 Albertus Extra Bold 72 New Century Schoolbook Italic 32 Clarendon Condensed 73 New Century Schoolbook Bold 33 Coronet 74 New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic 34 Marigold 75 ITC Avant Garde Book 35 Arial 76 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique 36 Arial Italic 77 ITC Avant Garde Demi 37 Arial Bold 78 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique 38 Arial Bold Italic 79 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic 39 Times New 80 ITC Zapf Dingbats 40 Times New Italic Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 145 8 Print Parameter Item No Value Symbol Set 208 0 Default Roman 8 18 Microsoft Publishing 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 19 Math 8 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 20 PS Math 3 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 21 Pi Font 4 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 22 Legal 5 PC 8 23 ISO 4 United Kingdom 6 PC 8 DN 24 ISO 6 ASCII 7 PC 775 25 ISO 11 Swedish names 8 PC 850 26 ISO 15 Italian 9 PC 852 27 ISO 17 Spanish 10 PC 1004 OS 2 28 ISO 21 German 11 PC Turkish 29 ISO 60 Norwegian v1 12 Windows 3 1 Latin 1 30 ISO 69 French 13 Windows 3 1 Latin 2 31 Windows 3 0 Latin 1 14 Windows 3 1 Latin 5 32 Windows Baltic 15 DeskTop 33 Symbol 1
53. Erase When scanning bound documents or scanning with the document feeder or document glass cover open black marks may appear around the edges or on the center binding area of the output These marks can be erased using this feature 1 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options screen 2 Perform the necessary As Original pec operations QC vna N i et 3 Select Save O A 2 Head Left y QE Normal Uses the default values for the edge or center area to be erased The default values are set in Variable Erase If you do not want to erase any edge and or center area select Variable Erase and then select 0 0 using the scroll buttons Variable Erase Allows you to adjust the edge or center area to be erased Enter the amount you want to erase from the top bottom right left and center margins Up to 50 mm 2 inches can be entered Original Orientation Head to Top Select to position documents with the head of the document away from the operator Head to Left Select to position documents with the head of the document to the operator s left For this orientation documents are scanned so that the head of scanned result is away from the operator Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 127 5 Scan E mail Reduce Enlarge This feature allows you to select the enlargement reduction ratio of the document for scanning Memory 1
54. List Check Mailbox 134 Document Name Scan E mail 2 130 documents COPYING coseriitico E EEA E 45 discarding after expiry date ocnnnnninnnnn 244 TAXING iii 78 lOADING 181 PUN e cenia ees ae e aan aaa 141 SCANMIAG sarir e toa aaeieedsGiet ante 107 sending to multiple recipients 2 4 82 sending to remote machines eeeee 84 storage cancellation on failure 270 Storing and handling s 184 documents after client retrieval 243 Domain Filter Network Settings 219 Domain Filtering cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeenneeees 219 Domain Name ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeees 216 double sided ccooonncnccccccocnconcncconocononnnos 53 88 120 Drum Cartridge areenan r AAAA 306 drum cartridge e ndiveedeeeeeees 308 TOO atada 307 EMOVINO Didi 309 A slecievaddincceea ditigeedie 306 DIME cart cosilla 84 DTMF Method cositas 86 Duplex Module cocccccccccccccccccoccconocononononononos 33 34 Duplex Module Cover D paper jams 322 E electrical Safety ooooconnonicicnnnnncnccnncanacorncnnnannnannn 18 electrical specifications oooooonooccconnnnnnnncnnnnncccccos 344 Emaila nt do 111 E mail AddreSS oea cda cada 216 E mail Defaults E mail Internet Fax settings 239 E mail Printing eras 141 E mail Receive Protocol coooconcccccccnncnnccccciccnccnn 220 E mail Send Authentication
55. Module TTM YP Plain fe O O O O 60 105 Recycled 16 28 Ib bond O O O O O Side 2 Paper O O O x O Transparency O O O x x Labels 60 105 0 O O X X 16 28 Ib bond Lightweight O O O x x Heavyweight 1 106 169 x O O x X 28 Ib bond 60 Ib cover Heavyweight 2 170 216 X O O x X 65 80 Ib cover O Available X Not available e Side 2 Paper Refers to the paper already printed on one side i e scrap paper e Transparency When using Xerox paper backed 3R3028 for US or 3M Type L Desktop Laser 3R91334 for EU in low temperature and humidity 10 C 15 select Heavyweight1 on the Paper Type screen e Ifyou select Label Heavyweight 1 or Heavyweight 2 load the paper LEF If loading the paper SEF printed quality may be negatively affected e Lightweight If you select Lightweight the machine lowers the temperature of the fuser unit when printing Select this option when paper curls or other printing problems occur due to high temperature in the fuser unit when it sets toner on the paper e Heavyweight Depending on heavyweight paper the machine cannot load Short Edge Feed In that case set the paper Long Edge Feed Depending on the type of paper used and the operating environment paper may not feed to the machine properly or print quality may be negatively affected 188 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 11 Setups This chapter aimed for the Key Operator describes
56. Options tab 1 Select Output Size Defaults on the Scan Mode Settings Choose an item and select Change Settings Output Size Defaults screen Items Current Settings K 4 Output Size 1 AS 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch Gomraz gt MO between screens per 2 4 Output Size 4 A5O J th ange 3 Perform the necessary oo y operations 4 Select Close AIB Series Size Select from paper sizes in A and B series formats Inch Size Select from paper sizes presented in inches Others Select from other various sizes such as postcards and envelopes Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 227 11 Setups Reduce Enlarge Presets Preset Variable Use this feature to configure or change the reduction enlargement ratio buttons that appear when Preset is selected on the Reduce Enlarge screen under the Scan Options tab 1 Select Reduce Enlarge Presets on the Scan Mode Settings screen Choose an tem and select Change Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets Items Current Settings Use the scroll buttons to switch Gaeta AA O between screens 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 B5 gt A5 J 4 R E Preset 4 86 A3 gt B4 A4 gt B5 J a Perform the necessary 5 R E Preset 5 115 B4 gt A3 BS gt A4 y operations Select Close Select from preset reduction enlargement ratios Specify a reduct
57. Person Enter the name of the System Administrator Administrator E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the System Administrator Machine E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the machine Comment Enter a comment on the machine Configuration Memory Displays the size of the memory installed amount of memory used for each protocol and the size of PostScript memory if installed Available Printer Language Lists the printer languages used by the machine and their versions Software Displays the version of software installed on the machine Hard Disk Lists the names and total and free sizes of the volumes in the hard disk Hardware Lists the hardware installed and their status Counters Displays the total number of impressions and jobs Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 161 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Paper Tray Attributes Trays Lists the paper trays installed Paper Type Lists the paper type set for each tray Priority Allows you to set the priority for specified paper trays Paper Settings Paper Type Lists different paper types Paper Name Enter the names for Custom Paper 1 to Custom Paper 5 Priority Allows you to configure the priority settings when the auto tray is selected for the various paper types Power Saver Settings Low Power Mode Time Out Allows you to specify the time o
58. Save Alphanumeric Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Memory 100 Next Recipient m iFax Fax HOSUHUR0E80 Le aocosaoao aa Alphanumeric BHOOHBOwUwWuse O Symbol AAAA ea Displays number and letter keys on the screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 83 4 Fax Internet Fax Symbol Displays symbol keys on the screen For information on using symbols as special characters in fax numbers refer to Special Characters on page 85 Internet Fax Switches transmission mode between the regular fax and the Internet Fax Select this check box when using Internet Fax For more information refer to Internet Fax on page 87 Backspace Deletes the last character entered Shift Switches between uppercase and lowercase letters Tone Switches between pulse dialing and tone dialing Relay Broadcast This feature allows you to send a document to a remote machine which then sends the document to multiple destinations registered in the remote machine for speed dialing This can reduce transmission cost when the destinations are out of town or located in another country because you only need to send the document to the broadcasting machine The remote machine that broadcasts your document to multiple destinations is referred to as a relay station You can specify multiple relay stations or even ask the first station to relay your do
59. Services cere 168 Interrupt button eee ee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeetcaeeeeeeeeees 35 PP eet tava An rene Had ogee fees 214 J jams Cover A accreted ee 318 Cover e AEE TE E oline innata 319 Cover wcities a Se ee 320 Cover Esc nei aa 320 dOCUMEN ee 324 Duplex Module Cover D 0 0eee 322 PIniSheM cido 323 Tandem Tray Module 321 Tray 5 Bypass seeen 322 Trays 1 2 and 3 4 0 ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 321 Job Assembly COPY cnoccccccnncococininononcncnnnnano noni 75 Job Counter Report eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 282 job flow sheet types Authentication 288 Job Flow Sheets Setup Menu 05 247 Job History List CentreWare Internet Services cceeeees 157 358 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 Index Job History Report ecceeeeeeeeeees 198 280 JOB Aterrupt lidia cio later 43 Job List CentreWare Internet Services 157 Job Management CentreWare Internet Services 605 158 JOD StatUS 2 2 cece ce iaa a Ar pdn ie a Ea 43 267 Job Status button ooooooccccccccccnccnconcononcconcnncnnnnn 267 Job Submission CentreWare Internet Services oooococcniininnnn 151 JOD template saai ien i A R 131 Job Template List oooooooncnnncnnnnionnocccccnnnnnccnnnnns 281 Job Templates CentreWare Internet Services 152 Job Templates N
60. Tray Switching seeen 184 196 B Banner Sheet soare a a ara 224 Banner Sheet Tray cccccceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaes 224 Base TONE sisivtectcctddcess asad ities e e 194 basie COPYING oen aa T 49 Basic Copying Tab Copy Mode Settings 205 basic features Fax Internet Fax n 87 pasic SCANNING eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettaeeeeeeeaaes 119 Batch Send cccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeees 232 before using the Machine 13 Billing Meter cean OR 279 Billing Meter Print Report esseere 279 Booklet Creation COPY eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 67 Border Erase COPY tate See eS eee hs 61 A ii eaea eseeded beets lad bee 127 Border Erase Left amp Right eee 233 Border Erase Top amp Bottom eee 233 Border Limit ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 Bound Originals COPY usar ek nite eased 59 Fax Internet Fax cesceececeecceeceeeeeeeeeeees 91 Scan E Mail ccc ceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeees 125 Box Selector Line Setup oooooocccccnccnnccccccncnncnns 233 Broadcast Communication Mode 2 005 237 Broadcast Internet Fax Profile 237 Broadcast Multi Poll Report ooooooonnnnnninnnnn 198 Build JOD CODY areenan aranea aare RETE 75 Bypass Tray iii TA 33 bypass tray Tray 5 cooonoocicccnncociccccnncncnncinana non 183 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide
61. Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 159 9 CentreWare Internet Services Drum Cartridge Displays the status of the drum cartridge as Ready Type Mismatch Replace Soon Replace Now or Not Installed NOTE If Replace Now is displayed replace the drum cartridge Toner Cartridge Displays the remaining toner in 25 increments NOTE If the remaining toner becomes low replace the toner cartridge NOTE Once the new toner cartridge is installed a status of Ready is displayed Staple Cartridge Displays the status of the staple cartridge as Ready Not Available Empty or Fault NOTE If Empty is displayed replace with a new staple cartridge Properties This page allows you to view and set the machine properties These include the machine details and configuration the CentreWare Internet Services settings the port settings protocol settings emulation settings and the memory settings The items displayed will depend on the model and configuration of the machine NOTE Some settings with data entry use bytes as units of data volume Each character that you enter is one byte 1 Click Properties on the Main Panel on the home page 2 Select an item from the collapsible menu on the Menu Panel To select an item in the Security Port Settings Protocol Settings or Emulation Settings folder click on the left of the folder to open the item 3 To chan
62. and begin at step 1 below 250 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu 1 Select Address Book on the Setup Menu screen 2 Select an Address Number 3 Select Create Delete 4 Perform the necessary operations 5 Select Save Depending on the selection for Address Type in step 4 the following items are displayed on the screen Choose an Address Number and select Create Delete Address Book Address No Address Go to Jane Smith 002 J Smith 001 500 lames Smiti i gt EN 003 Joan Smith 004 John Smith Joshua Smith v Create Delete Select an Add ype before making ather selections Address Number 001 Fax Items 1 Address Type Current Settings Type ax Sa All 2 Fax Number 012 345 6789 e gs 3 Recipient Name Jane Smith 4 Index S p EE 5 Relay Station Set Off EE gs Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 251 With Fax selected Item Description Default Fax Number Enter a fax number up to 128 digits Recipient Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Index Enter a single alphanumeric character to use as a keyword for searching the Address Book Relay Station Setup Specify whether or not the registered Address Number is to be identified as an in
63. assistance contact the Key Operator 2 Select Check Mailbox on the touch screen Go to Specify the first mailbox number to be displayed on the screen using the numeric keypad on the control panel Document List Refer to Document List on page 134 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 133 6 Check Mailbox Document List This screen allows you to print or delete documents in the selected mailbox You can also link a mailbox or the documents inside to a job flow sheet to automate document processing For more information on job flow sheets refer to Job Flow Sheets in the Setups chapter on page 247 1 Select the required mailbox 2 Select Document List on the Check Mailbox screen 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close Refresh Mailbox 001 Document List Refresh Ss e e e Doc Name a stored Date Page No of Docs 4 img 126182706 1 26 2004 627 PM 1 a Im 126182733 1126 2004 627 PM 1 img 126182753 1 26 2004 627 PM 1 8 Print Delete img 126182804 1 26 2004 d lw Job Flow de Settings 628 PM 1 Updates the list of documents in the mailbox Select All Selects all the documents in the mailbox so that you can print or delete them all at once Print Delete Displays the Print Delete screen Delete Deletes the selected document s Print Prints out the selected documen
64. automatically Maximum E mail Size Allows you to specify the maximum e mail size Max No of pages for Split Send Allows you to set the size of outgoing e mail in pages Response to Read Receipts MDN Select whether to send a confirmation to MDN POP3 Server Address Enter the POP3 server address Up to 128 characters can be entered including periods and hyphens POP3 Port Number Specify the POP3 port number POP Receive Authentication Select to enable APOP authentication POP3 Server Check Interval Enter the interval to check the POPS server between 1 and 120 minutes in 1 minute increments POP User Name Enter the POP user address POP User Password Enter the POP user password SMTP Server Address Enter the SMTP server address Up to 128 characters can be entered including period and hyphen SMTP Port Number Specify the SMTP port number SMTP Send Authentication Select whether and how users are required to authenticate before sending e mail using an SMTP server e Off User authentication is not required to use an SMTP server POP before SMTP POP server authentication is required before using an SMTP server SMTP Authentication SMTP server authentication is required to send e mail 174 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Protocol Settings SMTP Authent
65. away from the reach of children gt Never throw toner toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame Radio Frequency Emissions United States Canada Europe Australia New Zealand NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the 20 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Regulatory Information customer documentation may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at their own expense Changes and modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by Xerox Fuji Xerox may void the user s authority to operate this equipment Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations in the United States and the Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia New Zealand as applicable Product Safety Certification This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed Agency Standard Under
66. click Job Submission to print jobs or click Job Templates to display the list of job templates on the machine Job Submission Allows you to print documents stored in your computer Specify the following settings and click Start to submit the job Paper Tray Allows you to select the paper tray from the drop down menu Output Destination Allows you to select the output trays from the drop down menu Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 151 9 CentreWare Internet Services Quantity Enter the number of sets to print You can enter a number between 1 to 999 2 Sided Print Allows you to select 1 sided prints or 2 sided prints head to head or head to toe Collated Specify whether to collate printouts or not File Name Allows you to specify the file to print Clicking the Browse button next to the File Name edit box opens the Choose File dialog box where you can select the file to print You can print only files with the following extensions pdf tif prn pcl ps and txt Job Templates Template This page allows you to view the list of job templates registered in the machine create new templates or modify the existing ones Job templates can be created in different settings by selecting features such as resolution and file format Up to 250 templates can be stored in the optional hard disk of the machine Up to 20 templates are listed alphabetically on the Device Temp
67. color backgrounds The machine adjusts its settings for different types of images A fax mode where the machine receives faxes automatically 364 x 257 mm paper 257 x 182 mm paper Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 347 Border limit BPS Chain Dialing Collated Communication Mode Communication s Contrast Copy Sets Covers Default Screen Default Setting s Default Value s Delayed Start Dial One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted document exceeds the length of paper installed on the receiving terminal A margin at the bottom of a received document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on one page The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of a document is the border limit When the border limit value is small the data is printed on the next page But when it is large a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one page An abbreviation of Bits Per Second This is a measure of how fast a modem can transmit or receive data A single dialing command that ties together keypad dialing and dial directory locations for a single dialing operation Output programming where each copy set is delivered in the same order the documents were placed in the Document Feeder Example Two copies of a three page document would output as page1 copy1 page2 copy1 page3 copy1 page1 copy2 page2 copy2 page3 copy2 Selects
68. described in this chapter are optional and may not apply to your machine configuration NOTE When setting up Fax options users in European countries and North American countries may be required to set the country code for the line Specify the country referring to the following section Country Code for Fax Option When setting up the Fax option users in the following countries may be required to set the country code for the line CAUTION Fax connection approval depends on the country For machines imported to North American countries the settings can be changed for Canada and USA For machines imported to European countries the settings can only be changed for the European countries below European countries Austria Finland Ireland Portugal Switzerland Belgium France Italy Romania United Kingdom Bulgaria Germany Holland Slovakia Czech Greece Norway Spain Denmark Hungary Poland Sweden North American countries Canada USA Enter the System Settings mode select Common Settings then select Other Settings In the Other Settings screen scroll down to and select Country then select Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 77 4 Fax Internet Fax the required country After saving the settings the machine reboots automatically For more information refer to Other Settings on page 200 NOTE This setting is only available with the Fax option for the countries stated above Fax
69. determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from the host device PostScript Sets PostScript as the printer language PCL Sets PCL as the printer language TIFF Sets TIFF as the printer language PJL Allows you to enable or disable PJL PJL is a command independent of printer languages You can specify the printer language to use for the next job regardless of the printer language that is currently being used Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 175 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Emulation Settings PostScript Allows you to configure the settings when PostScript is enabled as follows Logical Printer Number Enter the logical printer number and click the Edit button Paper Tray Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output Print Quantity Setup Allows you to select the print quantity setup that has priority over other settings Quantity Allows you to specify the print quantity 2 Sided Print Allows you to select whether to print both sides of paper Collated Allows you to specify whether to collate the output Offset Stacking Allows you to select the offset method Stapling Allows you to select the stapling method Screen Type Allows you to specify
70. double sided printing Print Mode 403 0 Default Standard 1 Fast 2 High Quality Selects the print mode Sort 404 0 Default Off 1 On Sets whether to enable sorting Paper Size 406 0 Auto 1 Default A4 or Letter Sets the paper size Password Enter a password up to 32 characters Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 147 8 Print 148 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 9 CentreWare Internet Services This chapter contains information on the optional CentreWare Internet Services program The CentreWare Internet Services program uses the embedded Web User Interface which enables communication between a networked computer and the machine via HTTP CentreWare Internet Services can be used to check each job and the machine status or change the network settings You can also configure a job template using this program Click the Display Job Template Screen button on the Job Templates page on the CentreWare Internet Services home page For more information on job templates refer to Services on page 151 For troubleshooting the CentreWare Internet Services refer to the System Administration Guide NOTE This service must be installed and set up by the System Administrator prior to use For more information on installation and setups of the CentreWare Internet Services feature refer to the System Ad
71. emissions criteria and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies Currently Environmental Choice has more than 1600 approved products and 140 licenses Xerox has been a leader in offering EcoLogo approved products Europe Energy required to establish Group for Energy Efficient Appliances GEEA compliance and Xerox Corporation has designed and tested this product to meet the energy restrictions ENERGY has notified the registration authorities About License JPEG Code Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group Heimdal Copyright 2000 Kungliga Tekniska Hogskolan Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm Sweden All rights reserved Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 25 1 Before Using the Machine OpenSSL Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without speci
72. enable Internet Services Allows you to select the check box to enable SOAP Allows you to select the check box to enable Port Settings Ethernet Allows you to select the ethernet transmission rate Ethernet Settings You can select one of the following options Auto Detects the ethernet transmission rate automatically e 10BASE T Half Duplex Selects 10BASE T in half duplex as the default value e 10BASE T Full Duplex Selects 10BASE T in full duplex as the default value e 100BASE T Half Duplex Selects 100BASE T in half duplex as the default value e 100BASE T Full Duplex Selects 100BASE T in full duplex as the default value MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the machine This is a display only item Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 169 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Port Settings Parallel Allows you to configure the parallel port settings Bi directional Communication Allows you to enable or disable Bi directional Communication IEEE1284 Auto Eject Time Allows you to specify the time when the paper will be automatically ejected from the printer if no data are sent to the printer Adobe Communication Protocol Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Select one of the following options e Normal Select this when the communication protocol is in the ASCII format
73. follows FAX 1234567890 T33S 777 wcem128 xerox com Where 1234567890 The destination s fax number 777 The destination s F Code if required wcm128 The host name of the relay station xerox com The domain where the relay station is hosted NOTE To use this feature the relay station must be set to use an SMTP server to receive e mail Special Characters You can enter special characters as part of a fax number to perform many functions when dialing the number Some characters are used only when auto dialing such as a ba p u and Depending on the setup of the telephone and communication lines some or all of the following characters can be used Character Function Description Dial pause to Inserts a pause in a fax number for example when you are pause while using a calling card Press the lt Dial Pause gt button more dialing than once to enter a longer pause Mask data to Select before and after entering confidential information protect to display as asterisks This character must be preceded confidential with to be effective information Screen mask Masks the mailbox password on the screen with asterisks Select before and after entering a mailbox password Pulse to tone switch Switches pulse dialing to tone dialing for example when using an automated message recording system that requires tone signals Speed dial
74. gt button All Services Use this button to access all the services available on the machine NOTE The arrangement of service icons displayed on the screen can be changed by the Key Operator 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Select the required service All Services EBD co 7 E mail y Fax Internet Fax gi Network Scanning ES sen to Mailbox 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Select the required service All Services Ss to FTP SMB EY creck Mailbox Setup Menu Y Stored Programming 42 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Job Interrupt Features Use this button to go back one previous screen If you are using the Job Status screen or Machine Status screen press the lt Features gt button to return to the previous copy fax and scan feature screen The copy fax or scan feature screen does not change even if you press this button while you are in one of those screens In this case use the lt All Services gt button to select the copy fax or scan feature Job Status Use this button to check the progress of a job or display the log and detailed information of completed jobs The latest job is displayed at the top of the list It can also check delete or print stored documents or documents in the public mailbox of the machine For more information refer to the Job Status chapter Machine Status
75. gt button on the control panel NOTE You cannot store operations performed on the Setup Menu screen Using Stored Programming Follow the steps below to select and execute a job number 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Stored Programming 2 Select Stored Programming on Y D tt mus the touch screen 2 Not in Use 6 Not in Use 3 Select a job number to be Yumi Yen executed 4 Not in Use a Not in Use ly 4 Change the settings as necessary 5 Press the lt Start gt button on the control panel NOTE On the Stored Programming screen only job numbers that have been programmed are active and selectable Stored Programming You can store up to 58 consecutive operations in each job number up to the total of 40 job numbers To register the required operations in a job number follow the steps below NOTE A job number remembers not only operations performed on the touch screen but also the buttons pressed on the control panel NOTE If after a job has been stored in Stored Programming you then change the default settings in System Settings or make changes to Job Flow Sheet Job Template Address Book Comment etc the operation registered for each job will also change Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 139 7 Stored Programming NOTE Stored Programming is saved by button position on the touch screen Theref
76. how to change various defaults preset on the machine how to register various items such as mailboxes and destinations and how to configure or change Key Operator settings System Settings Procedure This section describes the basic system settings procedure Follow the steps below 1 Entering the System Settings Mode page 189 2 Customizing the Settings page 190 1 Entering the System Settings Mode 1 Press the lt Log In Out gt button gt x lagos on the control panel A e S S S button SO ZO lt gt O 2 Enter the correct user ID using the numeric keypad on the control panel or the screen keyboard For information on keyboard entry refer to UseriD gt cya Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 NOTE The default Key Operator ID is 11111 If the Authentication feature is enabled you may be also required to enter a password The default password is x admin To change the default user ID or password refer to System Administrator Settings on page 256 System Administrator Login Cancel Confim__ 3 Select System Settings on the System Administrator Menu screen NOTE In User Mode you can l operate the machine normally while Bosom secs logged in as the Key Operator Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 189 11 Setups 2 Customizing the Settings 1
77. last page of the previous set is odd Separators Automatically splits chapters and places a separator page between chapters Select one of the five presets for Separators Tray including the bypass tray to specify the tray for separator pages For more information on the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen on page 52 Change Settings Allows you to change the settings on the Change Settings screen before scanning the next section Press the lt Start gt button on the control panel to start scanning Stop Deletes the copy job controlled by the Build Job feature Last Original Select this option to indicate that you have finished scanning the whole job Next Original Select this option to sequentially scan more sections for the job Start Starts scanning the next section 76 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 4 Fax Internet Fax This chapter contains information on the fax screens and the fax features available In addition to conventional fax features the machine offers you a Direct Fax feature and an Internet Fax feature Direct Fax allows you to transmit faxes directly from PC clients Internet Fax allows you to send scanned images by e mail over the Internet or intranet For more information on Direct Fax refer to Fax Driver On line Help on the CentreWare CD ROM For more information on Internet Fax refer to the System Administration Guide NOTE Some of the features
78. mailbox it was created from Any user who has access to the mailbox can use and change its settings This job flow sheet can only be operated when the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled only a Key Operator can operate this job flow sheet 288 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox Key Operator Shared Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a Key Operator When the Authentication feature is not enabled this job flow sheet is shared and its settings may be changed by any user When the Authentication feature is enabled the parent job flow sheet can be shared by all Entered Users However only a Key Operator can change its settings To create a Key Operator Shared Job Flow Sheet operate the machine as a Key Operator Personal Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by an Entered User when the Authentication feature is enabled Only the Entered User who created the job flow sheet can use it This job flow sheet can only be operated by a Key Operator when the Authentication feature is not enabled The ways to operate job flow sheets vary depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the operations available When the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled
79. must obtain if you wish to export this product any appropriate export license from the Japanese Government or its agency and or re export approval from the U S Government or its agency Products Subject To Supplementary Export Regulations An export of this product is strictly limited in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and or the export control regulations of the United States You must obtain if you know the product is to be used or was used for development manufacturing or use of any mass destructive weapons including nuclear weapon chemical weapon or biological weapon because of a dealing document such as legal contract or information from the importer any appropriate export license from the Japanese Government or its agency and or re export approval from the U S Government or its agency Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents nine a 1 Before Using the Machine oooonnccccnnnnnnninnnnnnccnnenennnnnnns Xerox Welcome Center coocoociccccccccccococoncnoncrnnnnnnnnnnnnnns Languages Displayed on the Touch Screen CONVENTIONS EEr E E E EE Related Information SOUICES cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Cautions and LimitatiONS oocccccccccccnnccnnccinncnnnnn O WARNING Electrical Safety Information Laser Safety Information Operational Safety Information ooonnnnninnnnnnnnnnnnnnco Maintenance Information
80. necessary 035 709 035 710 035 712 035 720 The remote machine cannot receive your document Ask the other party to check that their machine e Has paper in the tray e Has no paper jam e Has enough memory e Supports G3 reception When specifying features such as relay broadcasting or a remote mailbox ask the other party if their machine supports these features and if the password is correct 035 746 The fax network does not respond Check the following and send the document again e Is the telephone line correctly connected to the machine The other party may not be connected to the fax network or there may be some problem with the network When you are connected to a fax network that requires an access code enter two pauses after the access code and then dial the telephone number 035 749 The other party s telephone number was redialed the set number of times but the remote machine did not answer Ask the other party to check the telephone line and connection to the machine 041 210 An error occurred in the paper tray or Tandem Tray Module Contact the Xerox 041 211 Welcome Center 047 211 An error occurred in the paper output assembly Contact the Xerox Welcome 047 212 Center 336 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 047 213 An error occurred in the finisher Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 047 214 An error occurred in
81. nn 307 recycling product s cassrnisii ideiei 30 Reduce 8 5x11 SEF Original to A4 SEF 233 Reduce Enlarge COPY rc A 50 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 361 19 Index Fax Internet Fax aciei iaaea 92 Scan E Mail irei i a e i aea 128 Reduce Enlarge Presets Copy Mode Settings oooocononncccnnnnacccccccnnn 210 Fax Mode settings c a 235 Scan Mode settings oooooconnocccccnnnocccccccnn 228 AS a E E aS 21 CEMI arrar e T T ER 21 FAX FUNCOM seein eea beta 22 RED o ETT 24 related information SOUICES cooococcccccnncccccccccccnncnns 16 Relay Broadcast Fax Internet Fax ooooconnnnococn 84 Relay Broadcast Report 0 cceceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 198 Remote ACCESS coocoococcccccccccocccocnnonnnncnnncnncnnnnnnnnns 287 Remote Authentication Server Settings Network Settings oooonooncccnnnnnoniccccnnannccccnananno 219 Remote Login Setup Auditron Administration 263 remote machine response prior to transmission 106 Remote Mailbox Fax Internet Fax 100 Remote Server IP Address Authentication 219 Remote Server Name Authentication 219 Remote Server Port Number Authentication 220 Remote Server Realm Name Authentication 220 Remote Server Setup Authentication 219 removing CUM Cartridge zeii aa 306 toner cartridge oooooccconanoniconnnannncarrnnnnciaarrnn 309 Repeat Image COPY cocooccccnnncocccccnnnonnncccnnnnn
82. number of a remote machine wem128 The host name of the remote machine xerox com The domain where the remote machine is hosted Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 105 4 Fax Internet Fax On hook Manual Send Receive Use this feature to make a telephone call with the handset on hook When the phone is on the hook you can hear the other party but cannot talk to them You can also send or receive a fax manually when On hook Manual Send Receive is selected Press Start to begin Receive operation To 1 Select On hook Manual Send Receive on the Memory 100 On hook Exit Line Cut On hook Others screen Send Receive 2 Perform the necessary QO mona sens operations sphanumere amp Manual Receive 3 Select Save O sma Send Receive Switches from the telephone mode to the fax Manual Send Manual Receive modes Alphanumeric Displays letters and numbers on the screen Symbol Displays symbols on the screen Manual Send Select this option to start sending a fax while you are verbally communicating with the recipient Manual Receive Select this option to start receiving a fax or polling after you have communicated with a caller and confirmed that the call is a fax job Dial Start Switches from pulse dialing to tone dialing 106 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 5 Scan E mail This chapter descr
83. of the screen and the buttons displayed will vary depending on service type and job status Stop Cancels jobs that are being processed or on hold Promote Job Promotes a job in the list to be processed immediately after the one being processed The promoted job will be marked with an arrow in the job list on the Current and Pending Jobs screen Last Original Select this option to finish scanning 268 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Completed Jobs Next Original Select this option if you have another document to scan Start Starts scanning the next document or prints a job being held on the machine Print Waiting Jobs Select this option to print the jobs waiting in the incomplete jobs queue Completed Jobs This feature allows you to view the finished jobs in the machine To see the job attributes select a job in the list to display detailed information on the next screen The contents of each screen may differ depending on the type or status of the job 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel 2 Select the Completed Jobs tab 3 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens atton to return to the job programming screen ress Pending Jobs Documents Doc No Job Type Status Remote Terminal Contents Status 0015 Scan Job Completed Mailbox 001 O ie 00114 Scan Job Completed Mailbox 001 1 00113 Scan Job Completed Mailbox 001 11 00112 Sc
84. or group code Indicates a 3 digit speed dial or group code Place this character before and after the code Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 85 4 Fax Internet Fax confirmation Character Function Description lt gt Communication Switches communication lines that include parameter data line switch where the parameter data include characters 0 to 9 or The parameter data must be placed between angle brackets lt and gt Dial tone Suspends dialing until a dial tone is detected detection S Password check Use this character to verify that the correct number has for remote been entered The machine checks if the password you machine entered after S matches the fax number of the remote identification machine If the match is confirmed the machine sends the document space Readability Improves readability by inserting spaces in a telephone improvement number for example 1 234 5678 instead of 12345678 Start DTMF code Pauses regular fax dialing and starts the DTMF dual tone signaling multi frequency method for sending documents to mailboxes on the remote machines Wait for DTMF Wait for a DTMF confirmation signal from the remote machine and proceed to the next step DTMF Method Examples The DTMF method uses combinations of special characters to send documents See the following exa
85. or manually enter the document size For information on how to enter a document size manually refer to Original Size on page 60 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 45 3 Copy Document Feeder The document feeder can hold up to 50 sheets of plain paper 16 32 Ib bond or 38 128 g m The document can be any size of 140 297 mm 5 5 11 inches for width and 210 432 mm 8 5 17 inches for length and the standard sizes of A5 A3 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 SEF Make sure the documents are in good condition and remove all staples or paper clips before loading The document feeder senses standard sizes or you can manually enter a size using the Scan Options tab For information on how to copy mixed size originals using the document feeder refer to Mixed Size Originals on page 61 NOTE To reduce the risk of document feeder jams use the document glass to copy folded or creased documents Replace folded or creased documents with the new copy The machine is capable of sequentially scanning mixed size documents using the document feeder Align the documents against the top corner of the document feeder For information on how to copy mixed size originals using the document feeder refer to Mixed Size Originals on page 61 1 Before loading the documents into the document feeder remove all staples and paper clips 2 Insert the documents neatly into the document feeder face up The first page
86. print feature of the machine With this feature you can send print jobs from a PC directly to the machine NOTE Some of the features described in this chapter are optional and may not apply to your machine configuration In addition the following special printing features are available e E mail printing This feature allows you to print an e mail attachment sent to the machine The printing format for the e mail attachment can be changed by the emulation settings For more information refer to Emulation Settings in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 175 NOTE You can use only plain text in the body of e mail Make sure that plain text is selected as the body text format in your e mail program e Direct printing using ContentsBridge Utility This feature allows you to send a PDF or a TIFF file directly to the machine to print out using ContentsBridge Utility For more information refer to the CentreWare CD ROM e Charge Print This feature allows you to store or cancel print jobs that failed authentication when the Authentication feature is enabled Authentication is required to print the stored documents For more information refer to Charge Print in the Job Status chapter on page 270 e Secure Print This feature allows you to store a confidential document sent from a PC for printing A user ID and a password specified from the PC are required to print out the document For more information refer to Secure Prin
87. receipt number or name of the recipient server or file If the output destination is unknown or not specified is displayed Host Interface Displays the name of the host that has sent the job If the host interface is unknown or not specified is displayed Date Time Completed Displays the date and time the job completed NOTE If Auto Refresh Interval is specified a job will not be automatically updated if itis being processed Job Management Status On the Job List of active jobs you can delete jobs NOTE In some instances the deletion of jobs might be ignored Delete Follow this step to delete a job 1 Select the check box to the left of the job that requires deletion then click Delete If you have selected the check boxes for more than one job all those jobs will be deleted when you click Delete General This page allows you to check the status of the paper trays output trays and consumables of the machine The details displayed may differ from those shown on the touch screen of the machine Follow the steps below to select features available on the Status tab 1 Click Status on the Main Panel on the home page 2 Click the required feature on the collapsible menu of the Menu Panel This page displays the machine information and status It also displays the Refresh Status and Reboot buttons Click the Refresh Status button to display the latest information
88. refer to Special Characters on page 85 4 Start the Fax Internet Fax Job 1 Press the lt Start gt button to send the documents While your fax Internet Fax is being processed if the document feeder or document glass is ready and the machine is equipped with the optional hard disk you can scan the next document or program the next job While the machine is warming up you can also program the next job 000 9 o 3 olL Ke e COD O SOS A A 5 Confirm the Fax Internet Fax Job in the Job Status lt Start gt button 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel to display the Job Status screen The queued fax Internet Fax job will O2 smu AA Y 2 be displayed If no job is displayed on the screen it may have already been processed Current and Pending Jobs o 1 Completed Jobs Doc No Job Type Status ancel ie job programming screen Stored Documents Print Waiting Jobs Remote Terminal Contents Progress J For more information refer to Current and Pending Jobs in the Job Status chapter on page 268 80 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Specifying Destinations Stop the Fax Internet Fax Job Follow the steps below to manually cancel an activated fax Internet Fax job 1 Select Stop on the touch x o s
89. scan ratio for the original TAX 92 Scan Resolution espiar aR 124 Scan SEVICE inci E TOD 228 SCAN OZE cutis Ea ENA AET 126 Scan Size Fax Internet Fax eee 92 Scan Size Defaults Fax Mode 235 Scan Size Defaults Scan Mode settings 226 Scan E Mail oein EE AE 107 Scanned documents 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 133 scanning adjusting document sharpness 05 123 adjusting scan density and contrast 123 assigning file names to documents 118 both sides of the document n 120 changing destination ceeeteeeeenees 115 Document Management field changing values Meta Data 0 0 ee 131 erasing background seeren 124 erasing edges and margin shadows 127 facing pages onto separate sheets 125 procedure coccoccoconcoccononcconcnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 107 requesting notification of e mail recipient 129 selecting document type sses 121 selecting scanned data eeeeeeeeeees 122 sending in sections ococonnoniccnonnnaninininnnann 129 specifying different SIZES oe eee 127 specifying filename for saving 130 specifying image compression ratio 129 specifying resolution Scan n 124 SPECIFYING Size oeenn an a 126 specifyingscanning ratio 0 eee 128 SLOPPING JOD acirccconadanccon isc 110 scanning fax resolution cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 89 Scan to FTP SMB Defaults Scan Mode settings a
90. selected number of times You can select this number in the range from 1 to 10 1 Select Maximum Login Attempts on the System RARA Administrator Settings screen Leg Ate 110 Cancel Enter the number of attempts a person is allowed to enter the System Administrator login ID after which access to the system will be disabled 2 Perform the necessary QO operations 2 y 3 Select Save Login Setup Auditron Administration The Auditron feature is used to prevent the machine from being used by unauthorized users impose different restrictions on individual users accounts and track the total number of copies faxes scanned pages and prints for each account When the Auditron feature is active users need to enter a correct user ID or both user ID and password in order to use the machine Using entered user IDs the Auditron identifies different accounts and tracks jobs done with each account The Login Setup Auditron Administration screen allows you to start configuring various Auditron settings For more information refer to the following Create Check User Accounts page 259 Reset User Accounts page 260 System Administrator Copy Meter page 261 User Details Setup page 261 Charge Print Settings page 262 Fax Billing Data page 263 Remote Login Setup page 263 Login Setup Auditron Mode page 264 1 Select Login Setup Auditron Adri Sanani on Ue Sysiem
91. set append that to the internet address as follows In this example the port number is 80 http vvv xxX yyy ZzzZ 80 The home page of CentreWare Internet Services is displayed NOTE If the Auditron feature is enabled you may be required to enter the user ID and password if one is set up If you need assistance contact the Key Operator NOTE When your access to CentreWare Internet Services is encrypted enter https followed by the internet address instead of http Standard Features CentreWare Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services allows you to display configure and change the current status or settings of the machine through a web browser on a computer instead of the control panel of the machine Interface Options The CentreWare Internet Services home page contains four panels without visible boundaries You can change the left and right panel sizes by dragging the boundary between them Header Panel Menu Panel Header Panel Main Panel Displays the header for all pages The header includes the CentreWare Internet Services logo and the model of the machine Just under this panel on nearly all the pages is the tab bar which corresponds to the six functions or page buttons These are Services Jobs Status Properties Maintenance and Support You can navigate through the pages when you click the text on each tab Logo Panel Logo Panel Displ
92. should be on top with the headings towards the back or left of the machine 3 Place the stack in the middle of the guides aligning the left edge with the document feeder tray and position the guides to just touch the edge of the documents When Auto is selected in Paper Supply the machine automatically selects an appropriate tray according to the document size The selected tray paper size and orientation in the selected tray are displayed on the screen NOTE This feature is available when the machine finds an appropriate tray If there is no appropriate tray temporarily use manual selection for the tray or use the bypass tray For more information on tray selection refer to Paper Supply on page 51 Document Glass The document glass is used for a single page or bound document up to 297 mm 11 inches for width and up to 432 mm 17 inches for length 46 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Copying Procedure 1 Raise the document feeder or the document glass cover 2 Place the document face down on the document glass aligned with the tip of the registration arrow near the top left of the document glass 3 Lower the document feeder or the document glass cover 2 Select the Features The features available on the Basic Copying screen are those used most often NOTE Only those features relevant to the machine configuration will be available
93. side of the paper when printing on both sides of the paper This is when you use Date in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Page Number Position on Side 2 Sets whether to position page numbers in the same position on each side of the paper when printing on both sides of the paper This is when you use Page Number in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 209 11 Setups Original Size Defaults Use this feature to preset document size buttons These are displayed when you use the Original Size feature on the Scan Options screen If you predefine frequently used document sizes you can set the size of the original quickly and easily The Original Size Defaults screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Original Size Defaults on the Copy Mode Settings Choose an item and select Change Settings Original Size Defaults screen Items Current Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch EFFE ma j between screens w 3 Perform the necessary ECT eg a ma Y operations 4 Select Close Original Size 1 11 Allows you to assign your choice of document sizes to each of the 11 buttons AIB Series Size Displays the 10 standard document sizes in A B series size Inch Size Displays the 12 document size in inches Others Allows you to select the size from other se
94. sunlight or near a radiator Follow regular maintenance schedules for cleaning areas such as the document glass CVT glass and output trays Refer to Cleaning the Machine in the Maintenance chapter on page 305 Xerox Welcome Center For additional help If you need any additional help on using your CopyCentre copier or WorkCentre copier printer you can 1 Refer to this User Guide 2 Contact the Key Operator 3 Visit our Customer Web Site at www xerox com or contact the Xerox Welcome Center Please have your serial number at hand when contacting Xerox The Welcome Center will want to know the following information The nature of the problem the serial number of the machine the fault code if any as well as the name and location of your company Follow the steps below to look up the serial number of the machine 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt a x o button on the control panel O O O O SO 2 CO lt Machine Status gt button 2 Select Machine Information on on to return to the job programming screen the Machine Status screen Hac EXACTA Print Mode Machine Information DB Paper Tray B Ondine Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode m Standby m Auto Receive Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 339 16 Problem Solving 3 The serial number will be displayed to return to the job programming screen
95. the Duplex Module Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 047 215 An error occurred in the paper output assembly Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 047 216 An error occurred in the finisher Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 047 218 An error occurred in the Tandem Tray Module Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 211 063 210 An error occurred in the document feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 277 A communication error occurred between scanning and feeding components of the machine Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 062 790 The scanned document is copy prohibited Refer to Illegal Copies in the Before Using the Machine chapter on page 28 and verify the types of documents that can be copied 065 210 065 211 065 212 065 213 065 214 An error occurred in the machine Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 071 210 071 211 Tray 1 malfunctioned Contact the Xerox Welcome Center Use a different paper tray 072 210 072 211 Tray 2 malfunctioned Contact the Xerox Welcome Center Use a different paper tray 073 210 073 211 Tray 3 malfunctioned Contact the Xerox Welcome Center Use a different paper tray 074 210 074 211 Tray 4 malfunctioned Contact the Xerox Welcome Center Use a different paper tray 116 701 Double sided printing is not possible due to insufficient memory Add memory 116 702 Printing was performed using a substitute font Check th
96. the staple cartridge by its lever as shown in the diagram and move the staple cartridge to the right towards you 3 Lift up to remove the staple cartridge 4 Press in both sides of the staple cartridge marked PUSH so that the cartridge case will rise up NOTE If there are still staples inside the staple case the case will not rise up Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 311 15 Maintenance 5 Insert your fingertip into the round section on the cartridge to remove the staple case 6 Push a new staple case into the staple cartridge 7 Push the top of the staple cartridge down as shown in the diagram 8 Remove the tab from the new staple case as shown in the diagram 9 Return the staple cartridge to its original position and push in until it clicks into place 312 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Loading Staples 10 Close the front cover of the Finisher Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 313 15 Maintenance 314 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 16 Problem Solving The machine has built in information to identify and manage error messages and problems It a
97. to 32 alphanumeric characters including spaces as a user name Password Allows you to enter a password using the screen keyboard You can enter 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters NOTE The Password button also appears if you have chosen the use of a password on the Login Setup Auditron Mode screen Remote Login Settings Displays the Remote Login Settings screen On this screen you can configure the following settings e Login Name Allows you to program a log in name that needs to be entered when the machine is accessed through the network e Password Allows you to program a password that needs to be entered when the machine is accessed through the network Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 259 11 Setups Account Limit Displays the Account Limit screen On this screen select Copy Service or Scan Service and then select Account Limit Using the numeric keypad on the control panel you can then specify and restrict the maximum number of pages to be copied or scanned for the account The maximum number can be entered within the range of 1 9 999 999 pages Reset Total Impressions Deletes all data tracked for the selected account Reset Account Clears all settings and data for the selected account Reset User Accounts Use this feature to reset the parameters set for all users accounts and clear all data tracked by the machine 1 Select Reset User Accou
98. to scan up to 600 mm 23 62 inches in length 78 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Internet Fax Procedure NOTE In both single sided and double sided modes scanning a document at its original size or smaller is recommended An enlarged image may be cut off during transmission 2 Select the Features Not available in the double sided mode The features available on the Basic Features screen are those used most often NOTE Only those features relevant to the machine configuration will be available 1 Press the lt All Services gt button 2 Select Fax Internet Fax on the touch screen Ensure that the Basic Features screen is NOTE If the Authentication feature is enabled you may be required to enter the user ID and password if on the control panel displayed ke O lt All Services gt button Select the required service All Services EB conv CA E mail lt Clear All gt button Fax Internet Fax ED rwo Scanning ES sen to Mailbox one is set up If you need assistance contact the Key Operator 3 4 If necessary press one of the tabs and configure the fax Internet Fax settings For Press the lt Clear All gt button once on the control panel to cancel any previous selections Select the button for the feature required If More is selected select Save to confirm the selected feature o
99. try scanning again Memory 100 1 1 Select Covers on the Output Format screen are Covers Cancel 2 Select the required option O No Covers Printed Covers E poner Tray settings 3 Select Save e Front Cover o Body Pages Tray Covers Tray Tray 1 Tray 5 Bypass Front amp Back On A4D Size Detect Covers Plain Plain No Covers Disables the feature Front Cover Makes copies with a different type of paper specified as the cover page before the first page of documents Front amp Back Covers Makes copies with a different type of paper specified as the cover page before the first page and after the last page of documents Printed Covers Off Adds a blank cover to the documents On Copies the first and last pages of the documents onto the cover stock If you want only the front or the back cover to be blank add a blank sheet to the first or last of the documents accordingly Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 69 3 Copy Paper Tray Settings Displays the Covers Paper Tray Settings Screen Select one ofthe presets to specify the Covers Tray and the Body Pages Tray The paper loaded in the trays selected for Covers Tray and Body Pages Tray should be the same size and orientation Five presets including Bypass Tray are available for each For more information on the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen on p
100. values of the Reduce Enlarge Presets can be changed For more information refer to Reduce Enlarge Presets on page 210 Copy Defaults Use this feature to set the default for each copy feature The default set here returns when the power is switched on power save mode is cancelled or the lt Clear All gt button is pressed If you set a default for the features you frequently use you can quickly copy documents without changing the settings each time The Copy Defaults screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Copy Defaults on the Copy Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Copy Defaults 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch rome Cito ae between screens 2 Reduco Erlarge 100 3 Original Type Pencil Text J 3 Perform the necessary 4 Lighter Darker Normal operations 5 Sharpness Normal J ly 4 Select Close Paper Supply Sets the default for the Paper Supply feature on the Basic Copying screen NOTE If the default for Reduce Enlarge is set to Auto Auto cannot be selected for Paper Supply Reduce Enlarge Sets the default for the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Basic Copying screen NOTE If the default for Paper Supply is set to Auto Auto cannot be selected for Reduce Enlarge The preset values of the Reduce Enlarge Presets can be changed For more information refer to Reduce Enlarge Presets on page 210 Original Type Se
101. want to erase from the top bottom right left and center margins Up to 50 mm 2 inches can be entered Margin Shift This feature allows you to change the position of the image on an output page NOTE To use this feature the document orientation must be specified to indicate top of the document for Original Orientation on the Output Format screen NOTE The amount of the image shift depends on the size of paper loaded in the machine NOTE When Mixed Size Originals is selected the amount shifted is determined by the image position of the first sheet and is applied to all subsequent sheets of the documents 1 Select Margin Shift on the Scan Options screen Memory 100 Ready to Copy Quantity 1 comal seve 2 Select the required option Q es Side 1 Site 2 3 Select Save O ro ome a E Margin Shift Wariable Shift Margin Shift No Shift Disables the feature 62 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Options Copy Auto Center Automatically moves images to the center of the paper Margin Shift Variable Shift Automatically moves images by specified amounts on the paper You can enter up to 50 mm 2 inches for both dimensions If your machine is configured to perform double sided copies you can select the options below for the front and back page copies separately e Side 1 Displays the Margin Shift Side 1 scre
102. 00 1 Select Reduce Enlarge on the Scan Options screen A 25 400 3 ak Le 2 Perform the necessary O Ox Bi a3 AAP AB B5 gt B4 y O operations Variable Q Bt OQ Aes Q 3 Select Save O o ez a ez a um A4 gt B5 Preset e 100 Sets the enlargement reduction ratio to 100 original size e Presets Allows you to select the preset enlarge reduce settings Select one of these to specify the enlargement reduction ratio The presets are set up by the Key Operator Variable Allows you to specify an enlargement reduction ratio within the range of 25 to 400 Auto Automatically selects the enlargement reduction ratio depending on the size of documents and the Output Size set When you select this option Output Size is displayed at the right side of the screen Output Format This section describes how to configure the settings for outputting scanned data For more information on these screens refer to the following Image Compression page 129 Read Receipts MDN page 129 Split Send page 129 Document Name page 130 NOTE For Network Scanning the following buttons are also displayed Login Name page 130 Password page 131 Meta Data page 131 128 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide OutputFormat 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Selecta scan type on the touch screen 3
103. 2 and Tray 5 Bypass Trays 3 and 4 can also be set up when these optional trays are fitted Paper Size Specify whether the size of paper loaded in Tray 1 to 2 Trays 3 and 4 can also be set up when these optional trays are fitted is to be automatically identified by the machine as one of the standard paper sizes or identified according to manually entered dimensions for a custom paper size When you select Variable Size the entry fields for specifying dimensions are displayed NOTE You cannot select Variable Size for Tray 3 or Tray 4 if the Tandem Tray Module is installed Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 195 11 Setups Paper Tray Priority Specify either Tray 1 or Tray 2 to be given priority by Auto Tray Switching When the optional Tray 3 and 4 are fitted these can be included and a priority order can be specified Tray 5 Bypass is not available for Auto Tray Switching For more information on Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching in the Paper and Other Media chapter on page 184 Paper Type Priority Specify the priority order of paper types that are selected for Auto Tray Switching This setting overrides the Paper Tray Priority If the priority of paper types is set to the same value then Auto Tray Switching will select depending on the Paper Tray Priority Selecting Auto Paper Off prevents the paper type from being used by Auto Tray Switching For more information o
104. 5 The file could not be sent by CentreWare Scan Services due to insufficient space on the server Delete unnecessary data from the server 016 786 The scanned data could not be written due to insufficient space on the hard disk Delete unnecessary data or initialize the hard disk if the saved data are not needed anymore 016 787 The server IP address set to the job template is incorrect Specify the correct job template 016 788 Failed to retrieve the file from the web browser Take one of the following actions and then try retrieving again Refresh the browser page Restart the browser e Switch the machine off then back on 016 789 The mail processing was interrupted due to insufficient space on the hard disk Lower the image resolution or reduction enlargement ratio or divide the document and send it in smaller segments Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 333 16 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 016 791 The access to the specified destination or job template server failed when using Scan To FTP SMB or CentreWare Scan Services Check if you can access the specified destination or server 016 793 The hard disk has run out of space Delete unnecessary data or initialize the hard disk if the saved data are not needed anymore 016 982 The hard disk has run out of space Delete unnecessa
105. 505 Could not log in to the POP3 server when transmitting e mail Check if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly 330 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 702 PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient space in the print page buffer Take one of the following actions e Lower the resolution in the print driver e Increase the size of the print page buffer Add memory 016 703 An e mail specifying a non registered or invalid mailbox number was received Take one of the following actions e Register the mailbox with the specified number e Send an e mail to a valid mailbox 016 704 The hard disk ran out of space because the mailboxes are full Delete unnecessary documents from the mailboxes 016 705 The document could not be saved for Secure Print because the optional hard disk is not installed The hard disk is required to use the Secure Print feature 016 706 The hard disk ran out of space because the maximum number of users for secure printing was exceeded Delete unnecessary documents or users registered for the Secure Print feature 016 707 Sample prints cannot be made because the hard disk is malfunctioning Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 708 Annotation cannot be made because the hard disk is malfunctioning Delete unne
106. 6 PS Text 34 Wingdings 17 MC Text Font Size 209 400 5000 Default 1200 Specifies the point size of a font in increments of 25 The value of 100 represents 1 point Font Pitch 210 600 2400 Default 1000 Specifies the pitch size of a font The value of 100 represents the pitch size of 1 Form Line 211 5 128 Default 64 or 60 Specify the number of lines on a page The default value will be 64 if the default value of the item 202 203 is 4 60 if the value for 202 203 is 23 Print Sets 212 1 999 Default 1 Specify the number of print sets Image 213 0 Off Enhance 1 Default On Sets whether to enable the enhanced image mode Hex Dump 214 0 Default Off 1 On Sets whether to enable a hex dump Draft Mode 215 0 Default Off 1 On Sets whether to enable the draft mode Binding 217 0 Default LEF 1 SEF Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound Line 218 O Default Off Termination 1 Add LF Appends an LF to CR 2 Add CR Appends a CR to LF and FF 3 CR XX Appends a CR to LF and FF and LF to CR 146 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Emulation Parameters PDF Parameter Item No Value Print Sets 401 1 999 Default 1 Specify the number of print sets 2 Side Print 402 0 Default Off 1 LEF Binding 2 SEF Binding Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound for
107. 8 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Safety Notes With specific regard to laser safety the equipment complies with performance standards for laser products set by government national and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product It does not emit hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance Operational Safety Information To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox Fuji Xerox equipment follow these safety guidelines at all times Do These Always connect equipment to a correctly grounded power outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician gt This equipment must be connected to a protective earth circuit This equipment is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature To avoid risk of electric shock contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are unable to insert the plug into it Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the equipment Always exercise care when moving or relocating equipment Please contact your local Xerox Fuji Xerox Service Department or your local support organization to arrange relocation of the product to a loca
108. 8 Canada approved to DOC CS 03 Other countries certified to national PTT standards 346 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 18 Glossary This chapter contains a list of terms used in the User Guide Each term has a corresponding definition that reflects the meaning of the term as it is used in this Guide Terms Defined Use the following definitions to learn more about the meanings of terms used in this Guide 16K 8K A3 A4 A5 Activity Report Address Book Annotation APS Auditron Auto Clear Auto Exposure Auto Receive B4 B5 194 x 267 mm paper Two slightly different sizes exist depending on the area of purchase 267 x 388 mm paper Two slightly different sizes exist depending on the area of purchase 420 x 297 mm paper 297 x 210 mm paper 210 x 148 mm paper A report that contains information about fax jobs sent and received A list of telephone numbers stored in the machine for easy reference A note or comment added to a document This feature adds the date page numbers and a comment to the document An abbreviation of Auto Paper Selection A tracking system which is built into the machine You can use Auditron to track overall machine usage individual usage and usage of each feature separately The machine goes to the standby mode if there is no activity for a specified time An image quality setting which enhances documents that have
109. 9 5 Scan E mail 1 Select Split Send on the Output Format screen Cancel 2 Select the req uired option i When the file size of an outgoing e mail is too big Off the file can be split into files of specific data size to be sent separately 3 Select Save However file with TIFF or JPEG format will be split Split by page into multiple single page files Disables the feature Split By Page Divides scanned data by the preset number of pages The presets are set up by the Key Operator For more information refer to Other Settings in the Setups chapter on page 242 Document Name Use this feature to enter a name for the file before saving in a mailbox if you do not want to use the name assigned by the machine NOTE The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected Scan to Mailbox 1 Select Document Name on the Output Format screen Enter docurnent name and select Save 2 Perform the necessary evr Se Backspace operations O Peewee a 3 Select Save DIJO LY For information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 Login Name Use this feature to set the login name for a job template server NOTE The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected Network Scanning 1 Select Login Name on the Enter Login Name and select
110. Buffer USB Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for USB interface within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer LPD Spool Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for LPD interface The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Off Allows you to change the memory capacity within the range of 1024 2048 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Memory Allows you to change the memory capacity within the range of 0 50 32 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 221 11 Setups Hard Disk Specifies the spool location to the hard disk Receiving Buffer NetWare Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for NetWare interface within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer SMB Spool Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for SMB interface The cur
111. Cartridge Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Duplex ECM Error Code Ethernet F4800 Factory Default s A tone sounds from the telephone line when a remote machine receives a call You will then know that you are connected to the line The dial type of connected line The machine offers Tone and 10 pps options Enables PC clients to send faxes via the machine In this guide the image data generated when an original is scanned Used in terms such as transmitted document received document and pending document An assembly that automatically separates and feeds single or double sided documents from the input tray into the scanner Refers to a document that contains an image on both sides of the page An abbreviation of Dots Per Inch which is the number of dots that can be printed within a width of one inch Used as the unit for resolution A customer replaceable cartridge which contains a internal drum A printed image is formed on a drum before transferred to paper The use of a keypad sequence tones to transmit to or poll from a remote mailbox Refers to a document that contains an image on both sides of the page An abbreviation of Error Correction Mode An ITU T approved feature for Group 3 facsimile machines ECM transmission sends the document image data in segments and retransmits segments that the remote machine receives incorrectly EC described on the Activity Report shows that the communi
112. Centre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 95 4 Fax Internet Fax Send Header Use this feature to add a remark RESEND or space the start time the date of transmission the sender name the destination name the fax number and the quantity at the top of each page of the document NOTE A regular fax sent from the United States must show this information NOTE This feature is not available for Internet Fax transmissions 1 Select Sen d H eader on the Fii recipient Use C button to can ae Send Options screen EIEE 2 Select the On to enable the This feature adds information such as date of feature oi Ae dd 3 Select Save of However it is not available for iFax recipients Cover Note Use this feature to add a cover sheet to the document containing the following information destination name sender name fax number quantity time and date and remarks You can also add comments using the same comment list as Internet Fax Comment NOTE This feature is not available for Internet Fax transmissions For adding comments on Internet Fax refer to Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents on page 97 Memory 100 1 Select Cover Note on the Send Options screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Cancel Cover Note 2 Perform the necessary a operations Off oo Sender s Comment On off Off Disables the fea
113. Centre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 229 11 Setups 4 Select Close Fax Screen Default Allows you to choose between Basic Features and Address Book for the first screen to be displayed when you select the fax feature Address Book Default Allows you to specify the default key number displayed at the top of the Address Book on the Basic Features screen You can set the key number within the range of 1 to 500 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Transmission Screen Sets whether to display the transmission status while sending documents Fax Defaults Use this feature to set the default for each fax feature The default set here returns when the power is switched on power saver mode is cancelled or the lt Reset gt button is pressed If you set a default for the functions you frequently use you can quickly send documents without changing the settings each time The Fax Defaults screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Fax Defaults on the Fax Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Fax Defaults 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch pms bl anis between screens 2 Ongea Type Tex 3 Perfo rm the necessa ry 3 Lighten Darken Normal J 4 Mixed Size Originals Off O pe rati ons 5 Communication Mode G3 Auto y 4 Select Close Resolution Sets the default for the Resolution feat
114. Clock Timers page 191 Audio Tones page 193 Screen Defaults page 194 Paper Tray Attributes page 195 Auto Job Promotion page 197 Image Quality page 197 190 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Reports page 198 Maintenance Diagnostics page 199 Other Settings page 223 1 Select Common Settings on the System Settings screen 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close Machine Clock Timers Common Settings D Machine Clock Timers J Audio Tones LJ Screen Defaults Paper Tray Attributes Auto Job Promotion J Image Quality m Reports peika DB Other Settings iagnostics Use this feature to set the correct date time and other related values 1 Select Machine Clock Timers on the Common Settings screen 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close Choose an item and select Change Settings Machine Clock Timers Items Current Settings 10 31 2003 M D Y PS 2 Time 1112 AM l 3 Time Zone GMT 9 00 4 Daylight Savings Adjust Off Change 5 Auto Clear 1 Minutes ly Date Set the current date You can select from three date formats Y M D M D Y and D M Y The date set here is printed on lists and reports Time Set the current time You can select a 12 or 24 hour display forma
115. CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro X E R OX 123 0128133 M123 M128 133 123 128 133 User Guide 604P18057 Prepared and Translated by The Document Company Xerox GKLS European Operations Bessemer Road Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1HE ENGLAND O 2005 by Fuji Xerox Co Ltd All rights reserved Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitations material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons screen displays looks etc Xerox The Document Company the digital X and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox Corporation Product names and trademarks of other companies are hereby acknowledged See the About License section for detailed information on licensed products The information in this document is correct at the time of publication Xerox reserves the right at any time to change the information without notice Changes and technical updates will be added in subsequent editions of the documentation For the latest information go to WWW Xerox com Products Subject To Ordinary Export Regulations An export of this product is strictly limited in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and or the export control regulations of the United States You
116. Current and Pending Jobs in the Job Status chapter on page 268 5 Save the Scanned Data The following describes one of the methods used for importing documents to a computer Mailbox Viewer2 allows you to easily import documents from a mailbox on the machine to a computer Mailbox Viewer2 is an application on the CentreWare CD ROM supplied with the machine For information on how to install Mailbox Viewer2 refer to the CentreWare CD ROM Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 109 5 Scan E mail 6 Click Start on the taskbar then select Program gt Xerox gt Utility gt Mailbox Viewer 2 From the list displayed click the name of the machine and then Select Scanner Enter the number 001 200 of the mailbox to be accessed Enter the correct password as AE necessary T A Click Open Mailbox Mailbox No 1 A list of documents savedinthe Pm TS Passware rite E will be Sree Aas a a Select the document to be imported then click Import NOTE You can also select multiple documents For other functions available on Mailbox Viewer2 refer to the Mailbox Viewer2 On line Help Stop the Scan Job Follow the steps below to manually cancel an activated scan job 1 Select Stop on the touch screen Se x 9 or press the lt Stop gt button on the A O O O O control panel to suspend the O Le gt current scan job o gt al Pars Tuv wxYz O
117. DF in the Machine Status chapter on page 278 For the list of emulation parameters and their values for PDF direct printing refer to PDF on page 147 e Logical printer This feature allows you to register emulation parameters set on the machine as a logical printer which you can later select from your PC to print documents Logical printers can be created for PCL TIFF and PostScript using CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to Properties in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 160 Print Driver Features When you select the machine as the printer the associated print screen is displayed on the networked computer Select the Print menu from the toolbar to display the print screen The following options are available on PCL Driver On line Help Job Type e Normal Select this for normal printing e Secure Select this to use the secure print feature You need to enter a user ID and a password before printing e Sample Select this to use the sample print feature You need to enter a user ID before printing e Delayed Select this to use the delayed print feature Specify the start time to print e Fax Select this to send faxes from your PC via the machine 2 Sided Print Makes double sided printing when the duplex unit is installed both sides of the paper can be printed automatically You can select Flip on Long Edge to align to the long edge of the paper or Flip on Sho
118. Delete v Print Refresh Brings the list up to date 272 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Stored Documents Print Prints a document selected in the list Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Public Mailbox Allows you to confirm output or delete the documents in a public mailbox on the machine For more information refer to Save in Public Mailbox in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 104 1 Select Public Mailbox on the Stored Documents screen tton to return to the job programming screen Public Mailbox J No Doc No Type Stored Date No of Docs 5 4 00010 Joc for Polling 2 3 2001 1020 AM 655 2 2 00020 Joc for Polling 4 6 2002 810 AM 1 3 00030 Joc for Polling 6 9 2003 1215 PM 10 Delete 4 00040 oc for Pollin 7 7 2000 430 PM 100 5 00050 Joc for Polline 11 1 2000 830 AM 999 me Print Refresh Brings the list up to date Select All Selects all the documents in the Public Mailbox Print Prints a document selected in the list Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 273 12 Job Status 274 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 13 Machine Status This chapter contains information on how to check the machine status the billing meter the status of the toner cartridge o
119. Destination Select an output tray for the copy job from Center Output Tray and Finisher Tray NOTE Before using the Center Output Tray it must be enabled through the Extended Tray Module setting Refer to Extended Tray Module on page 200 Image Quality Copy This section describes the features used to adjust the quality of the output image using the Image Quality options For more information on the features available refer to the following Original Type page 56 Lighten Darken page 57 Sharpness page 57 Auto Exposure page 58 1 Press the lt All Services gt button INN Quantity AAA as 2 Select Copy on the touch Original Type Lighten Darken O Sharpness Pencil Text m Normal B Normal screen j Auto Exposure 3 Select the Image Quality tab on 4 Select the required option Original Type This feature allows you to copy at optimum image quality by selecting the type of the original documents 56 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Image Quality Copy 1 Select Original Type on the Image Quality screen m 2 Select the required option 3 Select Save Ready to Copy O Pencil Text Text Use this option to copy documents that contain text only Select this option when text must be clearly copied Text amp Photo Use this option to copy documents that contain both text and photographs Tex
120. Displays only the job flow sheets owned by the currently logged in user 136 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Check Mailbox e Shared Sheets Administrator Displays the job flow sheets owned by the Key Operator NOTE Job flow sheets owned by unique users other than the currently logged in user are not displayed When not logged in to the machine as a unique user e System Administrator Displays only the job flow sheets owned by the Key Operator Non System Administrator Displays only the job flow sheets owned by users other than the Key Operator NOTE Job flow sheets owned by unique users are not displayed Select Job Flow Sheet Screen This screen allows you to select and execute a job flow sheet on the documents stored in the selected mailbox 1 Select Select Job Flow Sheet on the Job Flow Settings Select a Job Flow Sheet and press Start Mailbox 003 Select Job Flow Sheet screen Name Last Updated a Sheet Filtering O Fax to Sales 2004 1 23 608PM dese locuments 2 Perform the necessary Col Forward to QA 2004 23 627 PM ay operation S C Print web orders 2004 1 23 6 28 PM i E FTP to Legal 2004 1 23 631PM J Show Details F fi 14111 i ly Edit Destinati 3 Select Close E Forward to customer info 2004 1 23 632PM Edit Destination Name Last Updated Select either of these options to sort the job flow sheet
121. Displays the Image Rotation Rotation Direction screen Image Rotation Rotation Direction Screen Ready to Copy Cancel Save O Staple Position When originals of different sizes are used ga image is rotated such that the top edge Portrait gt of the landscape original is aligned with O Original as the right edge of the portrait original Left Edge Portrait Original Right Edge Use this screen to determine the edge of the copy paper where the top of the document image is aligned when documents are of mixed orientation The following options are available Image Rotation Rotation Direction Staple Position Rotates the image depending on the staple position This option is available only when the finisher is installed on the machine e Portrait Orientation Left Edge Rotates the image to align the top of a landscape document with the left side of a portrait document e Portrait Orientation Right Edge Rotates the image to align the top of a landscape document with the right side of a portrait document Mirror Image Negative Image This screen offers you two different features mirroring the image or inverting the image 1 Select Mirror Image Negative Image on the Scan Options Ready to Copy Mirror Image Negative Image Cancel screen Mirror Image Negative Image 2 Select the required option oir oft O Ea O E 3 Select Save
122. Enlarge features on the Basic Copying screen Ready to Copy Reduce Enlarge Preset 25 400 100 x O Variable Independent 25 78 400 XY Copy All wan A32 2 Select the required option 3 Select Save Preset e Presets Allows you to select from seven preset enlarge reduce ratios The presets are set up by the Key Operator Copy All Reduces the image of documents slightly than the selected reduction enlargement ratio to copy the complete onto the paper 50 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Copying Variable Allows you to specify a reduction enlargement ratio using the screen keypad or the scroll buttons on the touch screen within the range 25 400 in 1 increments Independent X Y Allows you to specify a reduction enlargement ratio individually for the width and length within the range of 25 400 in 1 increments e Auto Automatically specifies the reduction enlargement ratio individually for the width and length to fit on the paper e Auto Copy All Enables the Auto feature and reduces the image of the document slightly smaller than the reduction enlargement ratio to copy all the image of the document onto the paper e XY Specifies the same ratio for the width and length at the same time NOTE When Auto is selected Tray 1 is selected automatically even if Auto is selected in Paper Supply
123. Fax Receiving Mode Allows you to set the fax reception mode Manual Receive or Auto Receive 1 Select Fax Receiving Mode on the Machine Status screen Cancel Joo save Fax Receiving Mode O Manual Receive Auto Receive 278 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Billing Meter Print Report Manual Receive Starts receiving a fax or polling after you have answered the call and confirmed it is a fax Auto Receive Receives a fax automatically Billing Meter Print Report This screen allows you to view the billing meter information and also specify the output sequence for various reports and lists For more information refer to the following Billing Meter page 279 User Account Billing Meter page 280 Print Report List page 280 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt to return to the job programming screen button on the control panel AN AT 2 Select the Billing Meter Print 7 iiss Accomm Report tab Boo 5 3 Select the required option E Print reporto Billing Meter Billing Meter Allows you to view the total number of prints made on the machine using the Current Meter Reading You can also view the serial number 1 Select Billing Meter on the Billing Meter Print Report screen to return to the job programming screen Billing Meter Current Meter Reading Serial Number Meter 1 200 m Xerox CopyCe
124. For the capacity of each tray refer to the Specifications chapter Standard Sizes NOTE The standard sizes of paper that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the Key Operator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 E EA Dalas richer A6 105 0 148 0 LEF Xx x o xX xX A5 148 0 210 0 SEF o xX o o x LEF x xX o o x A4 210 0 297 0 SEF o xX o o o LEF o o o o o A3 297 0 420 0 SEF o x o o o B6 128 5 182 0 SEF xX x o o x LEF x xX o o x B5 182 0 257 0 SEF o x o o x LEF o o o o o B4 257 0 364 0 SEF o x o o o 5 5 x 8 5 139 7 215 9 SEF o x o o x LEF x xX o o x 7 25 x 10 5 184 2 266 7 SEF x xX o o x LEF o o o o o Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 185 10 Paper and Other Media Paper size e A Tays 4 Trays Dumler rise 8 x 10 203 2 254 0 SEF X X O O X LEF X X oO Oo X 8 5 x 11 215 9 279 4 SEF O xX O O O LEF O O O Oo O 8 46 x 12 4 215 0 315 0 SEF X X Oo O X 8 5 x 13 215 9 330 2 SEF O X oO O O 8 5x 14 215 9 355 6 SEF O Xx O O O 11 x 15 279 0 381 0 SEF X X O O X 11 x 17 297 4 431 8 SEF O X O O O A4 Cover 297 0 223 0 LEF X X O Oo X 9 x11 279 4 228 6 LEF X X O O X
125. IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license including the GNU Public License Illegal Copies USA Congress by statute has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 Obligations or Securities of the United States Government such as Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA etc Bonds U S Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds Internal Revenue Stamps If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes Postage Stamps canceled or uncanceled For philatelic purposes Postage Sta
126. Internet Fax Procedure This section describes the basic procedure for sending faxes and Internet Faxes Follow the steps below 1 Load the Documents page 78 2 Select the Features page 79 3 Specify the Destination page 79 4 Start the Fax Internet Fax Job page 80 5 Confirm the Fax Internet Fax Job in the Job Status page 80 Stop the Fax Internet Fax Job page 81 NOTE If the Authentication feature is enabled you may need an account number before using the machine To get an account number or for more information contact the Key Operator NOTE For information on using Direct Fax from PC clients refer to Fax Driver On line Help on the CentreWare CD ROM 1 Load the Documents The following steps explain how to load documents using the document feeder When sending a fax you can scan up to 600 mm 23 5 inches in length single sided mode You can also use the document glass to send documents if required This machine is capable of scanning mixed size originals using the document feeder Align the documents against the inner corner of the document feeder and enable the Mixed Size Originals feature For more information refer to Mixed Size Originals on page 92 1 Load documents face up into the document feeder or face down on the document glass NOTE The long fax document scan feature has the following limitations e Only available when using the document feeder Allows you
127. Internet Services 169 POD a dada 214 Poster COPY usina 71 PostScript Font Absence occcccccccccocicconnnoncnncos 224 PostScript Font List 0 0 0 cccceeceesesseeeeeeeeeeeees 281 PostScript Font Substitution oooooinnniinin 224 PostScript Memory siei 221 PostScript Paper Supply esseeeeeeeeees 224 Power Saver button coooooococcccccccccccccncnnannaononncnnnnn 35 Power Saver light button 39 power Saver Modes ccecceeceeeeeeeeeseeseeteeaeees 39 Power Saver Settings CentreWare Internet Services 605 162 Powering Off acid cir diia 38 Powenpg OM seriea teoriei aE E AE 38 Powering onoff aorormieni aaa 38 preparing paper for loading coooocociiininnnnnon 181 PUNE 2c gate ddr 141 Print Area mesita licita 223 print area Selector siii 200 print driver features oooooioccccococcccnccccconccicnnannnnnns 142 Print Mode Machine Status 000 277 Print Mode Settings cccccceeeeeeeees 220 281 Print Report List Billing Meter 280 print settings changing occconcncccnnnnncccccccnannnnos 262 printing documents cee eeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeaes 141 Priority Send Delayed Start Fax Internet Fax 94 Private Mailbox oooooococcccccoccccconoccccccnncnnncaninns 104 problem SOIVING srein iaa 315 problems output quality oooooooocccnccciccccococcconcnncnnnno 339 troubleshooting se
128. Job Counter Report Displays the Job Counter Report screen Select this option and press the lt Start gt button to output this list NOTE This button is displayed with Key Operator access Job Counter Report Auditron Administration Displays the Auditron Administration screen Select the type of service on the left and the required user account numbers and press the lt Start gt button on the control panel to output the list The multiple user account numbers can be selected or check the Select All 0001 0500 check box to select all account numbers NOTE This button is displayed with Key Operator access e Auditron Report Print Copy Fax Scan Auditron Report e Auditron Report an Auditron Report Consumables This screen allows you to view toner usage and the status of cartridges 282 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Faults 1 Select the Consu mables tab on Pres tton to return to the job programming screen the Machine Status screen TA Consumables Status 1 Toner Cartridge Ready 2 Drum Cartridge Ready 3 Staple Cartridge Ready Faults This screen allows you to output a report of recent errors the date and time of the errors the error codes and the status of each error The status is either active or cleared 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the control panel 2 Select the Faults tab prin
129. Machine Information For enquiry on maintenance and operation Machine Configuration Call your local Service Representative J XXXXXX Serial Number Software Version box OXXX B XX XX NOTE The serial number is also found on the metal plate on the left side of the machine behind Cover A For more information refer to Xerox Welcome Center in the Before Using the Machine chapter on page 13 340 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 17 Specifications This chapter contains the specifications for the machine Use the specifications listed below to identify the capabilities of the machine The machine adheres to strict specifications approvals and certifications These specifications are designed to provide for the safety of users and to ensure that the machine operates in a fully functional state Note that improvements in specifications and the appearance of the product may be made without prior notice For more information on the specifications contact your Xerox Representative Machine Specifications Hardware Configuration CopyCentre 123 128 133 e Processor Document Feeder Double sided Module or Document Glass Cover e Two paper trays and a bypass tray WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 e Processor Document Feeder Double sided Module or Document Glass Cover e Two paper trays and a bypass tray e Printer NOTE The configurations listed above are for standard machine con
130. Multiple Sets the scroll buttons and the numeric keypad are displayed at the right side of the screen to specify the number of copies Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 99 4 Fax Internet Fax Remote Mailbox F Code This feature allows you to access a mailbox on a remote machine to send and retrieve confidential documents You must know the mailbox number and the password if one is set up to access the remote mailbox For more information on how to retrieve confidential documents from a remote mailbox refer to Polling on page 103 NOTE This feature is not available for Internet Fax transmissions 1 Select Remote Mailbox on the Send Options screen 2 Select the required option sample 001 O10 DO off gt i 3 Select Save On Password Off Disables the feature On Sets confidential transmissions Remote Mailbox Number and Password are displayed at the right side of the screen e Remote Mailbox Number Enter a mailbox number for the remote machine using the numeric keypad on the control panel The mailbox number is a 3 digit code from 001 to 999 e Password Enter a password for the mailbox of the remote machine if required The password is a 4 digit code Next Sets the entered value and moves to the other entry field This feature enables fax transmissions using the F Code standard defined by the Communications and Information
131. NOTE Select the lt Start gt button on ST ne the control panel to resume the O suspended job SO E O y lt C gt button NOTE Pressing the lt Stop gt button on the control panel suspends print jobs 2 If required press the lt Job Status gt button to display the coms A Job Status screen To exit the paga Type Status E ee Progress Job Status screen press the 00002 Scan Job Scanning AAD 100 vi 2 lt Features gt button Press the lt C gt button on the E control panel to delete the suspended job 110 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide E mail E mail This section describes how to scan documents to send them as e mail attachments You can specify destination addresses by using the screen keyboard to enter the addresses or by selecting from the address book For more information on how to make entries using this screen refer to the following Address Book page 111 Keyboard page 113 Sender page 114 Sender s Details page 114 Delete Recipient Clears the currently selected address entry field Change Settings page 115 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Select E mail on the touch screen 3 Perform the necessary operations Address Book Memory 100 Enter the recipient s E mail Address E mail Image Quality Scan Options Output Format Select Recipient A
132. P3 server POP3 Server IP Address Allows you to enter the IP address of the POP3 server in the form of vvv xxx yyy zZzz This entry is required only when selecting By IP Address on the POP3 Server Setup screen POP3 Server Name Allows you to enter the POP3 server name in the style of FQDN within a maximum of 64 characters This entry is required only when selecting By Server Name on the POP3 Server Setup screen POP3 Server Port Number Allows you to enter the port number for the POP3 server communication within the range of 1 65535 POP3 Server Check Interval Allows you to enter the interval to poll the POP3 server within the range of 1 120 minutes in 1 minute increments POP3 Server Login Name Allows you to enter the user name used to log in to the POP3 server up to 64 characters POP3 Server Password Allows you to enter the password used to log in to the POP3 server up to 36 characters POP Password Encryption Allows you to specify whether or not to encrypt the log in password using APOP Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 217 11 Setups SMTP Server Settings This feature allows you to set up the SMTP server settings such as port number IP address server name and a password 1 Select SMTP Sever Settings on the Network Settings Choose an tem and select Change Settings SMTP Server Settings screen Items Current Settin
133. Print 3 Select the required option E petayes print pte mos Charge Print The print jobs that failed authentication i e a wrong user ID and or password was entered in the print driver when the Authentication feature is enabled are stored or cancelled as specified in Charge Print settings If the machine receives a document without a user ID or no user ID is specified in the print driver the saved document will be listed as No User ID The settings for Charge Print are set up by the Key Operator For more information refer to Charge Print Settings in the Setups chapter on page 262 1 Select Charge Print on the Stored Documents screen Select the User ID you want to check Refresh Charge Print 001_ No User ID J ooz 33333 J a Go to 003 mm J 004_22222 001 200 gt Document List P C Refresh Brings the information up to date 270 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Stored Documents Go to Use this field to specify the Charge Print number to be displayed at the top of the screen You can set the number within the range of 1 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List Displays the log in screen after selecting a user ID from the list Enter the required user ID to display the stored documents e Delete Deletes a document Print Prints a document selected in the list You can s
134. Programming chapter Setup Menu Allows you to set or change the following features from this screen Mailbox Stored Programming Job Flow Sheets Address Book Group Send Comment and Paper Type For more information refer to the Setups chapter and the Stored Programming chapter Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 37 2 Product Overview Power On Off Powering On Ensure that the machine is connected to a suitable power supply and that the power plug is firmly connected to the electrical outlet The machine is ready to make copies about 12 seconds after powering on varies with machine configuration For more information refer to Machine Specifications in the Specifications chapter on page 341 1 Press the power switch to the lt I gt position NOTE If the machine does not start up check that the RESET button on the back of the machine is in the reset position depressed Powering Off When you switch off the machine if it is equipped with the optional hard disk it remains on for approximately 10 seconds while it stores files and prepares for shutdown The machine then shuts down completely CAUTION Wait at least 20 seconds between powering the system on and off Failure to do this could cause damage to the hard disk Ground Fault Interrupter GFI If a fault is detected in the power supply to the machine a Ground Fault Interrupter
135. Reduce Enlarge If Preset or Variable is selected the stored size will be set to Auto Size Detect File Format Select the file format from the drop down menu If the Output Color on the Basic Scanning screen is set to Black TIFF Multi page TIFF or PDF will be displayed in the drop down menu If the Output Color is set to Grayscale TIFF Multi page TIFF JPEG or PDF will be displayed Image Quality Background Suppression Specify whether to enable background suppression on the scanned image Contrast Select the contrast of the scanned data You can select from five different levels in the drop down menu Lighten Darken Select the density of the scanned data You can select from seven different levels in the drop down menu Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Services Setting Item Description Sharpness Select the sharpness of the scanned data You can select NOTE This item will not be from five different levels in the drop down menu displayed when Black is selected for Output Color Original Type Select the type of original You can select Photo amp Text NOTE This item will not be Text or Photo from the drop down menu displayed when Grayscale is selected for Output Color Image Compression Select the level of JPEG compression You can select from NOTE This item will not be five different levels in the drop down
136. SOAP Port StatUS ica ARA ne 245 SOtUP MSM ss des occscczesceasMeulasvalonsaccdengaassacisgaslarsesussaguaebarasbaalegealasscsunendsie 245 WIAIDOXS so EEE 245 Job Flow Sheets seene A as Li 247 Address Book t a a a aa E A AAA 250 CLOUD Send it 255 COmMent cissceives EAE EE 256 Paper Ty Pe inicial cani dde 256 System Administrator SettidgS ooonncnnnnnnnnnccccnnnnnnancnoncccnnnnnnnnnannnnnos 256 System Administrator Login lD ooocccccnnnninoconccccnnococononanaanncnnncnnnnnnos 257 System Administrator PassWOlTO ooooocccnnnnccccononocnncccncccnnnncanrncncnnnnnnnns 257 Maximum Login Attempts oooooooooocooocooocoocnnncnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononinnnns 258 Login Setup Auditron AdMinistratiON oooooocccnnnccnnococaccncccccnnnnnarrccnnnnnnns 258 Create Check User Account cooooccocccocicccccconononconnno nono non nnnno nono nnnnnnnns 259 Reset User ACCOUNTS ooooooccccccncconcconcnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnoninenoness 260 System Administrator Copy Meter ooooonnonoconcccccccccccnnonannncnnnncnnnannns 261 User Details Setup ooonooooocccccnnncncnnononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnonononononononos 261 Charge Print SEtINOS il 262 FAX Bling Dit e 263 Remote Login Sell 263 Login Setup Auditron Mode oooooocccccccononoconcccncncnnnnannancccnnnanononnnnnnnnos 264 Mo oS s IAU K P E ii 267 JOD Statu S cata a dd REAA EEE 267 Current and Pending JODS iii ae 268 Completed JODS iii io 269 Stored DOCUMENUHS eee aa aa en
137. Save Memory 100 Output Format screen z 2 Perform the necessary DPDAEEAMHAAMMO Cerne operations 1nnoooantana QuUudduutie Es 3 Select Save Doro SOVIET For information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 130 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide OutputFormat Password Use this feature to set the password for a job template server NOTE The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected Network Scanning Memory 100 1 Select Password on the Output Format screen 2 Perform the necessary 0628106 JleJ Ce operations 0 vm WEEE coaoQVanatce Es 3 Select Save Don DaUdJAJctta For information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 Meta Data Use this feature to change the value of the Document Management Field DMF if it is set up for the selected job template NOTE The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected Network Scanning Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 131 5 Scan E mail 132 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 6 Check Mailbox This chapter describes the methods for checking printing or deleting documents in a mailbox You can store the following types of documents marked with matching icons
138. Scan Options screen Check the selected options 003 761 The paper size in the tray selected by auto tray switching differs from the paper size in the tray selected at the tray selection Either change the paper size for the tray or change the paper type priority setting 003 780 Compression of scanned data was unsuccessful Lower the resolution or reduction enlargement ratio to reduce the data size or send the document in smaller segments 003 795 The reduction enlargement ratio exceeds the setting range when the scanned document is enlarged reduced to the specified paper size Directly enter the reduction enlargement ratio or change the paper size 003 972 The number of scanned pages exceeds the impression limit set for the service Consult the Key Operator for the impression limit 003 973 The direction of the set document does not match the direction of paper in the selected tray Start the job as it is or cancel the job and select the correct setting 003 970 003 976 016 981 An error occurred because the document size exceeds the scanning area of the machine Change the document size or divide and send the document in smaller segments 003 977 The document size differs from the one set previously for the Bound Originals Booklet Creation Poster feature Set the correct size of document and restart the job 003 980 The staple position is not correct Check the document orie
139. Select Print Mode Settings on the System Settings screen Print Mode Settings Select th e req u i red option D Allocate Memory D Other Settings Select Close 220 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Print Mode Settings Allocate Memory Use this feature to specify memory capacities required for printing and for the receive buffer for each interface 1 Select Allocate Memory on the Print Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Allocate Memory 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch re ei between screens 2 Receiving Buffer Parallel 64 KB 3 Perform the necessary o operations 5 Receiving Buffer NetWare 64 KB J y 4 Select Close PostScript Memory Allows you to change the PostScript memory capacity within the range of 8 00 96 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving Buffer Parallel Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity when using the parallel port within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Receiving
140. Select this profile for sending super fine documents e Data compression MMR e Stored Document Size A4 B4 A3 letter legal e Resolution Standard Fine Superfine 400dpi Superfine 600dpi TIFF J Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG Data compression JBIG Stored Document Size A4 B4 A3 letter legal e Resolution Standard Fine Superfine 400dpi Superfine 600dpi 102 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide On hook Others Fax On hook Others Fax This section describes features on the On hook Others screen For information refer to the following Polling page 103 Store for Polling page 104 On hook Manual Send Receive page 106 1 Press the lt All Services gt button Ene recipient Use C button to cancel entry Memory 100 inn abe ae SS 2 Select Fax Internet Fax on the o rating 9 Store for Poling Off Off On hook tou ch screen B m Manual Send Receive 3 Select the On hook Others tab 4 Select the required option Polling This feature allows you to retrieve a document from a remote machine which is referred to as polling The remote machine information is entered using the same method for sending faxes but the Polling option is used to initiate retrieving the fax from the remote machine You must know the mailbox number and the password if set up of the remote machine to retrieve the document NOTE T
141. Tandem Tray Module 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Tray 3 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 321 16 Problem Solving In Tray 4 1 Pull out Tray 4 of the Tandem Tray Module 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 If paper is jammed underneath the inner cover open the cover and remove the paper 4 Close the Tray 4 Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the bypass tray 1 Remove the jammed paper in the bypass tray Paper Jams in the Duplex Module Cover D Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Duplex Module 1 Open the bypass tray 2 Open the Duplex Module Cover D while lifting up the release lever 3 Remove the jammed paper inside the Duplex Module 4 Close the Duplex Module Cover D until it latches 322 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Paper Jams 5 Close the bypass tray Paper Jams in the Finisher Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Finisher Top Cover and Transport Cover F In Finisher Top Cover 1 Press the button on the Finisher Top Cover to open it 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Finisher Top Cover In Finisher Transport Cover F 1 Open the Finisher Transport Cover F
142. User Guide 155 9 CentreWare Internet Services Undo Reset the values before a change was made New settings will not be sent to the machine Refresh Click this button to display the latest Job Template List File Repository Setup This page allows you to set up or change the file repository setups File Repository Setup Select the file repository setup you want to configure Name Enter the name of the repository setup Protocols Select FTP or SMB for a transfer protocol Server Name Enter the name of the server to transfer scanned data Port No Specify the port number Remote Path Enter the path in the server where the data will be saved When SMB is selected in Protocols you can enter the name of the shared volume Login Name Enter the user ID Password Enter the password for the user ID Re enter Password Re enter the password for verification General Settings Jobs This page allows you to specify whether to print the log in and or domain names on the job log list Unchecked items will not be displayed on a job log User Information Select the items to be listed on a job log e Login Name Domain This page displays a list of active and completed jobs sent using the protocols or from the machine control panel The details displayed may differ from those shown on the touch screen of the machine In addition to displaying details on the jobs this page all
143. WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this li
144. X Auto Run X x xX Manual Run X x X Entered Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Personal Personal Shared Operators own other Create X X O X Display X X Delete X X O X Change Settings X X O X Display Document X O O X Delete Document X O O X Store Document X O O X Print Document X O O X 294 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox Entered Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Personal Personal Shared Operators own other Job Flow Display X O O X Sheet Link X X O X Auto Run X O O X Manual Run X O O X Unentered Users Malbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Personal Shared Operators Create X O X Display O Delete O O O Change Settings O O O Display Document O O O Delete Document O O O Store Document O O O Print Document O O O Job Flow Display O O O Dne Link O O O Auto Run O O O Manual Run O O O O Operation available X Operation not available 1 When storing documents into or retrieving documents from the mailbox authentication is not applicable to the following operations e Confidential fax reception e Confidential Internet Fax reception e Retrieving documents that use scan driver or Mailbox Viewer2 2 You can use them only when the mailbox operations
145. Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu Item Description Default F Code Specify whether or not to perform F Code transmission If you select On then enter the appropriate F Code and password Off Relay Broadcast Specify whether or not to use the machine as an initiating relay broadcast station in order to use the registered Address Number as a relay station If you select On enter a Relay Station ID Broadcast recipients and Print at Relay Station Off Billing Day Time Specify whether to enable billing of user accounts for fax jobs during daytime No Billing Billing Night Time Specify whether to enable billing of user accounts for fax jobs during nighttime No Billing Billing Midnight Specify whether to enable billing of user accounts for fax jobs at midnight No Billing With Internet Fax selected Item Description Default E mail Address Enter an e mail address up to 128 characters Recipient Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Index Enter a single alphanumeric character to search the Address Book Communication Mode Select a communication mode from either G3 Auto F4800 or G4 Auto G3 Auto Resolution Select a resolution level to be used for transmission from among Panel Standard Fine Superfine 400dpi and Sup
146. Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 325 16 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation The machine displays a tray fault Follow the steps below 1 Open the paper tray 2 Move the paper tray guides away from the paper 3 Move the paper tray guides against the paper so that they are just touching the paper 4 Power the machine off and then on Deformed transparencies Check that Transparency is selected in Paper Type The machine automatically adjusts for different types of media Transparencies tolerate less heat than paper Blank output Check that the document is loaded face up in the document feeder If the drum cartridge is new the toner may not be dispensed Repeat the job Check that the seal tape has been removed from the new drum cartridge Reinstall the drum cartridge and the toner cartridge Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Streaks solid or dotted lines or spots Clean the document glass the CVT glass the areas under the platen cover the document feeder and the paper guides If the machine has been idle for an extended period of time or if the toner or drum cartridge is new begin the job again Run the job using the document glass Reinstall the drum cartridge Check the quality of the document Use Border Erase to remove lines and marks from the edges of th
147. aa an Eaa rn 270 Charge Print J cn ciuts deta e aretet eenei e naaa akaa nee na niia Saa iatna Larai siS oma 270 Secure mL EAE EA E NENE 271 Sample Praia a t E dees E E EEE E EAE 272 Dela ved Prius di 272 Public Mailbox iio das 273 Machine Status sia cci csc cecescndecestscssasecwssecsesecendecessecsdetosswesecscdecesserens 275 Machine Status iii bes 275 Machine Information oooooooocconocoooconcnnnnnnncnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnononoss 276 Paper ray se incio 276 10 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents Overwrite Hard DiSk ooooocccccccccccnnccnnncnnnoncncnnnnonnnnnonononononnnenonoss 277 A th tinge cuageataiacsaiagetabsasuacasoass 277 Fax Receiving Mode c ccecceeeeeee a a a e A 278 Billing Meter Print Report oooooomiooococococcanannnnneconnennnnnnnsnccnnnnn enanas 279 Billing Meter nren a aaa A A a leona 279 User Account Billing Meter sssesssssossrnrrrrnnootnnnnnnnueessnnrnnnneeseeeeee 280 PrintReporUliS tacuba a 280 GONSUMADIES murio acen 282 e I S A E AE a ds 283 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration ooomncccnncnnnmmmmmmm 285 Overview of AuthenticatiON oooooonnnnnnnonccccnnncoconnncnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnns 285 Users Controlled by Authentication ooonnnnoncccnnnnnnccnccncconccnnncnnnannns 285 Types of Authentication s22 22 5 tes cape ita incite smetenezin and nsdledeesehetactes 286 Functions Con
148. access to safe areas only Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted with covers or guards which would require a tool to remove Never remove these covers or guards Maintenance Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the customer documentation supplied with the product Do not carry out any maintenance procedures on this product which are not described in the customer documentation Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 17 1 Before Using the Machine Cleaning Your Product WARNING Before cleaning this product unplug the product from the electrical outlet Always use materials specified for this product The use of other materials may result in poor performance and may create a hazardous situation Do not use aerosol cleaners they may be explosive and flammable under certain circumstances Electrical Safety Information gt Only use the power cord supplied with the equipment gt Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet easily accessible Do not use an extension cord If you do not know whether an outlet is grounded consult a qualified electrician gt This equipment is to be used on a branch circuit that has larger capacity than rated ampere and voltage of this machine See data plate on the rear panel for the rated ampere and voltage of this equipment If the machine needs to be moved to a different location contact a Xerox Servic
149. achine Clock Timers in the Setups chapter on page 191 1 Press the lt Log In Out gt button gt x o on the control panel A OOO O _O 200 EOS O SO EL lt Log In Out gt button 2 Enter the Key Operator ID using the numeric keypad on the control panel Select Confirm on the System Administrator Login screen UserD HE NOTE The default Key Operator ID is 11111 If the Authentication feature is enabled you may be required to enter a password The default password is x admin The password is case sensitive Enter user details and select Confirm Cancel J Confirm System Administrator Login 40 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Changing the Default Time Settings 3 Select System Settings on the System Administrator Menu screen 4 Select System Settings on the System Settings screen 5 Select Common Settings on the System Settings screen 6 Select Machine Clock Timers on the Common Settings screen 7 Select the required option 8 Select Change Settings 9 Change the value using the scroll buttons or select required options 10 Select Save System Administrator Menu m User Mode DB System Settings an option The machine will be rebooted upon completion of certain selections System Settings System Sett
150. acters Enter the code using the numeric keypad on the control panel e Password You can enter a password composed of spaces numbers 0 9 and symbols up to 20 characters Enter the code using the numeric keypad on the control panel Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 101 4 Fax Internet Fax Next Sets the entered value and moves to the other entry field Internet Fax Profile This feature allows you to specify a profile to restrict the attribute information for transmissions between machines equipped with Internet Fax such as image resolution and paper size NOTE This feature is not available for regular fax transmissions ton Memory 100 1 Select Internet Fax Profile on the Send Options screen Enter recipient Use C buti To Fax Profile cance Save i i TIFF S is a standard format for Internet fax iFax 2 Select the req uired option a TIFF S Select TIFF S when sending A4 document size with Standard or Fine Resolution 3 Select Save TIFF F Use TIFF F or TIFF J to send larger documents up to AQ size with Superfine Resolution TIFF J This feature is not available for Fax recipients This is the standard specification of Internet Fax for documents that are larger than A4 Automatically reduces the size to A4 for transmission e Data compression MH Stored Document Size A4 e Resolution Standard Fine TIFF F
151. additional sources of information are available for the machine e Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 Quick Reference Guide e Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 System Administration Guide e The On line Help systems Print Drivers and CentreWare Utilities e The CentreWare Utilities Documentation HTML NOTE Please note that the screens shown in this User Guide apply to a fully configured machine and therefore may not exactly represent the configuration being used Cautions and Limitations This section describes the cautions and limitations to observe when using this machine When moving the machine hold the middle part of the machine and not the control panel or document feeder area Excessive pressure on the document feeder may cause machine malfunction Safety Notes Read these safety notes carefully before using this product to make sure you operate the equipment safely Your Xerox Fuji Xerox product and recommended supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency approval and 16 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Safety Notes compliance to established environmental standards Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your product The safety and environment testing and per
152. age 52 Transparency Separators This feature allows you to copy onto transparency stock to place dividers between the pages and to make hard copy sets for handouts Memory 100 1 Select Transparency Separators on the Output EAT Format screen Oo m Paper Tray Settings O Blank Separators dy Transparency Tray Separators Blank Separators N Sets Tray 3 Select Save O N Sete Not Se Tay No Separators N Sets 2 Select the required option uuh ES Off Disables the feature Blank Separators Places a blank sheet of paper between each transparency sheet Blank Separators N Sets Copies one set of transparencies with blank dividers along with sets of paper copies for handouts No Separators N Sets Copies one set of transparencies with no dividers along with sets of paper copies for handouts Paper Tray Settings Displays the Transparency Separators Paper Tray Settings Screen Select one of the presets to specify the Transparency Tray and the Separators N Sets Tray Five presets including Bypass Tray are available for each For more information on the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen on page 52 70 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Output Format Copy Multiple Up This feature allows you to copy two four or eight independent documents onto one sheet of paper The machine automatically reduces enlarge
153. age 73 Set Numbering page 74 1 Press the lt All Services gt button INN e tai ES 2 Select Copy on the touch O Booklet Creation O Covers O Transparency Separators screen J Off m No Covers m off 9 Multiple Up O Poster O Repeat Image 3 Select the Output Format tab 1Up off of Use the side tabs to switch 4 between screens 66 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Output Format Copy 4 Select the required option Ready to Copy Quantity 1 Basic Copying Image Quality Output Format Job Assembly Annotation O Set Numbering Off Booklet Creation This feature allows you to print the images side by side on both sides of each page in the correct order to make a booklet Fold the copies in half and staple in the middle to create a finished booklet NOTE If the number of document pages is a multiple of four the booklet will not have blank pages Otherwise the extra pages in the book will be blank Memory 100 1 Select Booklet Creation on the Output Format screen Ready to Copy ASA 1 Quantity Booklet Creation Cancel Originals 2 Select the required option Qo aa ie 3 Select Save Ou Top Bind O Right Bind 1 Sided Covers Head to Top Off Disables the feature Left Bind Top Bind Make a booklet that opens to the left or upward Right Bind Makes a booklet that opens to the right Gut
154. al Information Fax Mode settings 236 Log In Out button oooooccccnnnnocccccnnnacancccnnnannncccnnnna 35 Login ID System Administrator 1 0 0 0 257 Login Name Scan E mail 20 a 130 Login Setup Auditron Administration 258 Login Setup Auditron Mod Auditron Administration ccccccceeeeeeeees 264 Long edge feed LEF eeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeee 182 low power mode cooooocccccccccccccoccnnnnnoncnnonccnnncnnnannnns 39 Low Toner Alert Tone 2 eceecceeeeeeeteeees 194 A a AE a a as 214 M machine before usinga ar EE RR 13 CIGANING ET 305 COMPONENTS irii iania a aa eaaa aaa 33 control panel coocococccccccccccccncccnnnnnnannnononnnnnnnn 35 INFORMATION rti ena aeaa a an 276 information and status General CentreWare Internet Services 158 Statu Sesi iaaa ae alowed shits bass hens 43 275 Machine Clock Timers Common Settings 191 machine component ceeceeeeeeeeeeetees 33 Machine Configuration ieee 276 Machine Details CentreWare Internet Services 00006 161 Machine E mail Address Host Name Network Settings ooooonocccicinnncocccccncnccncncnnnnnns 216 Machine Password s eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 237 Machine Ready Tone assesseer 193 machine specifications ccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 341 Machine Status Aoii e eaa a 275 Consumables cococccocccccccccocccoccnonannnnnnnncnnnno 282 machine status c ooooccccconccc
155. ame assigned to an address E mail Address Select to use part of an e mail address as a keyword 112 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide E mail Custom Item Select one of the custom items set by the Key Operator as a search value For information on specifying the item displayed refer to Attribute Type of Custom Item 1 3 in the Setups chapter on page 241 Enter Change Keyword Displays the screen keyboard for entering a keyword Search Now Starts the search Local Address List Displays the list of addresses registered in the local address book on the machine Local Search Displays the Address Book screen for searching the local address book on the machine Remote Search Directory Svc Displays the Address Book screen for searching the address book on the directory server NOTE When searching the address book on the directory server you can abort halfway through Keyboard You can enter an address using the screen keyboard 1 Select Keyboard on the E mail screen 2 Perform the necessary Frm IED oca operations O ui CORE rrr EA 3 Enter an address O utudaccy 4 Select Close For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 To CC BCC Switches the recipient type between To Cc and Bcc Next Recipient Allows you to enter another address into the next address ent
156. ammed paper 3 Close the Cover B until it latches 2 HARAN Igy gt pS Sar Lies ee A NOTE Firmly press the center of the cover to close it Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 319 16 Problem Solving Paper Jams in Cover C Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover C 1 Open Cover C while lifting up the release lever 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the Cover C until it latches Paper Jams in Cover E Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Cover E 1 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 2 Lift up the handle to open Cover EE 320 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Paper Jams 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Close the Cover E 5 Close the Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray sy F IEX Wee VS J Q Z y 5i f Paper Jams in Trays 1 2 and 3 4 Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Trays 1 to 4 of the machine 1 Pull out Tray 1 2 3 or 4 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Close the paper tray Paper Jams in the Tandem Tray Module Optional Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Tandem Tray Module In Tray 3 1 Pull out Tray 3 of the
157. an Job Completed Mailbox 001 1 Copy Job Completed Error 100 Completed Jobs Doc No Job Type Identifies each job by job number and type Status Displays the status of the job such as completed cancelled shutdown etc Remote Terminal Contents Displays the name of the recipient for a fax job the paper size for a copy job or the box number for a scan job etc Status Displays the number of printed scanned sent or received pages For cancelled jobs the status will be blank Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 269 12 Job Status Stored Documents This feature allows you to check locally stored documents in Charge Print Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print and Public Mailbox User actions are required for outputting or deleting these documents NOTE The jobs displayed in Charge Print Secure Print Sample Print and Delayed Print are sent from a PC using the print driver For more information refer to PCL Driver On line Help For more information refer to the following Charge Print page 270 Secure Print page 271 Sample Print page 272 Delayed Print page 272 Public Mailbox page 273 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel Current and Completed Jobs Stored Pending Jobs Documents 2 Select the Stored Documents ta b B Charge Print J Secure Print D Sample
158. an be retrieved as well as stored Buffer is the location to store data sent from the client temporarily By increasing the memory capacity of the receive buffer the client can be freed earlier 352 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 18 Glossary Recipient Remote Mailbox Remote Terminal Repository Resolution ROM Scan Screen Send Header Server Fax Short Edge Feed SEF Sleep Mode Special Characters SMTP Speed Dialing Store for Polling System Administrator TCP IP TIFF Transmission Interval The person or terminal you send a document to Dialing indicates the operation of entering the telephone number of a recipient In relation to Internet Fax it refers to the e mail address of a remote terminal A feature that allows you to retrieves a document from the mailbox of a remote machine A terminal with which you want to communicate This is a general term for terminals such as telephones facsimile machines and personal computers A storage place for electronic documents The fineness of detail that can be distinguished on a scanned image Select the standard setting for normal documents and fine and superfine settings for documents with more detail An abbreviation of Read Only Memory which is the memory device specific for the retrieval of information from which information can be retrieved Sensing or reading a paper document and convert
159. and Macintosh computers is provided separately Refer to the following for procedures on sending print jobs e UNIX System Administration Guide e Macintosh PostScript User Guide Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 143 8 Print Emulation Parameters The emulation parameters for PCL and PDF can be changed as necessary For information on how to change parameter values refer to Print Mode in the Machine Status chapter on page 277 PCL Emulation Parameter Item No Value Paper 201 0 Default Auto Tray 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Tray 5 Bypass Selects the paper tray When Auto is selected the machine automatically selects the tray that contains the paper whose size is specified on the Paper Supply screen Auto Size 202 3 A3 4 Default A4 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 21 8 5 x 14 22 8 5 x 13 23 Default 8 5 x 11 24 11 x 17 30 8K Sets the default paper size when the machine is set to select the paper size automatically Only available when Paper Tray is set to Auto The default value will be either 4 or 23 depending on the region of use Bypass 203 3 A3 Size 4 Default A4 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 21 8 5 x 14 22 8 5 x 13 23 Default 8 5 x 11 24 11 x 17 Sets the paper size for the bypass tray Only available when Paper Tray is set to Tray 5 Bypass The default
160. ation was changed to the center output tray Contact the Xerox Welcome Center Use a different paper tray Screen Messages Along with fault codes the following messages are displayed on the touch screen in some occasions Message Description and Remedy A fault has occurred A fault has occurred Switch off the machine Switch off the machine Ensure that the screen disappears before switching it on If the problem persists call for service and wait until the touch screen is turned off completely and then restart the machine If the problem persists write down the fault code xxx yyy displayed on the screen Switch off the machine and contact the Xerox Welcome Center A fault has occurred The machine has rebooted If the problem persists call for service The machine was restarted due to a fault Resume normal operations If the problem persists contact the Xerox Welcome Center Processing has been cancelled due to an error See User Guide for information on fault code The machine operation has stopped due to a fault Restart the job Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Output Quality Output Quality Various situations can affect the quality of the output Check the following conditions to ensure optimum copy performance If you still cannot resolve the problem contact the Key Operator Do not locate the machine in direct
161. atus screen For information on these screens refer to the Job Status chapter and the Machine Status chapter Features Screen Default Set the features displayed when canceling the Power Saver mode 194 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Screen After Auto Clear Select the screen to be displayed after the machine performs auto clear Job Type on Job Status screen Select the job types to be displayed when you select Completed Jobs on the Job Status screen Default Language Select the initial language to be displayed on the touch screen By using the lt Language gt button on the control panel you can change the initial language as required Paper Tray Attributes This screen allows you to configure various settings for trays and for paper to be loaded in the trays 1 Select Paper Tray Attributes on the Common Settings screen Paper Tray Attributes 2 Select the req u red option B Custom Paper Name J Paper Type LJ Paper Size 3 Select Close m Paper Tray Priority m Paper Type Priority Poper Sr betats Cto Tray Switching Custom Paper Name Assign names to custom paper 1 to 5 when using only plain paper bond paper and recycled paper Each name can be up to 24 alphanumeric characters and symbols Assigned names are displayed in the screens relating to paper supply Paper Type Specify the type of paper to be loaded in Tray 1 Tray
162. ave in a Clear Field Login Name 3 Perform the necessary operations Address Book Transfer Protocol Use this feature to select a transfer protocol You must select the same protocol used by the destination Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 117 5 Scan E mail Memory 100 1 Select Transfer Protocol on the Scan to FTP SMB screen par Sa Transfer Protocol 2 Select the req uired option id Q FTP Changing the protocol deletes the information you have entered about the location in which 3 Select Save aB files are saved FTP O une Format Specifies the FTP protocol SMB Specifies the SMB protocol SMB UNC Format Specifies the SMB protocol using the UNC format NOTE If Remote Authentication has been enabled a popup message will prompt the user to enter a login and password before using the Scan to FTP SMB feature The login and password will be passed to the Kerberos server Only when the user is authenticated eg User xyz really is user xyz will the feature be made available Address Book Use this feature to select a destination server from the Address Book Selecting a server causes the preset information to be entered into the entry fields Server Shared Name Save in Login Name and Password For information on how to register destinations refer to Address Book in the Setups chapter on page 250 1 Select Addres
163. ays the company logo 150 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Services Menu Panel Displays information about the machine including the Name IP Address Product Name and Status Other details may also be displayed if they have been specified on the Properties page The Refresh Status is located below these details on the Status page Click Refresh Status to update the machine status The display here corresponds to the display when General is selected on the Status page You will find a collapsible menu that links to different items on the left side of the Services Jobs Status Properties Maintenance and Support pages Main Panel Displays buttons that link to Services Jobs Status Properties Maintenance and Support pages Click the buttons to go to the required pages Refresh Status is also displayed on most pages For more information about each function refer to the following Services page 151 Jobs page 156 Status page 158 Properties page 160 Maintenance page 179 Support page 179 Services This page allows you to send jobs to the machine for printing or create change job templates to be saved on the machine from this screen Follow the steps below to select the features available on the Jobs tab 1 Click Services on the Main Panel of the home page 2 On the collapsible menu of the Menu Panel
164. box on the Setup Menu screen Choose a Mailbox and select Create Delete 2 Selecta mailbox number under Mole Nome a which a new mailbox is to be 002 802 y registered 003 B03 004 Box4 System Administrator 3 Select Create Delete us os Sem AA 4 Select the required option Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 245 11 Setups NOTE If you select On go to step 5 to register a password Then the machine will not allow the mailbox to be accessed unless the registered password is entered If you select Off skip to step 7 5 Enter a password up to 20 digits max using the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Select Save Qo Password Cancel New Mailbox Assign Password 7 Perform the necessary Choose an item and select Change Settings O pe rati ons Mailbox 006 Create Delete 8 Select Close ae men Delete Mailbox NOTE By selecting Delete pa A j CH aSSwori asswori lol Sel J Mailbox you can del ete a Il 4 Delete Document After Retrieval Delete M 5 y Change documents in the mailbox and all job 5 Delete Documents with Expiry Date Disabled J ly flow sheets created through the mailbox Mailbox Name Enter a name up to 20 characters to be assigned to the mailbox Password Allows you to change the setting of the password Check Password Sel
165. bute name of auxiliary search parameter 3 The name specified here will be displayed on the Address Book when E mail is selected For more information refer to Address Book on page 250 Maximum Search Results Specify the maximum number of addresses to be displayed as the result of searching This feature restricts the number of addresses to be searched and displayed Select the number in the range from 5 to 100 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 241 11 Setups Search Time Out Specify whether or not to set the maximum searching time time out time If you select On then select the time in the range from 5 to 120 seconds using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Other Settings Use this feature to configure or change other machine settings for sending scanned documents as e mail attachments 1 Select Other Settings on the E mail Internet Fax Settings Choose an item and select Change Settings Other Settings screen Items Current Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch mann a Between Soreng SSE 3 Perform the necessary alee epee an Y E operations 4 Select Close Maximum E mail Size Specify whether or nat to restrict the size of scanned data to be sent as e mail attachments If you select On then select the maximum size of data in the range from 50 to 65535 KB usin
166. cancel entry Memory 100 the Scan Options screen Mixed Size Originals 2 Select On to enable the lol n he Cosmet Foss featu re O off Adjust Document Guides Load A5 originals in portrait orientation 3 Select Save RY Reduce Enlarge This feature allows you to enlarge or reduce a scanned document to a specified ratio before sending Memory 100 1 Select Reduce Enlarge on the Scan Options screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Reduce Enlarge 2 Perform the necessary a Do operations Or a 0 Auto 3 Select Save Q veses o A3 gt A5 92 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Send Options Fax Internet Fax Preset e 100 Sets the enlargement reduction ratio to 100 original size Auto After scanning the document with original size automatically selects the enlargement reduction ratio depending on the output size of the remote machine e Presets Allows you to select the preset enlarge reduce settings Select one of these to specify the enlargement reduction ratio The presets are set up by the Key Operator Variable Allows you to specify an enlargement reduction ratio within the range of 50 to 400 Send Options Fax Internet Fax This section describes how to specify the transmission options on the Send Options screen For information on the features available refer t
167. cate for the phrase User Account Number Prints the User Account Number when the Authentication or Auditron Administration feature is enabled 74 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Job Assembly Date and Time Prints the date and time that the copy job started on each of the copies The Set Numbering Date and Time screen is displayed Select On to enable the feature Serial Number Prints the serial number of the machine on the copies The Set Numbering Serial Number screen displays Select On to enable the feature Job Assembly This section describes how to make settings on the Build Job feature For more information on the feature refer to the following Build Job page 75 Ready to Copy 1 Press the lt All Services gt button j Quantity on the control panel iS 2 Select Copy on the touch Buit Job screen LJ 3 Select the Job Assembly tab Build Job This feature allows you to make copies with different settings for single pages or groups of pages yet run the job as a single job For example if a job consists of some sections with text and some with photos you can select the appropriate settings to be applied to each section and then print them at one time You can also print only one set of the job prior to printing out the whole quantity This will allow you to check the print result and adjust the settings if necessary 1 Select
168. cates may be photographed Badges Identification Cards Passes or Insignia carried by military personnel or by members of the various Federal Departments such as FBI Treasury etc unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states Automobile Licenses Drivers Licenses Automobile Certificates of Title The above list is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your attorney Canada Parliament by statute has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions 1 2 3 4 Current bank notes or current paper money Obligations or securities of a government or bank Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper The public seal of Canada or of a province or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada or of a court of law Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 29 1 Before Using the Machine 5 Proclamations orders regulations or appointments or notices thereof with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queen s Printer for Canada or the equivalent printer for a province 6 Marks brands seals wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a provi
169. cation was processed using ECM A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a problem occurs A network transport technology commonly used to send data from one node to another A Communication Mode selection that reduces transmission speed to enable reliable communications even under poor line conditions which forces the machine to communicate at a maximum of 4800 bits per second Settings which are incorporated into the machine at the factory and used by the machine when the user does not specify settings Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 349 18 Glossary F Code Communication File Server Frame Type G3 Group Dialing Halftone Head to Head Head to Toe Image Enhancement Inserts Internet Internet Fax Job Key Operator Keypad Communication procedures approved by Communications and Information network Association of Japan CIAJ for use of T 30 standardized by ITU T Between the machines with F Code feature various features making use of F Code can be used ITU T Recommendation A computer that has a hard disk drive large enough to hold and share files It provides the ability for multiple users to simultaneously access the same file A group of data sent through the network Facsimile communication systems standardized by the advisory committee for International Telecommunications CCITT now the ITU T A form of abbreviated dialing t
170. ccccccccnonnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 43 Mail Notice Service oooooonniiinicnoccccccncccnccnccninnns 215 Mail Notice Settings CentreWare Internet Services 0006 167 Mailbox CentreWare Internet Services 163 Mailbox Setup Menu ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 245 Mailbox Documents Report eeeeeee 198 Mailbox Job Flow Sheet cccceeceeeeeeeees 288 Mailbox List iai asid eniaint ais 282 Mailbox Receive Display Priority 1 3 234 Mailbox Settings n 243 Mailbox Stored Document Settings 243 maintenance cnoccocccccnccccncoccnnnnnannn ono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 305 Maintenance CentreWare Internet Services 179 maintenance safety c oninicciinnninncccnnnnnaccccnnnnannnnnns 20 Maintenance Diagnostics Common Settings 199 Manageable Features and Services 298 Manual Receive cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteees 106 Manual Send cocooccccccccccccccccnonannnon no nccnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 106 Manual Send Receive Default 05 232 Margin Shift COPY ccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaees 62 Max No of Pages for Split Send 243 Maximum Address Entries cccceeeeeeeeee 242 Maximum E mail Size ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 359 19 Index Maximum Login Attempts System Administrator Settings
171. ccccccccoconcconnonnno nono nono nono nnnnnnnnnnnos 109 Stop the Scan JOD ii nte 110 Emart Metal 111 Address Book iia A dad 111 Keyboard 113 O ii iaa 114 Sender s Details ooooooconnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnccocococccnncnnn cnn rre 114 Change Settings E 115 Save in Scan to Mailbox ccoo oct 115 Job Templates Network Scanning ccooncoconcccnnniccconanacnnnncncncnnnannns 116 Save in Scan to FTP SMB ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesneeees 117 Transfer Protocol icon a is 117 Address BOOK iii citada 118 Detailed Settings acom iasd a vanin diini nedi tee iea 118 A Ko AERE A E T E 119 Basic SCANMIAG scscrectevicikedncg nn a enekes iiien a EKAA E EEA EENAA NaS haunt 119 Lighten Darken i scveevcyeccieescaxnaungsy att hewtalai decd innri dn rrain diiniita e riena 120 6 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents 2 Sided Originals AA Orginal Type danie a a aan aaa iaee aaia iiai File ROMA asc Image Quality eee Lighten Darken Contrast coccccccccccccicinncinicininenininin ns Sharpness imita a A Auto EXPOSUTE cinc a ii SCAN OPUONS vesidates a aa berlin AFEERI tenon Scan RESOIUNOM usina Mecho tern tetasntl ieee Bo nd Originals Ataner reirei elite at tongs ale Se A vteatetaws otvenee Mixed Size Originals ccccccecsscetecceeteeeesseceeneeeerees Border m re EE E E TT Reduce Enlarge cocida idiota Output Format necios dio Image COMpressiON ooc
172. cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 305 Original Orientation Copy essees 66 Original Size COPY 0 0 eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 60 Original Size Defaults Copy Mode Settings 210 Original Type COPY renina ideada id 56 Fax Internet Fax o ococcconocncononoconocnnnnonononos 89 90 Lightweight Originals eset 209 Scan E Mail ceria aiea a eaea 121 OS and browser requirements Target Computers CentreWare Internet Services ieee 149 Other Settings Common Settings o n 200 E mail Internet Fax settings ooo 242 Network Settings 220 Print Mode settings ooccononncnnnnnncccccccnnnnss 223 Scan Mode settings ooooocoonnocccccnnnnanccccccnn 228 Out of Paper Warning Tone aeeceee 193 Output Destination ooooonccnccnncnnncnncnnncncccconannnnnon 56 Output Destination Line Setup 005 234 Output Format COPY siesta Se acs et a eae aa a 66 Scan E Mail ainia icon noticias reta ated 128 output quality ooooooooccoccnccciccccoccononnonconccnncnnnnnnnns 339 Output Size Defaults Scan Mode settings 227 output tray IMAI MIN cutis 306 overview Auditron Administration ccccceeeceees 298 Authentication ceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 features e iaaa iai a a aai sheet idee Me 43 job Imeri nanna a a tanos 43 JOD STAS ii 43 Modes tn cetera eden aa 42 ProdUCt a Ee aaa e ea a ait 33 SOIVICOS iii 42 Overwrite Hard Disk coccconnnccnnccc
173. cconccnnnnnoo 204 277 OZONE sao ae ra nano renta 20 P Page Number 2 cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeees 73 Page Number Position on Side 2 209 Page size for Split Send occccionnnicoconnnacccccnnnno 243 paper loading are R ent eeieie 181 storing and handling s es 184 supported SIZES v le aeaaee aiia 185 paper and other media oococccccccccnccoconcncccnccnnnn 181 Paper Jas id fee ao 316 paper jams Cover Asio Teei e cea lado ied kee 318 Cover Bocinas illa cdo 319 Cover a O E ada 320 Cover E halee eaae aanne a aea aa E aa 320 Tandem Tray Module 321 Trays 1 2 and 3 4oacocccoconcccnoconcnonnnannnnnns 321 paper jams in the duplex Module Cover D 322 paper jams in the Finisher Optional 323 paper jams in Tray 5 Bypass connmccccinnnnncccccnnnns 322 paper output specifications oooonniniinn 344 Paper Settings CentreWare Internet Services 0 162 Paper SIZE siir Aap ji 195 Paper SIZOS i ne a na aa 185 Paper Supply Tray 5 BYPASS catoren ona de eaaa ita 52 Paper Supply i iii ei ai eana 51 paper supply specifications ooooonnnnnc c 343 paper tray machine status oooocinncnicncocccccccnno 276 Paper Tray Attributes CentreWare Internet Services 05 162 Paper Tray Attributes Common Settings 195 360 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 Index Pap
174. ceeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 216 HTTP SSL TLS Communication ce 216 SSL TLS Port Number nieee 216 l ilegal COPies nn 28 Image Compression Scan E mail 129 Image Enhancement coococccccccnnonccnncnanancninonananin 197 Image Quality Common Settings oooooonnnnccoccnnnnicccnnninonannnos 197 COPY ne see tice tence ccertteets a chewtan dante 56 Fax Internet Fax cccceeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeees 90 SCaN E Malll econo aia 123 Image Rotation COPY cocococccnnccococcncnocananananonananos 64 Image Transfer Screen 229 Incoming Internet Fax Output Destination 238 Incoming Internet Fax Print Options 237 information SQUICES eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 16 Initialize Hard Disk ooooooocncnnccnnnococcoconccnccnnnnnnon 199 inserting New drum Cartridge oooonncccnnnnnnccccnnnnnccccccnnn 308 new toner Cartridge 310 Interface Options CentreWare Internet Services cere 150 Internet Fax E tio tocata a diadts ead checka phdydeess 87 Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents 97 Internet Fax Control Fax Mode settings 237 Internet Fax Profile ceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 102 internet fax to e mail 2 0 0 2 ceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeettteeees 244 internet fax to internet fax ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 Internet Services HTTP ceeeseteeeeeeestees 215 Internet Services Settings CentreWare Internet
175. ceipts MDN is selected you will receive a notification mail that informs you an Internet Fax has been correctly handled at the destination Incoming Internet Fax Print Options Sets whether to print the header and body the subject and body or attached files of a received e mail This is effective in saving paper and printing the attached files Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 237 11 Setups Incoming Internet Fax Output Destination Sets the output tray for printing the received e mail Fax Transfer from Address Book Sets whether to restrict the forwarding of received e mails as fax documents to an address not registered in the Address Book If On is selected and you attempt to forward a received e mail to an address not registered in the Address Book forwarding will not be executed and e mail data will be discarded Fax Transfer Add Sender Header Sets whether to use the Sender Header feature when you forward a received e mail to remote machines as a fax document If you select On remark RESEND or space start time and date of transmission sender name destination name Internet Fax address of the machine and quantity will be added at the top of each page of the document Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size Sets the maximum data size when you forward a received e mail to remote machines as a fax document You can set the size within the range of 1 to 65535 KB by using th
176. ceiving e mail It is a commonly used communications protocol an agreement governing the way data is transmitted It provides a private mailbox in the provider e mail server that receives messages when a connection is made POP3 is a receive only function while the corresponding function for sending e mail is SMTP The image orientation on a sheet of paper where the long edge of the paper runs from top to bottom PostScript is a page description language PDL from Adobe Systems which is the standard for desktop publishing because it is widely supported by both hardware and software vendors Energy saver modes that significantly reduce the power consumption during periods of inactivity Location where print data is actually processed and stored The actual area on paper which can be printed A protocol controlling image resolution paper size and other attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax The profiles that can be used vary with the Internet Fax of the remote terminal Find out the type of profile the remote Internet Fax terminal can handle before specifying a profile The rules that control the transmitting and receiving of data Switching between dialing types This is useful when you need pulse mode to connect and tone mode to access a mailbox or another feature A temporary storage unit for jobs waiting to be processed Stands for Random Access Memory which is the memory device where information c
177. cessary documents from the disk 016 710 Delayed prints cannot be made because the hard disk is malfunctioning Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 711 016 985 The e mail size exceeds the maximum value allowed Try one of the following procedures and resend the e mail e Reduce the number of pages in the document e Lower the resolution in Scan Resolution e Reduce the document size using Reduce Enlarge e Increase the maximum value in Maximum E mail Size using the Key Operator access 016 716 The TIFF file could not be spooled as the size of the file exceeded the remaining space on disk Increase the size of the PCL form area 016 721 An error occurred while printing a job The Auto Tray Switching feature was enabled when Auto Paper Off is selected for all paper trays on the Paper Type Priority screen When the Auto Tray Switching feature is enabled select a paper type other than Auto Paper Off on the Paper Type Priority screen 016 728 The TIFF file contains unsupported tags 016 729 The TIFF file could not be printed as the number of colors and resolution of the TIFF file exceeded the limit Change the number of colors and resolution of the TIFF file and instruct it to print again 016 731 Printing of the TIFF data stopped midway Instruct it to print again Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 331 16 Problem Solving
178. ch require the page number and the initial page number to use The range of numbering pages is selectable from All Pages and Enter First page Number If you select All Pages a Start Number must be entered using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad If you select Enter First page Number manually enter Start Page and Start Number Select Include Cover Separators when you want to print the page number on the cover page or the divider Set Numbering This feature allows you to add information such as a control number predetermined text and the machine serial number to copy output 1 Select Set Numbering on the Output Format screen Press Log In Out button and enter User Details cance save Set Numbering Q Control Number Q Date and Time 2 Select the required option we ny O Text O Serial Number 3 Select Save B off O off Q User Account Number Control Number Numbers the documents and prints sequential numbers on the copies The Set Numbering Control Number screen is displayed and the following options are available e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature You can input up to 999 as a start number Text Prints one of the prefixed phrases on the copies The Set Numbering Text screen is displayed and the following options are available e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature Select Copy Prohibited Copy or Dupli
179. characters This entry is required if SMTP AUTH is selected on the E mail Send Authentication screen 218 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Network Settings Domain Filter This feature allows you to restrict incoming e mails by registering domain names of senders 1 Select Domain Filter on the Network Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Domain Filter 2 Perform the necessary atl a Eiei operations a Not Se L 3 S l t Cl 3 Domain 2 Not Set J 5 elec Ose 4 Domain 3 Not Set 5 Domain 4 Not Set y Domain Filtering Allows you to select the restriction method either Enter Permitted Domain Names or Enter Rejected Domain Name If Off is selected this feature is disabled Domain 1 50 Allows you to enter domain names to be restricted or permitted according to the selection on the Domain Filtering Remote Authentication Server Settings This feature allows you to set up the external authentication server settings 1 Select Remote Authentication Server Settings on the Network Choose an itern and select Remote Authentication Server Settings S etti n g s scree n a Items Current Settings 1 Authentication System lows f 2 Perform the necessary 2 Remote Server Setup By P Addess O p era ti ons 3 Remote Server IP Address Not Set 4 Remote Server Name
180. chine automatically recognizes the following sizes when a document is placed on the document glass or loaded in the document feeder Document Glass Document Feeder i dE gt 2 ae gt 2 gt Size Width Length 53 S oa 2a 8 e le Sa ae e mm mm xml o Zal 2alalxalal sal Sal o 20 D 30 o o 20 D 30 o o wos i Os xx wos 3 Os xx Solo 30 220la3 2o 2 30 22 3 o o a 0 n a a a 0 n A5 SEF 148 0 210 0 o lo O O o1 ort o o A5 LEF 210 0 148 0 o lolo o 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 215 9 139 7 O O O o lo 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 139 7 215 9 O o 1 B5 SEF 182 0 257 0 o lolo o lo B5 LEF 257 0 182 0 o lolo o o of o o A4 SEF 210 0 297 0 o lo O o o 0 oft o A4 LEF 297 0 210 0 o lolo o lolo lolo o lo 8 5 x 11 SEF 215 9 279 4 O o o Jott o o lo Letter 8 5 x 11 LEF 279 4 215 9 O O o o Jott o o lo Letter 8 5 x 13 SEF 215 9 330 2 O O O O Legal 8 5 x 14 SEF 215 9 355 6 O O Legal B4 SEF 257 0 364 0 O o o O o o oft ort 16K SEF 194 0 267 0 o 16K LEF 267 0 194 0 o o or 8K SEF 267 0 388 0 o o or A3 SEF 297 0 420 0 o lolo o lolo lolo o lo 11 x 17 SEF 279 4 431 8 o O o o off o o o lo 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 184 2 266 7 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 266 7 184 2 o lo O o lo Executive C4 Envelope SEF 229 0 324 0 C5 Envelope LEF 229 0 162 0 Xerox CopyCentre W
181. copies and 89 297 mm for width 127 432 mm for length for making double sided copies The sizes of paper that can be loaded vary depending on each tray The handset is on the cradle You can dial a telephone number or hear the other party but cannot talk to them You can also send or receive a fax manually when On Hook is selected The machine is not connected to a tracking system A report that lists the options currently installed on the machine Finished copies received fax documents or to print A specified number that provides access to a mailbox a remote mailbox or networks A media misfeed when the machine is printing a document The command language for the HP LaserJet printers Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 351 18 Glossary PDF Photo Polling POP3 Portrait PostScript Power Save Modes Print Page Buffer Printable Area Profile Protocol Pulse to Tone Queue RAM Receive Buffer An abbreviation of Portable Document Format It is a file format developed by Adobe Systems A PDF file can describe documents containing text and images retaining all the formatting and fonts of the original copy An image especially a positive print recorded by a camera and reproduced on a photosensitive surface A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote machine An abbreviation of Post Office Protocol Version 3 a protocol used for re
182. creen or press the lt Stop gt O O O O button on the control panel to O O suspend the fax job while the o K o Pans Tuv WXYZ O document is being scanned S Kes Seige button a du oH O SPO lt C gt button 2 If required press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel to display the Job Status screen To exit the Job Status screen press the lt Features gt button Current and Print Pending Jobs _ Waiting Jobs Doc No Job Type Status Remote Terminal Contents Progress 00002 Fax Job Scanning A4D 100 141 2 Y 3 Press the lt C gt or lt Clear All gt button on the control panel to delete the suspended fax Internet Fax job still being scanned To resume the job select Start on the touch screen or the lt Start gt button on the control panel NOTE Once the transmission starts you can stop the job only by selecting Stop on the touch screen You cannot resume the canceled job after the transmission starts Specifying Destinations This section describes how to specify destinations using the features available on the machine For more information refer to the following Next Recipient page 82 Address Book page 82 Speed Dial page 83 Keyboard page 83 Relay Broadcast page 84 Special Characters page 85 NOTE You can specify destinations from any tab using the keypad on the control panel Speed Dial and Next Recipient
183. cription of the job flow sheet Job Flow Displays the document processing type Total Destinations Displays the number of destinations 164 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Mailbox Edit Job Flow Sheet Edit Destination Allows you to select the processing type to be edited Edit Job Flow Sheet Click to edit the settings for the specified processing type Print Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Paper Tray Allows you to select the paper tray Quantity Allows you to select the number of printouts Send as Fax Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name Enter the recipient s name Recipient Address Enter the recipient s address Line Type Displays the line type Communication Mode Select the fax communication mode Mailbox Number Enter the mailbox number Mailbox Password Enter the mailbox password Relay Broadcast Select whether to enable relay broadcasting Print at Relay Station Select whether to print the document at the relay station Relay Station ID Broadcast Recipients Specify the relay station ID or destinations F Code Enter the F Code Password F Code Communication Enter the password for the F Code if required Send as Internet Fax Name Displays the name of the job flow sheet Recipient Name 1 10
184. cument to the secondary relay station which then broadcasts the document to other destinations The following methods are available for relay broadcasting Fax Signals The machine provides a unique method only for Xerox machines that have the relay broadcasting feature Before sending a document the remote machine that broadcasts your document needs to be registered as a relay station in a speed dial code on your machine For more information on registering relay stations for speed dialing refer to Address Book in the Setups chapter on page 250 DTMF You can manually enter DTMF codes as part of a fax number to specify a relay station and destinations that also understand DTMF codes G3 compatible machines that allow manual sending can initiate relay broadcasting to the machine For more information refer to Special Characters on page 85 84 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Specifying Destinations F Code Machines that support F Code and relay broadcasting features allow relay broadcasting operations using F Code For more information refer to F Code on page 100 Internet Fax You can send an Internet Fax document to an Internet Fax capable relay station in a network which converts the document to a regular fax and broadcasts it to destinations without an Internet Fax capability To send an Internet Fax document for relay broadcasting specify the relay station s e mail address as
185. d for a scanned document Fax forwarding printing and Internet Fax forwarding cannot be performed for scanned documents 027 751 An error occurred while processing a job flow sheet Check the job flow sheet 027 753 The required port was not open to the job attempted by a job flow sheet Contact the Key Operator 027 796 E mail without an attachment was discarded because the machine is set to print only the attached document of e mail To print body text and the header of e mail in addition to its attachments change settings from Properties on CentreWare Internet Services 027 797 The output destination is not correct Specify the correct destination and resend the e mail 034 211 034 212 An error occurred in the fax controller Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 034 501 Is the telephone cable correctly connected Check that the telephone cable is connected correctly and resend the document Refer to Machine Components in the Product Overview chapter on page 33 034 507 036 786 036 787 Communication failed because the ID of the remote machine and the password you specified did not match Make sure that the password and telephone number are correct Also check with the other party that their machine has been set up to reject ID from other parties This code is also displayed when a polling request is rejected 034 511 035 725 A document for relay broadcasting cannot be transmitted C
186. d images to fax machines over the Internet The scanned images are transmitted as e mail attachments When using Internet Fax enter the e mail address of the remote destination Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 87 4 Fax Internet Fax You can send an Internet Fax to a confidential mailbox on a remote machine an Internet Fax capable relay station for broadcasting to regular fax machines or forward a faxed document stored in the machine s mailbox as e mail using a job flow sheet For more information Refer to Mailbox Screen on page 105 Internet Fax on page 84 or Document List in the Check Mailbox chapter on page 134 respectively NOTE The following features are not available for Internet Fax transmissions Priority Send Delayed Start Send Header Cover Note Recipient Print Sets Store for Polling Private Mailbox Remote Mailbox You can use the F Code feature by specifying the F Code directly in the Internet Fax destination address For more information on F Code refer to F Code on page 100 2 Sided Originals Use this feature to specify whether the documents are single sided or double sided and how documents are to be positioned 1 Select 2 Sided Originals on the Basic Features screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To 2 Sided Originals 2 Select the required option OD is mapaa Head to Head 3 Select Save 0 Head to T
187. ddress Book Details m Keyboard m Sender Recipient Name E mail Address Delete Recipient Change Settings This feature allows you to choose a destination from the address book Address books are held locally on the machine and remotely on a directory server When the address book saved in a directory server is accessible the remote address book is displayed If it is inaccessible the local address book saved in the machine is displayed NOTE The address book displayed here contains only the e mail addresses for the scan feature The speed dial codes and group codes are not displayed Refer to Address Book in the Setups chapter on page 250 1 Select Address Book on the E mail screen 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Save To Memory 100 Select an e mail address Local Address Book O O Next Recipient No Name E mail Address 002 James Smith 003 004 005 Go to Local Address List 001 500 gt E Local Search Show Details Joan Smith John Smith Joshua Smith wi Uses the selected address as a To recipient Cc Uses the selected address as a Cc recipient Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 111 5 Scan E mail Bcc Uses the selected address as a Bcc recipient Go to This is displayed only when the local address book on the machine is displayed Specify the number as
188. document processing types you can register in a job flow sheet depend on how documents are stored in a private mailbox See the following chart Internet Input Output Fax Fax E mail FTP SMB Printer Fax for polling O O O O O O Scan X X O O O X Received fax O O O O O O Received O 4 4 O O O Internet Fax O Available X Not available 1 Depends on the Key Operator settings NOTE Only the job flow sheets you are permitted to execute are displayed on the screen NOTE When forwarding a document faxed or stored in the mailbox by E mail FTP or SMB do not use JPEG as the File Format of the job flow sheet 1 Select Job Flow Settings on the Document List screen Mailbox 002 Job Flow Settings J NOTE To link a document to a job ye Flow Steet that has been linked to this Mailbox flow sheet select the required False document on the screen Pat ones to Sa Start ve siest 2 Perform the necessary A operations 3 Select Close Auto Start Select this check box to set the linked job flow sheet to be automatically executed when a new document is saved in the mailbox This check box appears only when the mailbox has been linked with a job flow sheet Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 135 6 Check Mailbox NOTE Mailboxes with this option enabled are marked with an arrow above their icons Start Execut
189. does not work when Photo is selected as the Original Type This section describes the Scan Options used to adjust the layout For more information on the features available refer to the following Bound Originals page 59 2 Sided Book Copy page 60 Original Size page 60 Mixed Size Originals page 61 Border Erase page 61 Margin Shift page 62 Image Rotation page 64 Mirror Image Negative Image page 65 Original Orientation page 66 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Select Copy on the touch screen 3 Select the Scan Options tab Use the side tabs to switch between screens 4 Select the required option Ready to Copy Basic Copying Image Quality Scan Options Bound Originals 9 2 Sided Book Copy a mo O Mixed Size Originals Off Output Format Job Assembly O Original Size m Auto Size Detect Margin Shift St No Shift 52 No Shift 9 Border Erase TBO L R 0 1 Ctr 0 0 Ready to Copy Basic Copying Image Quality Image Rotation On during Auto Scan Options Output Format Job Assembly 9 Mirror Image Negative Image Original Orientation Mirror Image Off Head to Top Negative Image Off Staple Position 58 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Options Copy Bound Originals This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a bound document using the doc
190. e Specifies the size of poster you want to make by selecting one of the presets that are listed on the touch screen The machine automatically calculates the magnification and decides how many sheets are needed for the job Enlargement Use scroll buttons to enter the magnification rates for the length and width of a document separately within the range of 100 400 in 1 increments The machine automatically decides how many sheets are needed for the job Paper Tray Settings Displays the Poster Paper Tray Settings screen Select one of the presets on the screen to specify the tray for the job Five presets including Tray 5 Bypass are available For more information on the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen on page 52 Repeat Image This feature allows you to print an original image repeatedly onto one sheet of paper Memory 100 Ready to Copy Bie 1 Quantity 1 Select Repeat Image on the Output Format screen Repeat Image Cancel Y 2 2 Select the required option Qo 123 Image Layout E o q le Even 3 Select Save E Auto Repeat Variable Repeat Bias Off Disables the feature Auto Repeat Automatically calculates the number of times to repeat vertically or horizontally from document size stock size and magnification Variable Repeat Allows you to use the scroll buttons to manually enter the n
191. e displayed only when Private is selected for Repository Type Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 153 9 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Item Description Filing Policy Select the filing method from the drop down menu You can select from Overwrite Existing File Add to Existing File Create New or Cancel Job Log Select whether to enable or disable job logs You can select either the version 1 3 or 2 0 of the job log Basic Scanning Output Color Select black or grayscale for output color Resolution Select the resolution of the scanned data 2 Sided Originals Select double sided or single sided scanning Added Features Reduce Enlarge Select from Preset Variable or Auto The contents of the drop down menu will vary according to your selections No drop down menu is displayed if Auto is selected Original Input Specify the scan size You can select Select Size or Custom Size In Select Size you can select the size from the drop down menu In Custom Size you can specify the height and width of the original The available range for the width is between 50 mm and 432 mm 2 0 and 17 0 inches and height is between 50 mm and 297 mm 2 0 and 11 7 inches Stored Size Select the stored size The stored sizes from the drop down menu will be displayed only when Auto is selected for
192. e scroll buttons or the numeric keypad If On is selected and you attempt to forward a received e mail with a larger data size than specified forwarding will not be executed and e mail data will be discarded E mail Internet Fax Settings This screen allows you to configure or change machine settings for sending scanned documents as e mail attachments For more information refer to the following E mail Defaults page 239 Address Search Directory Service page 239 Other Settings page 220 1 Select E mail Internet Fax Settings on the System i E mail iFax Settings Settings screen Dear pt seach NOTE If Internet Fax is not installed E mail Settings is how ser displayed instead of E mail Internet Fax Settings 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close 238 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide E mail Internet Fax Settings E mail Defaults Use this feature to configure or change the default settings for sending scanned documents as e mail attachments 1 Select E mail Defaults on the E mail Internet Fax Settings TA screen Items Choose an item and select Change Settings Current Settings Not Set 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close E Subject Enter the default for the subject to be preset when e mail is sent Address Search Directory Service LDAP Lightweight Directory Acc
193. e Auditron Administration feature are as follows 298 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Overview of Auditron Administration ease Restricted Use Total Usage as Authentication Account Limit ccount Copy O O 5 Print O 5 Charge Print 10 O 6 Scan O O E Fax Internet Fax O x 6 Direct Fax O X 5 Report List x X gt O Manageable X Not manageable 1 This feature forbids any actions beyond the number of pages specified For more information on the setting methods refer to Create Check User Accounts in the Setups chapter on page 259 Network Authentication When you are using Network Authentication with the machine Auditron Administration information is managed through a remote account server The features and services that can be managed using the Auditron Administration feature are as follows Restricted Use Total Usage Per Account Services Authentication Account Limit Copy O Print Charge Print Scan Fax Internet Fax Direct Fax x olojlol lo X XXI Xx X Xx X X X x x x o gt o Report List O Manageable X Not manageable 1 This feature forbids any actions beyond the number of pages specified Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 299 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration Jobs that Can be Managed for Each Se
194. e Representative or your authorized local representative or service support organization gt Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in an electric shock gt Do not place this equipment where people might step on or trip over the power cord gt Do not place objects on the power cord gt Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks gt Do not obstruct the ventilation openings Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on the equipment gt If any of the following conditions occur switch off the power to the machine immediately and disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet Call an authorized local service representative to correct the problem The equipment emits unusual noises or odors The power cord is damaged or frayed Awall panel circuit breaker fuse or other safety device has been tripped Liquid has spilled into the equipment The equipment is exposed to water Any part of the equipment is damaged Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug in device To remove all electrical power from the equipment disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet Laser Safety Information CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure 1
195. e Scanned Data page 109 Stop the Scan Job page 110 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 107 5 Scan E mail 1 Load the Documents 1 Load documents face up with the top edge entering the document feeder first or face down on the document glass 2 Select the Features Each scan type has its own screen Select E mail Network Scanning Scan to Mailbox or Scan to FTP SMB on the touch screen to display the appropriate screen Select E mail to scan and e mail documents Select Network Scanning to scan and send documents according to a scan job template e Select Scan to Mailbox to scan and save documents in the mailbox Select Scan to FTP SMB to scan and send documents using the FTP or SMB protocol 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Select a scan type on the touch screen NOTE If the Authentication feature is enabled you may be required to enter the user ID and password if one is set up If you need assistance contact the Key Operator 000 O O lt D ES Ju Ke gt AE CO N p OCO lt Clear All gt button Memory 100 ICC are entered Image Quality Output Format E mail Address Address Book Details Delete m Keyboard _ Recipient Change Add Sender Settings Select Recipient 3 Press the lt Clear All g
196. e as a separate fax Left Page Only Scans only the left side page of an open book Right Page Only Scans only the right side page of an open book Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 91 4 Fax Internet Fax Scan Size Using this feature the size of the document can be automatically detected or selected from a list of preset sizes If a preset size is selected documents will be scanned according to the specified size regardless of their actual size 1 Select Scan Size on the Scan Options screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry Memory 100 To Next Recipient Cancel LESTA 2 Select a desired option o Q O 3 Select Save gt el gt E 4 we Q O 85 x MO 8510 Auto Size Detect Detects the size of the documents automatically Presets Allows you to select from 11 preset standard sizes in Portrait and Landscape orientations The presets are set up by the Key Operator NOTE Custom sizes cannot be set as presets Mixed Size Originals This feature allows you to fax mixed sizes of documents using the document feeder The machine senses the mixed size originals automatically and sends each document at the same size as the original NOTE To enable the feature select Auto Size Detect on the Scan Size screen 1 Select Mixed Size Originals on l Ente recipient Use C button to
197. e developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 26 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide About License THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY
198. e document Load fresh paper Check the humidity of the machine location Output is too light or too dark Load fresh paper Check the quality of the document Select Lighten Darken on the touch screen Run off more prints until the copy quality improves Replace the drum cartridge 326 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Troubleshooting Tables Symptom Recommendation Uneven print Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Blurred images Load fresh paper Replace the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Missing characters Load fresh paper Reinstall the drum cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if the screen message for replacement is displayed Gloss variations coining Check the quality of the documents If the document has large areas of solid density adjust the contrast Light copies when scanning glossy shiny or coated documents through the document feeder Use the document glass instead of the document feeder Ghosting Check the quality of the documents If transparencies are used select Transparency in Paper Type The machine automatically adjusts the quality for transparencies Feed the document SEF Replace the drum cartridge Washout Check the quality of t
199. e is cancelled when the lt Power Saver gt button on the control panel is pressed or a fax or print job is received by the machine The factory default setting of 15 minutes is customer changeable within the range of 2 to 60 minutes For more information refer to Auto Power Saver in the Setups chapter on page 192 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 39 2 Product Overview Sleep Mode The machine automatically switches to the Sleep Mode after the Low Power Mode continues for a certain period of time The Sleep Mode has a reduced power consumption compared to Low Power Mode In this mode the touch screen is turned off and the Power Saver light is on The Sleep Mode is cancelled when the lt Power Saver gt button is pressed or a fax or print job is received by the machine The factory default setting of 15 minutes is customer changeable within the range of 2 to 60 minutes The time specified for entering the Sleep Mode will be counted from when the machine enters the Low Power Mode For more information refer to Auto Power Saver in the Setups chapter on page 192 NOTE By default the machine skips the Low Power Mode and switches directly to the Sleep Mode after 15 minutes of inactivity Changing the Default Time Settings This section describes how to change the default time settings using the Key Operator access If you need assistance or more information contact the Key Operator or refer to M
200. e job flow sheet name when the Mailbox is linked to a job flow sheet Auto Start Job Flow Sheet Allows you to specify whether to perform the linked job flow sheet when a document is stored in the mailbox Auto Delete Documents Allows you to delete a document from the mailbox automatically after a command such as printing has completed Delete Documents with Expiry Date Allows you to delete documents when they reach specified expiration dates Number of Documents Displays the number of documents stored in the mailbox Display Job Flow Sheets List Document Order Allows you to select the order of job flow sheets displayed on the list Sheet Type Displays the job flow sheet type Display Job Flow Sheets List Click this button to display the job flow sheets list Job Flow Sheets List Mailbox Number Display the mailbox number Sheet Type Displays the job flow sheet type Name Lists the names of job flow sheets Last Updated Lists the dates when the job flow sheets were last updated Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Click to link the selected job flow sheet to the mailbox Delete Click to delete the selected job flow sheet Edit Job Flow Sheet Click to edit the selected job flow sheet Create New Job Flow Sheet Click to create a new job flow sheet Job Flow Sheets Common Attributes Name Enter or change the name for the job flow sheet Description Enter or change the des
201. e page length printing area of one page Font Allows you to select the required font from the list of fonts available Font Size Allows you to specify the font size between 4 00 and 50 00 points in 0 25 point increments Font Pitch Allows you to specify the font pitch between 6 00 and 24 00 points in 0 01 point increments Symbol Set Allows you to select the desired symbol set from the list of symbol sets available Handle CR As Allows you to enable or disable carriage return and line feed for the PCL mode Handle LF and FF As Allows you to enable or disable carriage return and line feed and also carriage return and form feed for the PCL mode HexDump Allows you to enable or disable hexadecimal memory dump for the PCL mode Image Enhancement Allows you to enable or disable image enhancement Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 177 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Memory Settings Memory Settings Allows you to change the settings for the free space available and the print page buffer size for Parallel USB EtherTalk SMB NetWare LPD IPP Port9100 and PostScript memory Parallel Enter the print page buffer of the parallel interface between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments USB Enter the print page buffer of the USB interface between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments EtherTalk Enter th
202. e print data 116 703 An error occurred during PostScript processing Either confirm the print data or open spool settings on the details tab in the print driver to disable bi directional communication 116 713 The job was printed out in parts because the hard disk ran out of space Delete unnecessary data 116 720 An error occurred during printing due to insufficient memory Close unused ports or delete unnecessary data 116 740 A numerical value operation error occurred because the print data contains a value that exceeds the limit of the printer Check the print data Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 337 16 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 116 749 The print job was stopped because the specified font was not found Install the font or enable font replacement in the print driver 116 771 The parameter values were corrected because the machine encountered a 116 772 problem when printing the data If the received image is incomplete or 116 773 damaged ask the other party to check the image or to resend the data When 116 774 Internet Fax forwarding is enabled check with the recipient if they received the 116 775 image intact 116 776 116 777 116 778 116 780 There is a problem with the document attached to the received e mail Check the attached document 124 701 Due to a malfunction in the specified tray the output destin
203. e print page buffer of the EtherTalk interface between 1024 KB and 2048 KB in 32 KB increments SMB Select the spool destination for the job e Memory Enter a value between 512 KB and 32 MB 32768 KB in 256 KB increments e Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated Off Enter a value between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments NetWare Enter the print page buffer of NetWare between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments LPD Allows you to select the spool destination for the job Memory Enter a value between 512 KB and 32 MB 32768 KB in 256 KB increments e Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated Off Enter a value between 1024KB and 2048KB in 32 KB increments IPP Allows you to select the spool destination for the job e Hard Disk The print page buffer text box will be blank and the value cannot be updated Off Enter a value between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments Port9100 Enter the print page buffer of the Port9100 interface between 64 KB and 1024 KB in 32 KB increments PostScript Memory Enter the PostScript working memory between 8192 KB and 98304 KB in 256 KB increments 178 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Maintenance Maintenance This page displays the Error History It contains the following details on jobs where an error
204. e scroll buttons to increase or decrease the darkness Lighten Darken 2 Sided Originals Original Type File Format EN su DDerayscale KDnutipage TIFF 4 Bl Seed HoH GD Text amp Photo GA TIFF XD Sided H to Sl Text Oro y Doe C Phto DD FEG 2 Sided Originals Use this feature to specify whether the documents are single sided or double sided and how documents are to be positioned Lighten Darken 2 Sided Originals Original Type File Format Sided DDAenayscale KDvutipase TIFF a SS Sided H to H Dre 8 Photo A TFF 4 GY Sided H to Sl Text y Doe C Pht JPEG Basic Scanning 1 Sided Scans single sided documents 2 Sided H to H Scans double sided documents opened side by side NOTE If you select this option the Original Orientation is automatically set to Head to Left If you need to change the setting select More and select the required option for Original Orientation on the 2 Sided Originals screen 120 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Basic Scanning 2 Sided H to T Scans double sided documents opened vertically NOTE If you select this option the Original Orientation is automatically set to Head to Left If you need to change the setting select More and select the required option for Original Orientation on the 2 Sided Originals screen More Displays the 2 Sided Originals screen 2 Sided Or
205. e this feature to scan facing pages of a bound document in the correct page sequence using the document glass The facing pages will be saved as two separate images 1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen ut o O a 2 Perform the necessary Qo Pes So ie operations Os Ox ES i age Only oo 3 Select Save Ome Right Page Ore OF 1D NOTE The facing pages of a bound document must be placed in a horizontal orientation on the document glass Off Disables the feature Left Page then Right Scans both pages of an open book from left to right Right Page then Left Scans both pages of an open book from right to left Top Page then Bottom Scans both pages of an open book from top to bottom Both Pages Scans both pages of an open book Left Page Only Scans only the left side page of an open book Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 125 5 Scan E mail Right Page Only Scans only the right side page of an open book Top Page Only Scans only the top side page of an open book Bottom Page Only Scans only the bottom side page of an open book Center Erase Erases the width of the center Select the amount of deletion required using the scroll buttons Scan Size Using this feature the size of the document can be automatically detected selected from a list of preset sizes or manually specified using t
206. ect Confirm NOTE This process may take a while depending on the machine configuration Delete All Data Use this feature to delete all document data on the machine Select Delete All Data and then select Start Then select Yes to execute deletion After the deletion finishes you need to switch the machine off and then on NOTE This process may take a few hours depending on the machine configuration Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 199 11 Setups Software Options Specify software options For information on setting procedures and software codes refer to the instruction for the required software option package Other Settings Use this feature to configure various other settings common to the main features such as copy fax and scan 1 Select Other Settings on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Other Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch ts mia Gaa betwee n screens 2 Set Numbering Text Size 48 Points J 3 Set Numbering Densit Normal 3 P erfo rm th e necessa ry 4 Job Offset Center Output Tray Offset Per Set Gian ope rati ons 5 Job Offset Finisher Tray Offset Per Set J ly on 4 Select Close Date Format Select the format for date printing for the Annotation and Set Numbering features Set Numbering Text Size Specify the size of text used for the Set Numbering fea
207. ect an option for restricting access to the mailbox through the password If you select Save Write the password entry screen appears when an attempt is made to edit any document in the mailbox If you select Print Delete Read the password entry screen appears when an attempt is made to print out or delete any document in the mailbox Delete Document After Retrieval Specify whether or not to discard documents in the mailbox after they are printed out or retrieved or after they are transferred and printed out through a job flow sheet Delete Documents with Expiry Date Specify whether or not to enable the function that discards documents in the mailbox when the preset time or period elapses Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Displays the Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox screen 246 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Screen Use this feature to link the mailbox to a job flow sheet that instructs how documents in the mailbox are to be processed For more information on a job flow sheet refer to Job Flow Sheets on page 247 1 Select Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox on the Mailbox XXX Create Delete screen and then select Change Settings otme 6 Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox No job flow sheet has been linked to this mailbox 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close Cut Link Removes linkage w
208. ecurity Allows you to enable the HTTPS protocol on a specified port HTTPS Select to enable the HTTPS protocol Port Number Specify the port number Certificate Management Lists the certificate information assigned to the machine Subject Displays the subject for the certificate Issuer Displays the issuer of the certificate Serial Number Displays the serial number of the certificate Size of Public Key Displays the size of the public key assigned to the certificate Valid From Displays the date when the certificate became valid Valid Until Displays the date until which the certificate is valid Status Displays the certificate status Certificate Purpose Lists the purposes of issued certificate Import Click to import a certificate Import Certificate Password Allows you to specify a password Re enter Password Re enter the password for verification Filename Enter or locate the file name of the certificate 166 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Mail Notice Settings Mail Notice Settings Allows you to configure the e mail notice settings as follows Notice Frequency Allows you to select the frequency of sending the status e mail Notice Day Weekly Allows you to select the day of the week on which to send status e mail Notice Date Monthly Allows yo
209. ed Document List Lists the documents stored in mailboxes for printing scanning and faxing Also displays the fax jobs queued on the machine Copy Mode Settings Displays the Copy Mode Settings screen Select an option and press the lt Start gt button to output the following Settings List Common ltems 280 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Billing Meter Print Report Print Mode Settings Displays the Print Mode Settings screen Select an option and press the lt Start gt button to output the following Setting List Common Items PCL Settings List PCL Form List PDF Settings List TIFF Settings List TIFF Logical Printer List PS Logical Printer List PCL Font List PostScript Font List Scan Mode Settings Displays the Scan Mode Settings screen Settings List Displays the following options on the right hand side Select an option and press the lt Start gt button to output the list Setting List Common Items Extended Features Settings List Domain List Job Template List Displays the list of job templates that can be used on the machine For more information on job templates refer to Services in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 151 and the CentreWare Network Scanning Services Manual Address Book Displays ten Address Book options on the right hand side Each option represents 50 addresses giving 500 in total Select one or more opti
210. ed instead of an IP address the appropriate DNS information has to be entered via CentreWare Internet Services Without DNS properly defined the host name will not be translated into an IP address Shared Name Enter a name assigned for the shared folder If you select a server from the address book the preset name is displayed To change the name select Keyboard and use the displayed keyboard Not required for FTP servers Save in Specify the location or path of the directory for saving files If you select a server from the address book the preset location is displayed To change the location select Keyboard and use the displayed keyboard Login Name Enter a login name if required by the destination server If you select a server from the address book the preset name is displayed To change the name select Keyboard and use the displayed keyboard Password Enter a password if required by the destination server If you select a server from the address book the preset password is displayed To change the password select Keyboard and use the displayed keyboard Detailed Settings page 118 Clear Field Clears the currently selected field Keyboard page 119 1 Press the lt All Services gt button Memory 100 Use Address Book or Keyboard to enter the Save In location on the control panel 2 Select Scan to FTP SMB on Transfer Protocol Savat Ee the touch screen Ese Shared Name UTA Seite S
211. eeie 226 screen changing initial screen i e 194 Screen Default at Power ON ssassn 194 Screen Defaults Common Settings 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenaes 194 Fax Mode settings c cceecceeseeeeeeeeneeeees 229 362 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 Index screen messages fault codes ou eee 338 SeOCUFE PHINE tasado 141 Secure Print Stored Documents 5 271 Send E mail ooocccnncoonnnncnnnccoconcnnncnnnnrnnnononnnonnnnno 215 Send Header Fax Internet Fax oooocccccccoocncnccccccocnnnncncnnonennnns 96 Poll its dd 231 Send Options Fax Internet Fax 000 93 Sender Scan E mail o c ooonccnccnconncnnnncnononononon 114 Sender Drs 232 Sender s Details Scan E mail occcccc 114 Serial number oooccccconnccnnncccoconennncnonoronnononinonennnns 276 SOIVICCS nati lia ida 42 Services CentreWare Internet Services 151 services and features cccooonncnccccccooncnnnnnonononnnnnnos 36 Set Numbering E3 a PETE EE lisina lbn 74 Pensio ie aT T 200 Text Sizo aia as 200 Setting LISt aa aTa 281 settings Application Communication ooo occcccccccccnn 244 Auditron Administration cccccooonncnnnnccc 258 COMIMON icsccccciccssecscssccaccsesaacuacuassacceseaceeaaced 190 Copy Mode aaien E EEEa 205 E mail Internet Fax ooooccncccccconnncnnncccnononnno 238 Fax Mod cutis 229 MAlDOX cc 243 Mailbox Stored Docume
212. een allows you to configure or change machine settings specific to the scan features For more information refer to the following Scan Defaults page 225 Scan to FTP SMB Defaults page 226 Scan Size Defaults page 226 Output Size Defaults page 227 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 228 Other Settings page 228 1 Select Scan Mode Settings on the System Settings screen Scan Mode Settings 2 Select the required option sen eras Ger Defaults 3 Select Close 3 m Scan Size Defaults m Output Size Defaults 5 Reduce Enlarge Presets m Other Settings 224 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Scan Mode Settings Scan Defaults Use this feature to configure or change various default settings for the scan features 1 Select Scan Defaults on the Scan Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Chang Scan Defaults 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch en a aCe between screens 2 File Format TEF y 3 Lighten Darken Normal 3 Perform the necessary 4 Contrast Nora operations Esas Normal gJ 4 Select Close Original Type Specify the default for the type of documents to be scanned File Format Specify the default file format for saving scanned data Lighten Darken Specify the default density for scanning documents Contrast Specify the default contrast for scanning documents Shar
213. efaults ccoocccccccnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnenononnnnnnninaninininos 227 Reduce Enlarge Presets iaa ii is 228 iS A A A ehh asa areata aay 228 Fax Mode Settings a5 cic te ees ee eee oe tues eae As 229 Screen DetaultS sheana aa a A AAAA EEA ADe 229 Fax Det Sin its 230 Fax Conti A e A as 231 File Destination Output Destination ooocoooociconiniccccccccoccococoonnnrnnonnnoo 234 Reduce Enlarge Presets ooooooomicociccnnnnanancinnnccrnnr ran terrena ana 235 SCAN size DefaullS csi Regecainetshedathecasdaddeersace aa iaa Kiia e ro 235 Local Terminal Information c cccceeeeeeseeeccceeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeneeeees 236 Internet Fax Control ccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeneessnesneeenes 237 E mail Internet Fax Settings ccccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenereeeeeees 238 E mail DetaultS siii 239 Address Search Directory Service ooonocccoccccnnnncccncncccnncnnncnnnnnnnns 239 Other Settings ir A eaa alee 242 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 9 Table of Contents 12 13 Mailbox Stored Document Settings occcoccccccccccccnccnnncnnncnnnnnnnos 243 Mailbox Settings ooooooooocccooccconcconcconcoonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnons 243 Stored Document SettidgQS oooooocicicccnccccoccconcnonconnnonono non nn nono nononnnnnnos 244 Application Communication SettingS ccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 244
214. efer to Paper Size in the Setups chapter on page 195 NOTE Paper sizes detected by the machine vary depending on the Key Operator setting For more information refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 Bypass Tray Tray 5 The bypass tray allows you to use a variety of paper types The bypass tray is located on the left hand side of the machine A tray extension is provided to accommodate larger sized paper After loading paper stock in the bypass tray make sure that the bypass tray settings on the touch screen match the paper size and type of the stock loaded If they do not match reprogramming is required For more information on programming of the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen in the Copy chapter on page 52 NOTE To reduce unnecessary fuser and paper jams it is important that the programmed paper size and type is identical to the paper stock loaded 1 Load the paper neatly into the bypass tray making sure that the paper stock is in the center of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line NOTE When making single double sided copies on perforated paper J load the paper to feed the opposite side of the perforated edge first Feeding the perforated edge first might cause paper jams NOTE When making copies or prints on thick stock paper and the paper will not feed into the machine apply a curl to the paper as shown in the illustration on the rig
215. elect whether or not to delete the stored documents after printing Secure Print A secure print job requires a user ID and a password registered in the machine to print or delete the stored document A user ID and a password can be specified from the print driver 1 Select Secure Print on the Stored Documents screen Select the User ID you want to check Secure Print 001 John Smith Go to 001 200 gt EN Document List Refresh Brings the information up to date Go to Use this field to specify the Secure Print number to be displayed at the top of the screen You can set the number within the range of 1 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List Displays the password input screen after selecting a user ID from the list Enter the password to display the stored documents e Select All Selects all documents in the list e Delete Deletes a document Print Prints a document selected in the list You can select whether or not to delete the stored documents after printing NOTE If you have forgotten the password contact the Key Operator The Key Operator can access the stored documents without entering a password Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 271 12 Job Status Sample Print A sample print job allows you to print one set of a document prior to printing the whole quantity You can choose whether or not
216. ely Maintenance Information Do not attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the customer documentation supplied with your machine Do not use aerosol cleaners The use of cleaners that are not approved may cause poor performance of the equipment and could create a dangerous condition e Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the customer documentation Keep all these materials out of the reach of children Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do them by an authorized local dealer or unless a procedure is specifically described in the customer documentation Ozone Safety Information This product will produce ozone during normal operation The ozone produced is heavier than air and is dependent on copy volume Adhering to the correct environmental conditions as specified in the installation instructions will ensure that the concentration levels meet safe limits If you need additional information about ozone please request the Xerox publication Ozone by calling 1 800 828 6571 in the United States and Canada In other markets please contact your Service Provider For Consumables Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container gt Keep all consumables
217. em Tray Module and bypass tray seam side down e Load custom media in the bypass tray Refer to the Paper and Other Media chapter for procedures Cannot store a document for secure polling Cancel the operation and try again later due to full memory when additional memory is available 328 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fault Codes Fault Codes When a fault occurs the touch screen displays a message on how to clear the fault Some faults indicate customer maintenance while others require the attention of the Key Operator and or System Administrator The following table represents some of the fault codes and their corresponding corrective actions These may appear in the Print Queue or Faults List available in the Machine Status mode Code Description and Remedy 002 770 The job template could not be processed due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 003 750 No document was saved for the double sided Booklet Creation feature Check the setting of the double sided Booklet Creation feature 003 751 016 712 The specified document area is too small Select a greater resolution or a larger scan area 003 753 The selected resolution was too large for scanning mixed size originals using the document feeder Select 200 dpi or lower to scan the document 003 760 Incompatible features are selected on the
218. en e Side 2 Displays the Margin Shift Side 2 screen Margin Shift Side 1 Screen Use this feature to move images on the Side 1 page 1 Select Margin Shift Variable Shift in the Margin Shift Memory 100 1 Ready to Copy Quantit Quantity Margin Shift Side 1 Cancel screen 2 Sel Side 1 to displ h gt e Select Side 1 to display the Auto Center Margin Shift Side 1 screen om ow 3 Select the required option O vase sui 4 Select Save No Shift Disables the feature Auto Center Automatically moves images to the center of the paper Corner Shift Moves images to the corner of the paper Select one of eight arrows to specify the direction for the movement Variable Shift Moves images by specified amounts on the paper You can specify up to 50 mm 2 inches for both dimensions using the scroll buttons Margin Shift Side 2 Screen This feature allows you to move images on the Side 2 page Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 63 3 Copy Memory 100 Ready to Copy ae 1 Quantity cance Save 1 Select Margin Shift Variable Shift in the Margin Shift Margin Shift Side 2 screen O No Shift 50 0 50 tat mm Independent 2 Select Side 2 to display the Q weou A O Margin Shift Side 2 screen c sin ma O 3 Select the required option daD y 4 Select Save No Shi
219. enable the Auditron feature for scanning Auditron Fax Select to enable the Auditron feature for faxing Mailbox Print Select to enable the Auditron feature for printing documents in mailboxes Mailbox to PC Server Select to enable the Auditron feature for forwarding mailbox documents to a PC or a remote server Non account Print Select to enable the Auditron feature for print jobs without user IDs Account Number Specify the account number and click the Edit button to change account user information Auditron User Account Settings Account Number Displays the specified account number User Name Enter the user name User ID Enter the user ID Password Enter the password for the user ID Card ID Enter the card ID for the user Black Print Limit Specify the impression limit for printing Black Copy Limit Specify the impression limit for copying Black Scan Limit Specify the limit for scanning images Total Black Printed Impressions Displays the total print impressions Total Black Copied Impressions Displays the total copy impressions Total Black Scanned Images Displays the number of total scanned images Internet Services Settings Internet Services Settings Allows you to configure the following setting for CentreWare Internet Services Auto Refresh Interval Enter a time in seconds when the contents of the browser display will be refreshed automa
220. ength of paper size using the scroll buttons in 1 mm 0 1 inch increments The acceptable ranges of paper sizes are 89 297 mm 3 5 11 7 inches for width and 99 432 mm 3 9 17 0 inches for length 52 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Copying Paper Type Select a paper type from the preset types displayed The presets are set up by the Key Operator 2 Sided This feature allows you to automatically make double sided copies from single or double sided documents NOTE Before using the feature specify the document orientation to indicate top of the document in Original Orientation on the Scan Options screen NOTE The double sided copy option cannot be used with the following paper types Transparency Lightweight Heavyweight Labels cover stock as well as paper already printed on one side i e scrap paper Ready to Copy fea 1 Quantity Basic Copying Image Quality EXA Job Assembly ul Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 2 Sided Copy Output E 100 Dro EA sis Du Ds OBeao D HoH wp Left Ds ras GD erase B22 to DO Staples Lef I Di sa essre GB2r1t tH OD To Right Doe Doe Doe GRD vor 1 gt 1 Sided Produces single sided copies from single sided documents 1 gt 2 H to H Produces double sided copies from single sided documents 2 gt 2 H to H Produces double sided copies from double sided documents 2 gt 1 H to H Prod
221. entered file name Change Settings Displays the screen keyboard to enter or revise the file name For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 Keyboard Use the screen keyboard to enter parameters into the fields For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 1 Select an entry field 2 Select Keyboard on the Scan to FTP SMB screen elect Save Enter Server Name or IP Address and si gt 3 Perform the necessary ere OAO e operations LLL LOL JE Sle OC eres RON e sir 4 Select Save QUdQdUNACY Basic Scanning This section describes how to configure the basic scan settings such as scan resolution and file formats For more information refer to the following Lighten Darken page 120 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 119 5 Scan E mail 2 Sided Originals page 120 Original Type page 121 File Format page 122 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel qe asic Scanning 2p soled ASE MESSI a So A ee ae 2 Sided H to H Text amp Photo GA TIFF 4 Sided H to T 8 Oro 3 Select the Basic Scanning tab g e Dro Feo on the touch screen 4 Select the required option Lighten Darken Use this feature to adjust the density of the scanned image in seven levels Use th
222. er Limit feature If this feature is set to Off and the document length exceeds the paper length image loss may occur 232 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Mode Settings 2 Up On Receipt Sets whether to print two consecutive received documents onto one page It is effective in saving paper If the number of received pages is odd a blank page will be add at the end If the sizes of received pages are different the larger size will be used NOTE If the same size paper as the received document size is available that paper will be printed even when you set this feature to On 2 Sided Printing Sets whether to print received documents or private mailbox documents onto both sides of a sheet This is effective in saving paper NOTE Some data may not allow you to use this feature even when you set it to On Border Erase Top amp Bottom Sets the margin on the top and bottom of the received document by cutting off the original image You can set the margins within the range of 0 20 mm 0 0 8 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Border Erase Left amp Right Sets the margin on the left and right of the received document by cutting off the original image You can set the margins within the range of 0 20 mm 0 0 8 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Reduce 8 5x11 SEF Original to A4 SEF Sets whet
223. er tray guides ooooooccccccnncoccccccnnonncncnnnannncnnnnnnn 182 Paper TYPE ita T R 195 Paper Type Setup Menu cococccccccccccccccnccnnannnnnns 256 Paper Type Mismatch cccceceeseeeeeeeees 223 Paper Type Priority seescirecidr aieiaa 196 A Penaictete a a Ea a 212 Password System Administrator cooooonocccnnnnccconccccncnnnns 257 Password Scan E mail oooooococncnnnnininiccconcnncnnos 131 PCL Emulation oooooonnninicncnnocconnconcnnnononanannnnnonnns 277 PCL Emulation Print ocooooccccnnnnccnicccccncnncannnnnos 144 PCL Font List adi diria 281 PCL ROnm SE cnet hall tetetideccccietids cette dated 281 PCL Settings List ooocoonnonnncccnoninicccconcsrnnnnnnrnns 281 O EE a edt oul odes 278 PDF Pritt 2 2 A AS 147 PDF Settings LISt nanao a the bands 281 Personal Job Flow Sheet eeeeeeeees 289 Photo amp Text Recognition esee 197 Poling a Fac 103 POP Password Encryption s 217 POP3 Server Check Interval asaan 217 POP3 Server IP Address o ococcccccicccccciccccncnncnnnos 217 POP3 Server Login Name aeee 217 POP3 Server Name ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeereenaees 217 POP3 Server Password cooooocccccccccccoccconanannnncnnnos 217 POP3 Server Port Number oococcccccccncicnconnnncnncos 217 POP3 Server Settings Network Settings 217 POP3 Server Setup cocococccococcccccccccncccncnnannnnnnnnos 217 Port Settings Network Settings 212 Port Status CentreWare
224. erfine 600dpi With Panel selected the resolution level selected on the control panel is used Panel Maximum Image Size Select the maximum image size depending on recipient s paper size from among A3 B4 and A4 or among 8 5 x 11 B4 and 11 x 17 depending on the country 11x 1 7 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 253 11 Setups Item Description Default Internet Fax Profile Select an Internet Fax profile from among TIFF S TIFF S TIFF F and TIFF J An Internet Fax profile is an agreement between transmitting and receiving Internet Fax machines that limit image resolution paper size and other attributes With E mail selected Item Description Default E mail Address Enter an e mail address up to 128 characters Recipient Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Last Name Enter the family name of the recipient up to 32 characters First Name Enter the given name of the recipient up to 32 characters Custom Item 1 Enter supplemental information such as a telephone number up to 20 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen For more information refer to Attribute Name of Custom ltem 1 on page 241 Custom Item 2 Enter supplemental information such as a company or department name up
225. ernet Fax service to be retransferred as e mail Stored Document Settings Select whether documents stored in a mailbox are automatically deleted You can set the how long documents are kept and time of the deletion You can also select whether indivaidual documents are deleted or not 1 Select Stored Document Choose an item and select Change Settings S etti ng s Stored Document Settings 2 Select the item to be set or kaa ee Jocument Expiry Date Ol chang ed and select Change 2 Delete Charge Print Documents Disabled S etti ng s 3 Delete Secure Print Documents Disabled 4 Delete Sample Print Documents Disabled Gann 3 Set the setting value 4 Select Save Document Expiry Date Use this feature to discard documents from mailboxes when the specified period of time elapses Specify how long documents should be held up to 14 days and at what time they should be discarded using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Delete Charge Print Documents Select whether or not to delete charge print documents after the storage period has expired Delete Secure Print Documents Select whether or not to delete secure print documents after the storage period has expired Delete Sample Print Documents Select whether or not to delete sample print documents after the storage period has expired Application Communication Settings This screen allows you to view and change the status o
226. es the linked job flow sheet and returns to the Document List screen This button appears only when the mailbox has been linked with a job flow sheet Cut Link Releases linkage with a job flow sheet Create Change Link Displays the Create Change Link screen Select Job Flow Sheet Displays the Select Job Flow Sheet screen Create Change Link Screen This screen allows you to create or modify a job flow sheet 1 S el ect C reate C h an g e L i n k on E su want to link to this Mailbox and select Save Job Flow Sheet Fax to Sales the Job Flow Setting s screen Mailbox 002 Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox Name Last Update a eet Filterin 2 Perform the necessary E A A js ope rations Col Forward to GA 2004 1123 627 PM Penta C Print web orders 2004 1 23 6 28 PM Greate 3 Select Save COLFIP to Legal 2004 23 6siPM E Forward to customer info 2004 1 23 6 32 PM Sheet Filtering Displays the Sheet Filtering screen Create Allows you to create a new job flow sheet Edit Delete Allows you to modify or delete an existing job flow sheet For more information on Create and Edit Delete refer to Job Flow Sheets in the Setups chapter on page 247 Sheet Filtering Screen This feature allows you to limit the job flow sheets displayed on the screen by the log in status of the user operating the machine When logged in to the machine as a unique user e Personal Sheets
227. ess Protocol is an Internet protocol that email programs use to look up contact information from a server LDAP aware client programs can ask LDAP servers to look up entries in a wide variety of ways LDAP servers index all the data in their entries and filters may be used to select just the person or group you want and return just the information you want LDAP servers also provide authentication service so that only authenticated users can access the LDAP server However most LDAP servers do not require authentication Use this feature to configure or change various settings for searching required addresses through the address book saved in a connected directory server 1 Select Address Search Directory Service on the E Choose an item and select Change Settings Address Search Directory Service mail Internet Fax Settings ite Current Settings screen 1 Directory Service LDAP nabled x 2 Primary Server Not Set 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch AA A between screens 5 Secondary Server Port Number 389 ly 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close Directory Service LDAP Specify whether to allow the machine to access a connected directory server Primary Server Specify the primary directory server After selecting whether to use an IP address or a server name enter an IP address or a server name If a server name is used ensure that DNS information is proper
228. estricted by the Authentication feature Restriction depends on which of the following two ways the machine is used e Local Access e Remote Access For more information on the restrictions to mailboxes and job flow sheets using the Authentication feature refer to Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox on page 288 Local Access Direct operation of the machine from the control panel is called Local Access The functions restricted by Local Access are as follows Copy The copy function is restricted When the function uses job memory that job memory is also restricted 286 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Overview of Authentication Fax Internet Fax The fax and Internet Fax functions are restricted When either of these functions use job memory that job memory is also restricted Scan The Scan to Mailbox Network Scanning and Scan to FTP SMB functions are restricted When any of these functions uses job memory that job memory is also restricted Mailbox If the Authentication feature is enabled authentication is required for mailbox operations even if you are not using the Authentication and Auditron Administration features for copying faxing scanning and printing Job Flow Sheets If the Authentication feature is enabled authentication is required to execute job flow sheets even if you are not using the Authentication and Auditron Administration features for copyin
229. et Creation Covers Paper Tray Settings screen Select one of the presets to specify Covers Tray and Body Pages Tray Five presets including bypass tray are available for each For more information on the bypass tray refer to Tray 5 Bypass Screen on page 52 Booklet Creation Originals Screen Allows you to specify the type of the documents being used to make booklets Memory 100 1 Select Booklet Creation Originals on the Booklet Ready to Copy Gun 1 Quantity 4 Booklet Creation Originals Cancel J Save Creation screen Originals i 7 Head to Head 2 Select the required option Q ise 3 Select Save 2 Sided Toe O 68 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Output Format Copy 1 Sided Use to copy single sided documents 2 Sided Use to copy double sided documents When selected the Originals option is available Originals Head to Head Select if your documents are head to head with the binding edge on the left side e Head to Toe Select if your documents are head to toe with the binding edge on the top edge Covers This feature allows you to add paper or card covers to a copy job NOTE If the machine s memory becomes full while scanning a document with this feature enabled follow the instructions on the screen to cancel the job Delete the stored documents or reduce the amount of pages to free some memory and
230. ettings IP Address List Allows you to limit the IP address used for receiving print data when TCP IP is enabled e IP Filter Allows you to enable or disable IP filtering No Displays the entry number of the IP address list from 1 to 10 e Permitted IP Address Enter the IP address for receiving print data when TCP IP is enabled IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for each IP address entered in permitted IP address LPD Allows you to configure the time out settings for the LPD port Port Number Allows you to configure the port number The default is 515 TBCP Filter This is only displayed when PostScript is enabled Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails SNMP Allows you to configure the following options when accessing the printer via SNMP Community Name Read Only Enter the community name used for display Community Name Read Write Enter the community name for display and update Community Name Trap Notification Enter the trap notification community name System Administrator Enter the name of the System Administrator Trap Notification Settings Allows you to set the trap destination addresses IPP Allows you to configure the following options when using IPP Internet Printing Protocol Port Number The default IPP port number 631 will be displayed This is a display only ite
231. etwork Scanning 116 Job Type on Job Status screen aeee 195 jobs completed cooocccccccoccconccanononconcconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 269 Current and pending ccccconoocccnccononicnninanannn 268 Jobs CentreWare Internet Services 156 K Key Operator Shared Job Flow Sheet 289 Key Operators ena raa a ETE E 285 Keyboard Fax Internet Fax coooococccccccccccccnccnccnaoncnncnncnnnon 83 Scan to FTP SMB niaaa aaae aeaaea 119 Scan E mail ecceceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 113 Keyboard Input Restriction eeeee 204 L Language button ooocooccccccnococcccccnnnonccncnanannncninanna 35 language changing initial language 194 languages displayed on the touch screen 14 laser Safety A A 18 CENSO ii tocas 25 Lighten Darken COPY sates tii abit 57 Fax Internet Fax coooococccccccccccccnocononannnoncnncnnnno 90 Scan E mail atenei r e a a 120 Lighten Darken Contrast Scan E mail 123 limitations and cautions 0oooooocccccnncnccccccccnoncncnnnos 16 Line Monitor Volume cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeetees 194 linking job flow sheets to mailboxes Authentication ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeceeeeeeees 296 loading paper celeste ela eneesedeeesedeeenaedeertheeedinss 181 Sap iia nds 310 the paper trays c oooococccccnconconcnnccnncnncnncnnnanannns 181 LOGal ACCESS viii ti tanta 286 Local Name sssrini aie a 236 Local Termin
232. f the SOAP port used to communicate with external applications provided by our company For more information refer to the following SOAP Port Status page 245 244 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu 1 Select Application Communication Settings on the a System Settings screen iana Choose an item and select Current Settings 1 SOAP Port Status 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close Change Settings SOAP Port Status Use this feature to specify whether to enable the SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol port Setup Menu Mailbox This screen allows you to register various items such as mailboxes destination addresses and job flow sheets For more information refer to the following Mailbox page 245 Job Flow Sheets page 247 Address Book page 250 Group Send page 255 Comments page 256 Paper Type page 256 1 Select Setup Menu on the System Settings screen Setup Menu a Mailbox u Group Send 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close J Job Flow Sheets m Comments m Address Book m Paper Type Use this feature to create mailboxes for saving confidential incoming fax documents or scanned documents Fax documents in mailboxes can be printed out at a convenient time and scanned documents in mailboxes can be imported to computers 1 Select Mail
233. fic prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 1998 2003 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes softwar
234. fice equipment industry to promote energy efficient copiers printers fax multifunction machine personal 24 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide About License computers and monitors Reducing product energy consumption helps combat smog acid rain and long term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result from generating electricity Xerox ENERGY STAR equipment is preset at the factory to enter a low power state and or shut off completely after a specified period of use These energy saving features can reduce product energy consumption by half when compared to conventional equipment Recovery times from low power mode 12 sec Recommended types of recycled paper Type 3R91165 Canada Environmental Choice ENT SR og N Terra Choice Environmental Services Inc of Canada has verified that this product conforms to all applicable Environmental Choice EcoLogoM requirements for minimized impact to the environment 308 gt EN 4 O Vray 89 Arne As a participant in the Environmental Choice program Xerox Corporation has determined that this product meets the Environmental Choice guidelines for energy efficiency Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice program in 1988 to help consumers identify environmentally responsible products and services Copier printer digital press and fax products must meet energy efficiency and
235. figuration Document Glass Capacity A document within 30 mm of thickness can be copied with the document glass cover feeder closed Document Sizes Standard size A5 LEF to A3 SEF Custom size width 15 to 297 mm 0 6 to 11 7 length 15 to 432 mm 0 6 to 17 0 Document Weights 38 to 128 g m 50 to 128 g m in double sided mode Auto Size Sensing Yes NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the Key Operator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 Document Feeder Capacity 50 sheets of 38 to 128 g m 50 to 128 g m in double sided mode Document Sizes Standard size A5 to A3 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 x 17 SEF 342 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Paper Supply Custom size for width 139 7 to 297 mm 5 5 to 11 7 for length 210 to 432 mm 8 3 to 17 0 Long Document Scan Feature 297 x 600 mm 11 7 x 23 6 maximum length NOTE This feature is not available in the double sided mode When using this feature to scan long documents which exceed 432 mm 17 0 inches the operator must feed ine document one sheet at a time The paper weight should be between 60 and 90 g m Document Weight 38 to 128 g m 50 to 128 g m in double sided mode Mixed Sizes Yes if so specified on the machine and the lead edges
236. figurations of respective models Machine Size With Document Feeder and Two Tray Module or TTM W x D x H 640 x 649 x 1 112 mm 25 2 x 25 6 x 43 8 inches With Document Glass Cover W x D x H 640 x 649 x 990 mm 25 2 x 25 6 x 38 9 inches Space Requirements W x D 1 340 x 1 185 mm 52 7 x 46 6 inches With Finisher W x D 2 140 x 1 185 mm 84 2 x 46 6 inches Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 341 17 Specifications Machine Weight CopyCentre with Document Glass Cover 60 kg 132 Ibs Copier Speed From Tray 1 One sided CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 A4 Letter LEF 23 cpm cycles per minute single sided double sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 13 cpm cycles per minute single sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 8 cpm cycles per minute double sided mode CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 128 A4 Letter LEF 28 cpm cycles per minute single sided double sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 15 cpm cycles per minute single sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 10 cpm cycles per minute double sided mode CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 133 A4 Letter LEF 33 cpm cycles per minute single sided double sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 17 cpm cycles per minute single sided mode A3 11 x 17 SEF 11 cpm cycles per minute double sided mode First Copy Out Time From Tray 1 A4 or Letter LEF 4 5 seconds Warm up Time Cold Start Approximately 12 seconds varies with machine con
237. formance of this product have been verified using Xerox materials only WARNING Any unauthorized alteration which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices may impact the product certification Please contact your authorized Service Provider for more information Warning Markings All warning instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed Warning This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there is AN the possibility of personal injury Warning This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there A are heated surfaces which should not be touched Electrical Supply This product shall be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the product s data plate label If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements please consult your local power company for advice WARNING This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature To avoid risk of electric shock contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are unable to insert the plug into it Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to an electrical outlet that lacks an earth connection terminal Operator Accessible Areas This equipment has been designed to restrict operator
238. ft Disables the feature Auto Center Automatically moves images to the center of the paper Corner Shift Moves images to the corner of the paper Select one of eight arrows to specify the direction for the movement Variable Shift Moves images by specified amounts on the paper You can specify up to 50 mm 2 inches for both dimensions using the scroll buttons Independent Shift Allows you to make settings for Side 2 independently from the settings for Side 1 Mirror Shift Automatically places the image on the Side 2 page matching the position of the image on the Side 1 page Image Rotation This feature allows you to automatically rotate the image to match the orientation of the paper in the tray Memory 100 Ready to Copy Sin 1 Quantity Cancel Save 1 Select Image Rotation on the Scan Options screen Image Rotation i 1 When Reduce Enlarge or Paper Supply is Rotation Direction 2 Select the req uired option O Off set to Auto the image of the original Staple Position will be rotated to match the orientation of the paper 3 Select Save O Always On 12 gt 12 off eo El Disables the feature Always On Rotates an image every time 64 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Options Copy On during Auto Rotates an image only when selecting Auto in the Paper Supply or Reduce Enlarge features Rotation Direction
239. g faxing scanning and printing Print The printing of documents that have been saved to the machine is restricted for the Charge Print feature Remote Access Operation of the machine through a network using CentreWare Internet Services is called Remote Access The functions restricted by Remote Access are as follows Print Printing is limited to print jobs sent from a computer To use the Authentication feature use the print driver to set authentication information such as user ID and password The print jobs sent to the machine that fail authentication are set to Charge Print and are either saved to the machine or deleted depending on the selected setup option Direct Fax Direct Fax from a computer is restricted To use the Authentication feature use the fax driver to set authentication information such as user ID and password The fax jobs sent to the machine that fail authentication are set to Charge Print and are either saved to the machine or deleted depending on the selected setup option Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 287 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration CentreWare Internet Services If the Authentication feature is enabled authentication is required to access the CentreWare Internet Services home page even if you are not using the Authentication and Auditron Administration features for copying faxing scanning or printing Authentication for Job Flo
240. g the drum cartridge make sure that the new cartridge is the correct one specified for the machine Recycling the Drum Cartridge The drum cartridge is designed to be re manufactured To recycle used drum cartridges return them to Xerox in the original packaging Return labels are included with each new cartridge Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 307 15 Maintenance Inserting the New Drum Cartridge 1 Remove the new drum cartridge from the box 2 Carefully remove the protective sheet from the cartridge by picking the sealing tape up 3 Place the cartridge in position as shown and slide it into the machine until it clicks 4 Pull out the cartridge tape straight without breaking it 5 Push the cartridge again to ensure it is positioned correctly 308 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Replacing the Toner Cartridge 6 Close the Cover A until it latches and then close the bypass tray 7 Close the front cover Replacing the Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is a customer replaceable unit After approximately 30 000 copies prints the touch screen will display a message that it is time to replace the cartridge When ordering a new cartridge use the following table to determine the correct reorder code for your machine Country Part Number Commen
241. g the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Maximum Address Entries Specify the maximum total number of To Cc and Bcc recipients of a single e mail Select the number in the range from 1 to 100 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Auto Print Error Mail Specify whether to print error notification mails automatically when e mails are not delivered due to an error Response to Read Receipts MDN Specify whether to send the processing result to the host machine when an Internet Fax document is received Read Receipts MDN Specify whether to request destinations to send back acknowledgement when opening e mail Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail Specify whether to automatically print out transmission confirmation e mail 242 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Mailbox Stored Document Settings Max No of Pages for Split Send Specify whether or not to divide scanned data into multiple files by the selected number of pages If you select On then select the number of pages in the range of 1 to 999 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad NOTE Scanned data can be divided into multiple files only when PDF is selected as the file format Mailbox Stored Document Settings This screen allows you to configure various settings for mailboxes created for saving confidential incoming fax documents or scanned documents For more information refer to the following Mailbox Se
242. ge settings use the drop down list box text boxes and check boxes on the page The default settings in the drop down list box are indicated with an asterisk 4 After changes have been made click Apply New Settings e To cancel any changes you have made click Restore Settings e To display the current machine settings click Refresh Status NOTE Some settings will be available only after you restart CentreWare Internet Services or after the machine is switched off and on Default User ID and Password If the System Administrator mode is enabled in CentreWare Internet Services settings you will be prompted to enter the System Administrator user ID and password when 160 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties changes are made The default user ID and password for the System Administrator are 11111 and x admin respectively This ID and Password are default and can be changed by the System Administrator Properties Features The following table lists the items that can be set Some items may not be displayed depending on your machine configuration Feature Setting items Machine Details Product Name Displays the name of the product This is a display only item Serial No Displays the serial number of the machine This is a display only item Name Enter the name of the machine Location Enter the location of the machine Contact
243. geable Items Required Type Send Automatically Yes Entered Sent faxes pages transmissions Manually Yes Entered Sent faxes pages transmissions Receive Automatically No Incoming faxes Receptions pages Print transmissions printed pages sheets Manually No Incoming faxes Receptions pages transmissions printed pages sheets Confidenti Receiving No Incoming faxes Receptions pages al Receive confidential transmissions documents Printing confidential Yes Entered Printed pages sheets documents Polling Storing documents Yes for polling Automatic sending No Unentered Sent faxes pages confidential Printing polled Yes Entered Polls pages documents transmissions printed pages sheets Printing documents Yes Entered Printed pages sheets for polling Relay Receiving relayed No Incoming faxes Receptions pages Broadcast documents transmissions Relay broadcasting No Relay Sent faxes pages printing broadcasting transmissions printed pages sheets Direct Fax Yes Entered Sent faxes pages transmissions Internet Fax Send Yes Entered Sent Internet Faxes pages Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 301 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration JOBS Authentication User Document Manageable Items Required Type Internet Printing received No Incoming Receptions pages Fax documents Internet Fax printed pages sheets Receive automatically Prin
244. ging copying them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled Created using Job Flow Sheets on the Setup Menu screen Generally Shared Mailbox Shared by Personal Key Operators Job Flow Operations General Key General Key General Key General Key Users Operators Users Operators Users Operators Users Operators Create O X X X X O X X Display O O X O O O X O Edit O O X O X O X O Copy O O X O O O X O Delete O O X O X O X O Select Run O O X O O O x O O Operation available X Operation not available The owner of a copied job flow sheet becomes a duplicate user 290 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE You can perform the same operations regardless of whether job flow sheets are created using Mailbox or Job Flow Sheets on the Setup Menu screen Unentered Users General Users nel ll Shared Operators Personal Create x Display Edit Copy Delete Select Run X XxX XxX XxX X XxX X XxX XxX XxX X X XxX X XxX XxX XxX XxX XxX X XxX XxX XxX X X XxX Link to Mailbox
245. gs 1 SMTP Server Setup By IP Address 2 Perform the necessa ry 2 SMTP Server IP Address ARO O pe rati ons 3 SMTP Server Name Not Set J 4 SMTP Server Port Number 25 eE 3 Select Close i 5 E mail Send Authentication Off J y SMTP Server Setup Select the method of specifying the SMTP server SMTP Server IP Address Allows you to enter the IP address of the SMTP server in the form of vvv xxX yyy ZZZ This entry is required only when selecting By IP Address on the SMTP Server Setup screen SMTP Server Name Allows you to enter the SMTP server name in the style of FADN within a maximum of 256 characters This entry is required only when selecting By Server Name on the SMTP Server Setup screen SMTP Server Port Number Allows you to enter the port number for the SMTP server communication within the range of 1 65535 E mail Send Authentication Allows you to specify the authentication method for the SMTP server communication If you select POP before SMTP the POP server authentication is required before transmitting e mails to the SMTP server If you select SMTP AUTH the SMTP server authentication is enabled SMTP AUTH Login Name Allows you to set the user name used to log in to the SMTP server up to 64 characters This entry is required if SMTP AUTH is selected on the E mail Send Authentication screen SMTP AUTH Password Allows you to set the password used to log in to the SMTP server up to 36
246. h the guide lever on each guide and slide the guides to their new position To secure the guides in position release the levers NOTE When changing the size or type of stock in the tray refer to Paper Tray Attributes in the Setups chapter on page 195 For more information on reprogramming the tray contact the Key Operator 3 Load the paper neatly and tightly against the left hand side of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line NOTE When making single double sided copies on perforated paper load the paper so that the opposite side to the perforations feeds first Feeding the perforated edge first may cause paper jams 4 If the paper guides have been moved slide the guides to just touch the edge of the paper NOTE When loading standard size paper set the guides onto the notches on the tray to match the paper size The machine recognizes 8K 16K paper as standard size even though paper trays have no notches for these sizes 5 Close the paper tray Paper can be loaded either short edge feed or long edge feed 0 Long edge feed Short edge feed LEF SEF 182 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Loading Paper 6 Set the machine to detect the paper size automatically or manually specify the required size For more information r
247. has occurred Click the Maintenance tab on the Main Panel on the home page e Date Time Displays the date and time when the error occurred Information is displayed in the form of mm dd yyyy hh mm Error Code Displays the error code Information is displayed in the form of xxx yyy Support This page displays the link to the customer support website The name for the link displayed on the screen and the URL for the customer support website can be changed NOTE The customer support website will not be displayed if the machine is not connected to Internet Changing the Settings Click Change Settings enter the new name and URL for the website then click Apply New Settings NOTE If the Administrator Mode is enabled you will be prompted to enter the user ID and password before changes are made The default user ID is 11111 and the password is x admin Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 179 9 CentreWare Internet Services 180 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 10 Paper and Other Media The machine is designed to use various paper types and other media This chapter provides information on loading paper and other types of media into the machine Loading Paper The machine can be equipped with various paper trays This section provides information on how to load paper into each type of tray NOTE Make sure the side and rea
248. hat enables the dialing of multiple locations by entering one three character code The machine stores the image in memory and then transmits it to each location Gray patterns that are neither black nor white A double sided document where the second side displays the image with the top of the document at the top of the page You typically turn over the page from the side edge A double sided document where the second side displays the image with the top of the document at the bottom of the page You typically turn over the page from the bottom edge A feature which makes the border between black and white smooth with rough edges reduced giving the appearance of a higher resolution Paper used to separate sections or topics in a set of documents typically colored stock A worldwide communications network that combine miscellaneous networks Unlike a regular fax machine Internet Fax uses corporate networks or the Internet to send or receive e mail TIFF attachments An abbreviation for Internet Protocol This is a communication protocol of the network layer and is supported by a variety of computer platforms IP controls the routing of the data A group of copy fax or print data The canceling and outputting of copying faxing and printing is done on a job basis A designated user who sets Machine Copy and Fax defaults and maintains the machine The buttons on the control panel 350 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCent
249. he current copy or scan job and is not resolved within the selected period of time the machine allows execution of the next job You can select the time period in the range from 4 to 99 minutes The time entry field appears only when you select On With this feature enabled the machine allows execution of print jobs if you do not perform any operation within the selected period of time You can select the time period in the range from 1 to 240 seconds The time entry field appears only when you select On Auto Power Saver The machine provides two types of power saver mode Low Power and Sleep When in the Sleep Mode the machine saves more power than in the Low Power Mode The machine enters the Low Power Mode and when you do not perform any operation within the selected period of time the machine automatically switches to the Sleep Mode You can select the time period for each mode in the range from 2 to 60 minutes You must select a longer time period for the Sleep Mode than for the Low Power Mode 192 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Audio Tones Use this feature to select the volume level of tones to be generated at various occasions You can choose different volume levels for each item shown on the screen 1 Select Audio Tones on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to s
250. he custom option If Custom is used documents will be scanned according to the specified size regardless of their actual size 1 Select Scan Size on the Scan ven Oe Options screen es 2 Perform the necessary Size Detect O o Q sra 7 EOT operations O wo Qa Q sra x pm 3 Select Save Q AJO QO Ba O Photo2L 5x7 inch E OQ wo Qro Qro Load y Auto Size Detect Automatically detects the size of standard sized documents Presets Allows you to select from the 11 preset standard sizes in Portrait or Landscape orientations The presets are set up by the Key Operator Custom Allows you to specify the document size manually using scroll buttons within the ranges of 15 297 mm 0 6 11 7 inches for width and 15 432 mm 0 6 17 0 inches for length 126 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Scan Options Mixed Size Originals This feature allows you to scan mixed sizes of documents using the document feeder at the same time and save them in a single file NOTE To enable the feature select Auto Size Detect on the Scan Size screen Memory 100 1 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen Enter th E mail v ot be sent when o Mixed Size Originals Cancel 2 Select On to enable the Pietro ngs feature Off Adjust Document Guides Load A5 originals in portrait orientation 3 Select Save Si Border
251. he documents If the image is lighter near the borders select a darker image quality setting on the touch screen Replace the drum cartridge Solid density variations Check the quality of the documents Select Lighten Darken on the touch screen Replace the drum cartridge Image loss When copying a document from a larger paper size to a smaller size reduce the image to fit onto the smaller paper size If you are using A4 210 x 297 mm 8 5 x 11 0 inches paper set a slightly smaller document size for example copy 90 instead of 100 or select Copy All on the Reduce Enlarge screen Select Auto Center in Margin Shift Output does not reflect the selections made on the touch screen Select Save after each selection on the touch screen if one exists Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 327 16 Problem Solving Symptom Recommendation The Finisher does not stack output correctly Check that the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Pages in the set are not stapled e Check that the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Paper delivered to an output tray is not e Flip over the paper stack in the paper tray properly stacked up or rotate it head to toe Paper curls e Check that the paper is loaded correctly Load paper in Trays 1 2 3 and 4 seam side up Load paper in the Tand
252. he machine behind Cover A as shown in the diagram For your convenience record the serial number in the space below Serial Number Keep a record of any error messages This information helps us solve problems faster Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 13 1 Before Using the Machine Languages Displayed on the Touch Screen You can change the languages in the following two ways To change the language for temporary use press the lt Language gt button on the control panel then select the required language NOTE The language returns to the default language after rebooting the machine To change the default language enter the System Settings mode select Common Settings then select Screen Defaults In the Screen Defaults screen select the required language as Default Language For more information refer to Common Settings on page 190 Conventions This section describes the conventions used throughout this User Guide In this guide you will find that some terms are used interchangeably e Paper is synonymous with media e Document is synonymous with original e Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 is synonymous with the machine Key Operator System Administrator Orientation Key Operator describes the person who is responsible for hardware maintenance System Administrator refers to the person who sets up the network install
253. he print language in Print Mode under Port Settings 016 764 Could not connect to the SMTP server Contact the System Administrator 016 765 Could not send e mail as the disk on the SMTP server was full Contact the System Administrator 016 766 An error occurred on the SMTP server Contact the System Administrator 016 767 Could not send e mail as the e mail address was wrong Verify that the e mail address is correct and try sending the e mail again 016 768 Could not connect to the SMTP server as the e mail address of the machine was incorrect Check the e mail address of the machine 016 769 The SMTP server does not support delivery confirmation DSN Send e mail without setting confirmation 016 771 Could not acquire the scan data repository address by CentreWare Scan 016 772 Services Specify the correct DNS address Alternatively set the address of the scan data repository as an IP address 016 773 The IP address of the machine is not set correctly Check the DHCP environment Alternatively manually specify an IP address of the machine 332 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fault Codes Code Description and Remedy 016 774 Compression conversion could not be processed due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 016 775 Image conversion could not be processed due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the d
254. heck if the relay station is correctly registered in the specified speed dial code Also check the contents of the address number registered at the relay station 034 530 No correct operations were performed in a certain period of time Perform an operation within a certain period of time Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 335 16 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 034 728 Transmission cannot be made because the telephone number is not correct 034 784 Check the telephone number of the remote machine and send the document 034 785 again Customers who use G3 DP Dial Pause should check that the dialed 034 796 number does not contain or ff 035 701 034 790 Is the telephone line correctly connected to the machine Check that the phone 034 791 line is connected correctly and send the document again These codes are 034 792 displayed only in certain countries 034 793 034 794 034 795 035 702 The other party cancelled the transmission Ask the other party to check their 036 507 machine status and resend the document if necessary 035 704 The specified feature such as F Code is not supported by the remote machine 035 744 Contact the other party and resend the document without using the feature if 035 745 required 035 705 The remote machine may have encountered a problem Contact the other party 035 708 and resend the document if
255. her a 8 5 x 11 0 inches 216 x 279 mm size document is to be reduced to the A4 size when Reduce Enlarge in the Scan Options screen is set to Auto Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode Sets whether to perform gradation level correction for documents containing photographs Select Error Diffusion or Dither Box Selector Line Setup Sets whether to sort the received documents to the mailboxes by incoming line when more than one line is in use NOTE When setting the box selector feature select a mailbox that has already been registered If an unregistered mailbox is selected the received document is automatically printed instead of stored in a mailbox Memory Full Procedure If the hard disk becomes full while reading documents a message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine the method of the data processing to be performed after the specified period elapses in keeping the message displayed If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select Run Job the data will be effective and processed as completely accumulated data Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 233 11 Setups Maximum Stored Pages Sets the maximum number of pages that can be stored in memory when you scan documents for fax transmission The maximum number can be set to 999 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Mailbox Receive Displa
256. his field select Enter Sender s Address or Address Book If you select Enter Sender s Address the sender s address is used for this field 114 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Save in Scan to Mailbox File Name Enter a file name to be assigned to the scanned data After selecting this field select Keyboard Clear Field Clears the currently selected entry field Enter Sender s Address Adds the sender s address as the reply to address Address Book Displays the list of e mail addresses registered in the address book Use the address book to select the sender s e mail address or reply to address Keyboard Displays the screen keyboard Use the keyboard to enter the sender s address subject reply to address or file name For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 Change Settings Save in Use this feature to change the entered destination address 1 Select Change Settings on the ares E mail screen 2 el ms 2 Perform the necessary Select Recipient Recipient Name E mail Address tera operations Address Book o ox S eal 3 Select Save roroa jent m Add Sender For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 E ae Scan to Mailbox This section describes how to select a mailbox on the machine to save scanned
257. hows the setting items available on the Create New page the Basic Scanning Added Features Image Quality and DMF tabs When Create New is selected on the Device Templates screen the Create New page is displayed To select the required tab click Next to go to next page Setting Item Description Template Name Enter the name of the template Description Enter the description for the template Repository Type Select the method of specifying how scanned data is stored When Public is selected you can select the existing repository setup from the drop down menu displayed When Private is selected you can configure the repository manually Protocols Select FTP or SMB for a transfer protocol NOTE This item will be displayed only when Private is selected for Repository Type Server Name Enter the address of the server to transfer scanned data NOTE This item will be displayed only when Private is selected for Repository Type Port No Enter the port number NOTE This item will be displayed only when Private is selected for Repository Type Remote Path Enter the path where the scanned data will be transferred NOTE This item will be on the screen When SMB is selected in Protocols you displayed only when Private is can enter the name of the shared volume selected for Repository Type Login Name Enter the user ID for the specified server NOTE This item will b
258. ht Note however that excessively bending or folding the paper might cause paper jams NOTE When loading envelopes make sure the flaps are closed and that the envelopes are oriented on the tray so that the flaps will enter the machine first However when loading C5 size envelopes set the long edge feed so that the edge with the flaps is facing towards you 2 Slide the side guides towards the paper until they are just touching the edge of the stock Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 183 10 Paper and Other Media Tandem Tray Module TTM The Tandem Tray Module allows you to load larger amounts of paper It consists of two trays NOTE You cannot load custom size paper into the Tandem Tray Module 1 Pull out the Tray 3 or Tray 4 of TTM The elevator in the tray lowers 2 Place the paper stock tightly against the left rear corner of the tray NOTE Do not load paper above the maximum fill line NOTE Always load paper into the tray in the orientation shown in the diagram 3 Close the tray The elevator rises and positions the paper for use Auto Tray Switching The machine automatically switches from one tray to another under the following conditions When printing and the active tray runs out of paper When the paper size sensed differs from the previously determined size When paper feeding starts and the selected tray is
259. ibes how to use the scan features For more information on the specific types of scan refer to the following To scan and e mail documents E mail page 111 After a document is scanned scanned data is automatically sent to specified destinations as an e mail attachment To scan and save documents in the mailbox Save in Scan to Mailbox page 115 Scanned documents are saved in a specified mailbox on the machine To scan and send documents using a job template Job Templates Network Scanning page 116 According to the settings in a selected scan job template documents are scanned processed and then uploaded to a specified server To scan and send documents using the FTP or SMB protocol Save in Scan to FTP SMB page 117 After a document is scanned scanned data is automatically uploaded to a specified destination using the FTP or SMB protocol NOTE To use the scan features the machine must be set up on a network For more information refer to the Quick Network Setup Guide and the System Administration Guide NOTE Some of the features described in this chapter are optional and may not apply to your machine configuration Scanning Procedure This section describes the basic scanning procedures Follow the steps below 1 Load the Documents page 108 2 Select the Features page 108 3 Start the Scan Job page 109 4 Confirm the Scan Job in the Job Status page 109 5 Save th
260. ication User Name Specify the user ID for SMTP authentication SMTP Authentication Password Specify the password for SMTP authentication Domain Filtering Receive Allows you to specify whether to restrict incoming e mail Permitted Domain Enter the domain name to permit incoming mails when Domain Filter is enabled HTTP Allows you to configure the HTTP protocol settings as follows Port Number Enter the port number that receives requests from the browser Maximum Sessions Enter the maximum number of sessions between 1 and 15 Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails UPnP Allows you to specify the port number for UPnP Port Number Specify the UPnP port number SSDP Allows you to configure the SSDP protocol settings as follows Valid Advertising Period Specify the time during which the advertising period remains valid Maximum TTL Specify the maximum TTL LDAP Allows you to configure the LDAP protocol settings as follows LDAP Server Address Enter the LDAP server address Port Number Specify the LDAP port number Emulation Settings Print Mode Allows you to specify the type of printer language to use when a print job is sent using Parallel USB EtherTalk SMB NetWare LPD IPP or Port9100 Only the enabled protocol will be displayed Auto Allows you to set the machine so that it will automatically
261. ieesrrrrno 13 Xx Xerox Website india dadas 13 Xerox Welcome Center ooconccnccccconocononcnonononenonanos 13 364 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide
262. ient page 82 Address Book page 82 Speed Dial page 83 Keyboard page 83 Special Characters page 85 Internet Fax page 87 2 Sided Originals page 88 Resolution page 89 Original Type page 89 1 Press the lt All Services gt button nter recipient Use C button to cancel entry Mem 00 To Next Recipient E Fax on the control panel a Pasie Features N Image Quality Scan Options Send Options On hook Others 2 Sided Originals Original Type Resolution 2 Select Fax Internet Fax on the B rra a e Dove tou ch screen a Q2 Sided H to H Dre amp Photo CH rire Address Book W Sided H to T Phi C Superfine 400dpi 3 Select the required option a Deere 60049 Keyboard Internet Fax Use this feature to switch transmission modes between the regular fax and the Internet Fax 1 Select the Internet Fax check Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Memory 100 box on the Basic Features f se ventas mam ty Y Semn pi Y Sn pt Guu asic Features Image Quality Scan Options Send Options N On hook Others screen Select the check box 2 Sided Originals Original Type Resolution again to revert to the regular fax Y rera E a BD sien m d DD Sided H to H Dre amp Photo CO rire ode m Address Bock C32 Sided H to T KDDPnto C Superfine 400dpi O Doe CD superfine 600dpi Keyboard Select this check box to transmit scanne
263. ies you can set the default position of Side 1 in the Margin Shift feature on the Scan Options screen If not configured to perform double sided copies this option is displayed as Margin Shift Margin Shift Side 2 If your machine is configured to perform double sided copies you can set the default position of Side 2 in the Margin Shift feature on the Scan Options screen Image Rotation Sets the default for the Image Rotation feature on the Scan Options screen Image Rotation Direction Sets the default for the image rotation direction when you select Always On or On during Auto with the Image Rotation feature on the Scan Options screen Original Orientation Sets the default for the Original Orientation feature on the Scan Options screen Select Head to Top or Head to Left Copy Output Sets the default for the Copy Output feature on the Basic Copying screen Select Auto Collated or Uncollated Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 207 11 Setups Output Destination Sets the default tray for output If the machine is equipped with the finisher select Center Output Tray or Finisher Tray NOTE Before using the Center Output Tray it must be enabled through the Extended Tray Module setting Refer to Extended Tray Module on page 200 NOTE When the staple function is used the output tray changes to Finisher Tray automatically Annotat
264. ight 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper Paper Sizes B5 LEF A4 LEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF Paper Weight 60 to 216 g m Double sided Module Paper Sizes A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 SEF to A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 SEF Paper Weight 60 105 g m Kk Depending on the type of paper used and the operating environment paper may not feed to the machine properly or print quality may be negatively affected Paper Output Center Output Tray Capacity Approximately 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 lb bond paper Delivery Face down in order offset stacking is available NOTE Paper Weight must be between 60 to 105 g m when using the offset stacking feature Finisher Capacity 1 000 sheets of B5 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 500 sheets of A3 SEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 17 x 11 SEF NOTE When selecting the Mix Size Originals feature to output the different size documents the maximum capability is 300 sheets Paper Sizes A4 SEF A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 8 5 x 13 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF 17 x 11 SEF 16K LEF 8K SEF Paper Weight 64 to 128 g m Set Size 50 sheets of 90 g m or less paper 20 Ib bond Staples 5 000 per cartridge or more Staples 2 to 50 sheets of 80 g m or lighter paper NOTE The maximum sets of stapled documents at a time is 50 sets Electrical Specifications Frequency 50 60 Hz 344 Xerox C
265. iginals Screen Use this feature when changing the orientation of documents 1 Select More on the Basic Scanning screen Enter the recipient s E mail comcel save 2 Select the req U i red option i Originals Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Top 3 Select Save z ee 2 Sided Head to Toe Head to Left 1 Sided O Scans single sided documents 2 Sided Originals 2 Sided Scans double sided documents When you select this option Originals is displayed at the right of the screen Originals Head to Head Select to scan documents opened side by side e Head to Toe Select to scan documents opened vertically Original Orientation Head to Top Select to position documents with the head of the document away from the operator Head to Left Select to position documents with the head of the document to the operator s left For this orientation documents are scanned so that the head of scanned result is away from the operator Original Type Depending on the contents of the document select from the following options Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 121 5 Scan E mail lo enter the S ation Lighten Darken 2 Sided Originals Original Type File Format Sided C Srayscae C Muti page TIFF A EY Sided H to H Dre 8 Photo E lt XD Sided H to Sly Text Oro y Doe Phi JPEG Gray
266. il and can also receive scanned data in an e mail attachment sent from an Internet Fax compatible machine For more information refer to the Fax Internet Fax chapter Network Scanning Allows you to scan documents and store them as electronic documents on a file server on the network by selecting a job template which has various assigned parameters You can retrieve the stored electronic documents by accessing the file server from a PC For more information refer to Job Templates Network Scanning in the Scan E mail chapter on page 116 and Services in the CentreWare Internet Services chapter on page 157 Scan to Mailbox Enables the confidential mailbox or polling feature by storing the scanned documents to private mailboxes For more information refer to Save in Scan to Mailbox in the Scan E mail chapter on page 115 Scan to FTP SMB Allows you to scan and store documents to specified destinations using the FTP or SMB protocol For more information refer to Save in Scan to FTP SMB in the Scan E mail chapter on page 117 Check Mailbox Allows you to confirm print or delete the documents in a mailbox It also allows you to change or release linkage with a job flow sheet and execute the linked job flow sheets For more information refer to the Check Mailbox chapter Stored Programming Allows you to store programming for a job to a job number using the Stored Programming feature For more information refer to the Stored
267. ilbox is shared by all users When the Authentication feature is enabled this mailbox is shared by all Entered Users Only a Key Operator can change the settings To create a Key Operator Shared Mailbox operate the machine as a Key Operator Personal Mailbox This is a mailbox created by an Entered User using the Authentication feature Only the Entered User that created the mailbox can use it When the Authentication feature is not enabled this mailbox can only be operated by a Key Operator 292 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox The ways to operate mailboxes that can be used with the machine differ depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the operations available When the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled General Users Key Operators Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Generally Shared by Key Shared Operators Personal Shared Operators Personal Create O X X O X Display X O Delete O X X O O O Change Settings O X X O O O Display Document O O X O O O Delete Document O O X O O O Store Document O O X O O O Print Doc
268. in compliance with Council Directive 89 336 EEC Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 21 1 Before Using the Machine For FAX Function USA FAX Send Header Requirements The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including a FAX machine to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin atthe top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges In order to program this information into your machine refer to customer documentation and follow the steps provided Data Coupler Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the Telephone Company A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone networ
269. ing the optical image of the document to an electronic image The display on the control panel It provides user information and instructions A heading printed on the first line of received documents A walk up fax service which uses a third party fax server The short edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine first A condition of reduced power consumption while the machine is not performing a transaction Dialing characters which apply only to Xerox machines that support fax mailboxes Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A communications protocol an agreement governing the way data is transmitted commonly used for sending and receiving e mail A form of abbreviated dialing of a number by entering a 3 digit code To store a document in memory until it is retrieved by a remote fax machine A designated user who sets and maintains the network settings on the machine Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Tagged Image File Format The period between transmissions Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 353 18 Glossary Transmission Report A report that confirms the status of a fax document Transmit To send Toner Cartridge A customer replaceable cartridge which holds toner an electrically charged powder with pigment and plastic for ease of loading into a printer Uncollated Output programming where the specified number of copies for each page in a copy set is de
270. ings Setup Menu System Administrator Settings Login Setup Auditron Administration System Settings C Common Settings B Copy Mode Settings m Network Settings m Print Mode Settings m Scan Mode Settings m Fax Mode Settings ary a Mailbox Stored Application m Email iFax Settings m Document Settings m Communication Settings Common Settings D Machine Clock Timers E Audio Tones m Screen Defaults m Paper Tray Attributes m Auto Job Promotion DB Image Quality m Reports heii m Other Settings iagnostics Choose an item and select Change Settings Machine Clock Timers Items fin 2 Time 123 PM J 3 Time Zone GMT 9 00 4 Daylight Savings Adjust Off Change 5 Auto Clear 1 Minutes y Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 41 2 Product Overview Modes Use the buttons to access the screens which allow you to select features monitor the status of jobs and obtain general information on the machine There are four buttons on the machine All Services e Features e Job Status e Machine Status NOTE These buttons do not respond when the machine is in the System Settings mode e A n o Eee DOC cS lt All Services gt bi za OOO S amp S a SAAN _ button SAA lt Job Status gt du gt GoD button NO oS i ee ee lt Machine Status
271. ins information on the copy screens and the features available NOTE Some of the features described in this chapter are optional and may not apply to your machine configuration Copying Procedure This section describes the basic copy procedure Before making copies on the machine confirm what is to be copied and the number of copies required Follow the steps below 1 Load the Documents page 45 2 Select the Features page 47 3 Enter the Quantity page 48 4 Start the Copy Job page 48 5 Confirm the Copy Job in the Job Status page 48 Stop the Copy Job page 49 NOTE If the Authentication feature is enabled you may need an account number before using the machine To get an account number or for further information contact the Key Operator 1 Load the Documents Document input areas are as follows Document feeder for single or multiple documents Document glass for single documents or bound originals NOTE The document glass cover will be fitted in the non document feeder configuration NOTE The machine automatically detects standard document sizes The sizes that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the Key Operator For more information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 If the document is of a non standard size or not identified as a standard size the machine will prompt you to check the document
272. ion Stamp Position Sets the default for Position of Stamp in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Annotation Date Position Sets the default for Position of Date in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Annotation Page Number Style Sets the default for Style of Page Number in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Annotation Page Number Position Sets the default for Position of Page Number in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Copy Control Use this feature to implement operational control of the various copy features The Copy Control screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Copy Control on the Copy Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Copy Control 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch meme linia betwee n screens 2 MERA Stored Pages 999 3 Auto Paper Off Tray 1 J 3 P erfo rm the necessa ry 4 Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode Error Diffusion J operations 4 5 Original Type S Lightweight Originals Hide J y 4 Select Close Memory Full Procedure If the hard disk becomes full while reading documents a message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine a processing method to be performed after the message has been displayed for a specified period If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select R
273. ion enlargement ratio from 25 to 400 in 1 increments Other Settings Use this feature to configure or change other machine settings specific to the scan features 1 Select Other Settings on the Choose an item and select Change Settings Scan Mode Settings screen RT 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch pes Crent Salina between screens 2 Memory Full Procedure Cancel Job J 3 P rf th 3 Maximum Stored Pages 999 e arm e necessary 4_TIFF Format dE V6 J operations A 5 Image Transfer Screen Hide Message and Screen J Settings 4 Select Close Scan Service Specify whether to enable the scanner to function Memory Full Procedure If the hard disk becomes full while reading documents a message asking how to process the data read up to that point is displayed You can predefine a processing method to be performed after the message has been displayed for a specified period If you select Cancel Job the data will be discarded If you select Run Job the data read up to that point will be processed 228 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Mode Settings Maximum Stored Pages Specify the maximum number of pages to be stored in memory through scanning Select the number in the range from 1 to 999 TIFF Format Specify the type of the TIFF format to be used when TIFF is selected for saving scanned data Image Transfer Screen Specify how
274. is feature allows you to add comments to e mail text Information such as an authorized name and address the number of scanned pages the scanned size and IP Address and serial number of the machine is automatically generated by the system and also contained in the text This feature uses the same comment list as Cover Note NOTE This feature is not available for regular fax transmissions For adding comments on a regular fax refer to Cover Note on page 96 Memory 100 1 Select Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents on the Send Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry _ To iFax Comment Mail Contents Cancel Options screen os off 2 Perform the necessary QO m operations ge Off Disables the feature On Attaches the Internet Fax Comment When you select this option Comment 1 and Comment 2 are displayed at the right side of the screen You can specify the same comment in both screens Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 97 4 Fax Internet Fax Comment 1 Displays the Comment 1 screen to specify comments Comment 2 Displays the Comment 2 screen to specify comments Comment 1 Screen 1 Select On on the Internet Fax Ente recipient Use C button to cancel entry Com ment screen iFax Comment Mail Contents Comment 1 2 Select Comment 1 conma O ae 1 Report for Month oe urgent 3 Selec
275. is permitted in the Authentication feature settings of the Key Operator mode 3 You can perform display auto run and manual run operations for job flow sheets linked to a mailbox Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 295 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them except for changing copying them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled Linking Job Flow Sheets to Mailboxes The ways to link job flow sheets to mailboxes differ depending on whether the Authentication feature is enabled The following explains the relationships available When the Authentication feature is not enabled When the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them except for changing copying them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled When the Authentication Feature is Not Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is not enabled General Users Key Operators Mailbox Operations Generall
276. isk 016 776 An error occurred during image conversion processing Check the data in CentreWare Internet Services 016 777 An error occurred on the disk during image processing probably due to a disk malfunction For details on replacing the hard disk contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 778 Conversion of the scanned image was discontinued due to insufficient disk space Delete unnecessary data from the disk 016 779 An error occurred during conversion processing of the scan image Instruct scanning again 016 780 An error occurred on the disk during conversion processing of the scanned image probably due to a disk malfunction For details on replacing the hard disk contact the Xerox Welcome Center 016 781 Could not connect to the server during file forwarding by CentreWare Scan Services Ask the System Administrator to check the network and server 016 782 Could not connect to the server for CentreWare Scan Services Verify that the correct log in user name password and other information are entered 016 783 Could not find the specified server path during file forwarding by CentreWare Scan Services Check the path name of the server currently set to the job template 016 784 A write to server error occurred during file forwarding by CentreWare Scan Services Confirm that there is sufficient space in the directory on the server and that access rights are present 016 78
277. isplays the Copy Output Screen Copy Output Screen Allows you to select the sorting method for your output and specify the output tray 1 Select More for Copy Output feature on the Basic Copying Ready to Copy Cancel Joo save Copy Output screen Staple Position E None Two Staples 2 Select the required option Or O Ei plo O oe i 3 Select Save i a O Two Staples O Two Staples Left Right Collation Output Destination Ea Center Output C colata Tray C uncoated O Finisher Tray Staple Position Select one of the five options displayed to specify the staple position Collation Auto Automatically applies sorting methods for copy output Refer to the Auto option explained previously e Collated Delivers the specified number of copy sets in the same order as the documents For example two copies of a three page document are delivered in the order 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 55 3 Copy e Uncollated Delivers the copies in stacks based on the number of copies required for each document For example two copies of a three page document are delivered in the order 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 Output
278. ission followed by the remote machine s mailbox number in which the document to be polled to your machine is stored Password if required the password for the remote machine s mailbox The confidential document received by the machine is stored in a confidential mailbox The machine can be set up to automatically print out a Mailbox Documents Report to show the number and name of the mailbox in which the document is stored To receive a confidential document using F Code the other party must know the following information F Code 0 to designate an F Code transmission followed by the mailbox number on your machine Password if required the password for the mailbox NOTE To retrieve a document from a remote machine the polling feature must be enabled For more information refer to Polling on page 103 NOTE This feature is not displayed for Internet Fax transmissions However you can use the same feature by specifying an F Code directly in the Internet Fax destination address Memory 100 1 Select F Code on the Send Options screen Use the Numeric Keypad to enter the F Code Cancel 2 Perform the necessary ee operations Qo gt 3 Select Save Password Off Disables the feature On Sets the F Code transmission F Code and Password are displayed at the right side of the screen F Code You can enter an F Code composed of spaces numbers 0 9 and symbols up to 20 char
279. ith a job flow sheet if any linkage has been already made Create Change Link Allows you to select a job flow sheet to be linked with the mailbox For the displayed Sheet Filtering Create and Edit Delete buttons refer to Job Flow Sheets on page 247 NOTE The Auto Start check box and the Start also appear on the Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox screen when the mailbox has been linked with any job flow sheet Checking the Auto Start check box causes the linked job flow sheet to be automatically executed when a new document is saved in the mailbox Selecting Start causes the execution of the linked job flow sheet to be started Job Flow Sheets A job flow sheet defines how scanned documents or documents in the mailboxes are to be processed Job flow sheets are categorized by the following created outside and stored on the machine created and stored on the machine and created on the machine and stored on an external server Use this feature to create or modify a job flow sheet You can program job flow sheets with the following processing To fax documents To send documents using the Internet Fax service To send documents as e mail To send documents through the FTP protocols To send documents through the SMB protocols To print out documents NOTE In case of forwarding a document faxed or stored in the mailbox by E mail FTP or SMB it cannot be opened by the recipient if the File Format of the job f
280. itiating relay broadcast station when the machine is used as a relay broadcast station NOTE Before using the Relay Broadcast feature enter the Address Numbers for initiating stations regardless of the initiating method from the stations Off Communication Mode Select a communication mode from either G3 Auto F4800 and G4 Auto G3 Auto Resolution Select a resolution level to be used for transmission from among Panel Standard Fine Superfine 400dpi and Superfine 600dpi With Panel selected the resolution level selected on the control panel is used Panel Cover Note Specify whether or not to attach a Cover Note If you select On then select a comment for a recipient and or a sender NOTE Unless registered beforehand comments cannot be selected For information on how to register comments refer to Comments on page 256 Off Maximum Image Size Select the maximum image size depending on recipients paper size from among A3 B4 and A4 or among 8 5 x 11 B4 and 11 x 17 depending on the country 11x17 Delayed Start Select whether or not to specify the transmission start time If you select On then specify the start time Off Remote Mailbox Specify whether or not to send as confidential fax documents If you select On then enter the recipient s mailbox number 3 digits and password 4 digits Off
281. ity for Port9100 interface within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Other Settings Use this feature to specify a printable area and replacement method when paper runs short 1 Select Other Settings on the Print Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Other Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch meme oie eae between screens 2 Substitute Tray Display Message 3 Paper Type Mismatch Display Confirmation Screen 3 Perform the necessary 4 Unregistered Form Handling Print Chan operations 5 Banner Sheet Off y 4 Select Close Print Area Sets the printable area to Normal or Extended If you select Normal the printable area excludes a margin 4 1 mm 0 16 inches wide along all four edges of the paper If you select Extended the printable area is extended to leave about 2 mm 0 08 inches of margin along the edges Substitute Tray Sets the substitute tray when the machine cannot detect the paper tray corresponding to the document size with the auto paper selection Display Message A message requesting paper supply is displayed without switching paper trays Use Larger Size Switches to the tray loaded with the next larger size of paper and print
282. k must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C using the compliant telephone line cord with modular plugs provided with the installation kit See installation instructions for details The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local Telephone Company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label If this Xerox equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the Tele
283. lates screen Click Next or Previous to view the next or previous page First and Last buttons are also available to skip to the beginning and the last pages of the list respectively If you apply any template to a scan job retrieve the job template first on the machine To create or change job templates from this screen follow the steps below 1 Click the Services tab on the Header Panel of the CentreWare Internet Services home page 2 Select Job Templates 3 Click Display Job Template Screen 4 The Job Template page with the list of device templates is displayed 5 Select Template File Repository Setup or General Settings on the right hand corner of the Job Template page as required 6 Perform the necessary operations 7 Click OK This page allows you to view the saved job templates create a new template change an existing template and copy or delete a template 152 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Services Create New To create a new template click Create New at the top right corner of the Template page A user ID and password are required After editing click OK The template is then saved You can view the saved templates by clicking List NOTE When creating a new template using the same job template name on different templates is not allowed An error message will be displayed if the same template name is used The following table s
284. lbox number of the document list Document Number Displays the document numbers Document Name Displays the document name Stored Date Displays the date and time of the document when it was stored in the mailbox Compression Format Displays the compression format of the document Pages Displays the number of pages in the document Type Displays the type of job of the document Retrieve Allows you to specify the retrieval method of the scanned document or the Internet Fax document in the mailbox e Retrieve Page Specify whether to retrieve a specific page of the document Page Number Specify the page number to be retrieved Print Document Allows you to specify the printing method of the faxed document in the mailbox e Paper Tray Specify the paper tray e Quantity Specify the number of printouts Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 163 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Mailbox Mailbox Settings Allows you to configure the detailed settings as follows Mailbox Number Displays the mailbox number This is a display only item Mailbox Name Enter the name of the mailbox Password Enter the mailbox password Check Password Allows you to select whether and when a password for the mailbox is required Owner Displays the owner of the mailbox Linked Job Flow Sheet Display th
285. livered in the order the documents were placed in the Document Feeder Example Two copies of a three page document would output as page1 copy1 page1 copy2 page2 copy1 page2 copy2 page3 copy1 page3 copy2 354 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 Index Numerics 2 Sided Book COPY cocccccocccccccccnancncnnnonannnncnrnannnnna 60 2 Sided COPY seriar redi aeie Ar er ELE Ei 53 2 Sided Originals Fax Internet Fax aeea 88 2 Sided Originals Scan E mail e 120 2 Sided Printing oireeni ee 233 2 Sided Report coccococcocccccccccnncccncnnnnn non nnnnconnnnnnns 199 HAB s dete hata nhs at Re 71 2 Up On Receipt ccoocococcccccccccccccocnncnnonnnnconccnnnnnn 233 A Accessing CentreWare Internet Services 150 Activity Report ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 198 280 Address Book CentreWare Internet Services 162 Fax Internet Fax coooococcoccccccccccnccnconannnncnncnnnnn 82 i L selestatit es steed 281 Scan to FTP SMB oocooccccccccccnccoccnncnnnnnnnnnnoos 118 Scan E mail asa naa 111 Setup Menu cooccccnccncnanonaononcnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnns 250 Address Search Directory Service E mail Internet Fax settings 2 0 cere 239 Alert TONG hit td ie 193 All Services cocoa id tai ee 42 All Services button oooooccocccccccccccccccnnonnnncnnccnnnnnn 42 Allocate Memory Print Mode Settings 221 Annotation COPY E NE O E dd 73 Stamp Density coooninnccccnnn
286. low sheet is set to JPEG Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 247 11 Setups 1 Select Job Flow Sheets on the Setup Menu screen r Name Taste vr eet Filterin 2 Perform the necessary ee z hest Perini Forward to customer info 2004 1125 B98 PM Tp Filtering operations Cal Fax to Accounting 023 ePm CS FTP to Legal 2004 1 23 ___631 PM 3 Select Close i Cal Print web orders 2004 23 628 PM Al Forward to QA 2004 1 23 627 PM ly pau Deete Sheet Filtering Displays the Sheet Filtering screen Create Displays the Create New Job Flow Sheet screen Edit Delete Displays the Show Details screen e Delete Deletes the selected job flow sheet e Copy Allows you to create a new job flow sheet by copying and modifying the selected job flow sheet Edit Allows you to modify the selected job flow sheet NOTE The contents of this option are the same as Show Details on the Select Job Flow Sheet screen of a mailbox Sheet Filtering Screen Use this feature to restrict job flow sheets to be displayed on the screen 1 Select Sheet Filtering on the Job Flow Sheets screen Th Sheet Filtering Cancel Shared Personal Sheets Target Document 2 Select the required option ver O Administrator Documents QO Personal Sheets Scanned Documents 3 Select Save z O Shared Sheets O Mailbox
287. lso contains troubleshooting steps to help resolve problems Refer to the information contained in this chapter to resolve any troubleshooting issues Fault Clearance Procedure If a fault or problem occurs there are several ways in which you can identify the type of fault Once a fault or problem is identified establish the probable cause and then apply the appropriate solution e Ifa fault occurs first refer to the screen messages and animated graphics and clear the fault in the order specified Ifthe problem is not solved by following the screen messages and graphics refer to Troubleshooting Tables on page 325 and apply the appropriate solution as described e Also refer to the fault codes displayed on the touch screen in the Machine Status mode Refer to Fault Codes on page 329 for an explanation of some of the fault codes and corresponding corrective actions e Alternatively contact the Key Operator for assistance In some cases it may be necessary to switch the machine off and then on Refer to Power On Off in the Product Overview chapter on page 38 CAUTION Failure to leave at least 20 seconds between a power off and a power on can result in damage to the additional hard disk of the machine Ifthe problem persists or a message indicates that you should call for service refer to Xerox Welcome Center on page 339 NOTE If fax jobs are queued in the machine not equipped with the hard disk and a loss of power
288. ly interrupts a job for programming a priority job 7 lt Stop gt Suspends or cancels a job depending on the job type When multiple jobs are being processed all the jobs will be suspended or cancelled Selecting Stop on the Job Status screen stops only the selected job 8 lt Start gt Starts or resumes a job 9 lt Speed Dial gt Enters speed dial codes 10 lt C gt Deletes a numeric value or the last digit entered and replaces the current value with a default value Also cancels suspended jobs 11 lt Dial Pause gt Inserts a pause while dialing a fax number Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 35 2 Product Overview Button Function 12 lt asterisk gt password Indicates the special character used in a fax number and designates a group code Also allows you to specify an F Code or a 13 lt All Services gt Displays the All Services screen for selection of all the available services on the machine Button names and icons used on the control panel may differ depending on the country of purchase Services and Features The machine has various features and provides valuable services The following description outlines the features and explains the options on the lt All Services gt screen NOTE The arrangement of icons for the services and features displayed on the screen can be changed by the Key Operato
289. ly populated via CentreWare Internet Services Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 239 11 Setups Primary Server Port Number Specify the port number of the primary directory server Secondary Server Specify the secondary directory server After selecting whether to use an IP address or a server name enter an IP address or a server name If a server name is used ensure that DNS information is properly populated via CentreWare Internet Services Secondary Server Port Number Specify the port number of the secondary directory server Login Name Specify a login name for accessing the directory server s up to 256 characters Password Specify a password for accessing the directory server s up to 32 characters Search Root Entry DN Distinguished Name Specify a search start point up to 256 characters Scope of Search from Root Entry Specify how far searching is to be performed relative to the specified start point Options are e Root Entry only One level below Root Entry e All levels below Root Entry Object Class of Search Target Specify an object class for searching up to 32 characters This field acts as a Wild card If one enters a string of characters for search criteria then all names that contain that string will be returned Server Application Specify the software used by the directory server s Options are e Windows2000 Server Active Directory ExchangeServer 2000 Acti
290. m Add Port No Enter the port number TBCP Filter Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Administrator Mode Allows you to enable or disable the Administrator Mode DNS Allows you to configure whether to enable disable DNS Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 173 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Protocol Settings Port9100 Allows you to configure the time out settings for the Port9100 Port Number Enter a value for the port number between 8000 and 9999 TBCP Filter Only displayed when PostScript is enabled Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the connection time out period when transmission fails E mail Allows you to configure the e mail and Internet Fax settings as follows Receiving Protocol Allows you to select the receiving protocol for the job Print Mail Headers and Contents Allows you to select the print e mail headers and contents option Print Internet Fax Headers and Contents Allows you to select the print Internet Fax headers and contents option Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail Allows you to enable or disable printing delivery confirmation e mail and printing undelivered mail Auto Print Error Mail Allows you to specify whether to print the error e mail
291. menu displayed when Black is selected for Output Color DMF Document Management Field Field Name Enter the name of the DMF data Enable User Editing Select whether to allow users to modify the values in the field Field Label Enter the label for the field displayed on the touch screen Default Value Enter the actual data assigned to a particular field Edit To change an existing template click Edit on the right of the template requiring changes After changing click OK to save the template You can view the saved templates by clicking List Copy To copy a template click Copy on the right of the template that requires copying Then enter a name for the copy and click Next then click OK To cancel the copy click Cancel Delete To delete a template click Delete on the right of the template requiring deletion A confirmation message displays to confirm the delete selection If you click OK the template will be deleted To cancel the deletion click Cancel NOTE Only one template can be deleted at a time Apply Use to transmit to the machine new settings made using Internet Services The previous device settings will be replaced with the new settings If a configuration error occurs in one setting the settings before the error setting appear on the screen The settings after the error setting will remain unchanged Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133
292. ministration Guide Some of the CentreWare Internet Services features will have restricted access Contact the System Administrator for further assistance NOTE This feature is not available on a machine in which the direct printing feature is not configured Target Computers The Operating System OS and web browsers that can be used for CentreWare Internet Services are as follows OS Web Browsers Windows 98SE Internet Explorer 5 5 SP2 6 0 SP1 Windows Me Netscape 7 Windows NT4 0 NOTE Activating two or more browsers could produce unexpected results Windows 2000 Internet Explorer 5 5 SP2 6 0 SP1 Netscape 7 1 Windows XP Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 Netscape 7 1 Windows Server 2003 Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 Netscape 7 1 Mac OS 8 x 9 x Internet Explorer 5 1 Netscape 7 02 Mac OS X 10 2 6 Internet Explorer 5 2 Netscape 7 02 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 149 9 CentreWare Internet Services Accessing CentreWare Internet Services Follow the steps below to access CentreWare Internet Services 1 Ata client workstation on the network launch an internet browser 2 In the URL field enter http followed by the internet address of the machine Then press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard Example If the internet address is vvv xxx yyy zzz enter the following in the URL field http vvv xxXX yyy ZzZZ If the port number is
293. mples Remote Mailbox Sends a document to a mailbox on a remote machine Telephone number of Mailbox number of HAN Mailbox password WHS remote machine remote machine e Polling Retrieves a document stored in a mailbox on a remote machine Telephone number of Mailbox number of EN Mailbox password WHS remote machine remote machine Relay Broadcast Sends a document to a relay station which in turn sends it to multiple destinations Telephone number of remote machine PSA Relay Send Speed dial code Speed dial code Number RSN for first for second of relay station destination destination e Remote Relay Broadcast Sends a document via multiple relay stations The last station broadcasts the document to the specified destinations Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Features Fax Internet Fax Telephone t Relay Send Speed dial Speed dial Speed dial number of Number code for code for first code for remote RSN of secondary destination second machine primary relay relay station destination station Basic Features Fax Internet Fax Use the Basic Features screen to select the basic features for a fax Internet Fax job For information on the features available refer to the following Next Recip
294. mps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75 or more than 150 of the linear dimensions of the original 28 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Illegal Copies 0 10 Postal Money Orders Bills Checks or Draft of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States Stamps and other representatives of value of whatever denomination which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government Bank or Corporation Copyrighted materials unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the fair use or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office Library of Congress Washington D C 20559 Ask for Circular R21 Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed Passports Foreign Passports may be photographed Immigration Papers Draft Registration Cards Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the following Registrant s information Earnings or Income Dependency Status Court Record Previous military service Physical or mental condition Exception United States military discharge certifi
295. n Allows you to select a paper tray from up to five preset trays including the bypass tray 1 Select More for the Paper Supply feature on the Basic Copying screen dla Auto 8 Plain 2 Select the required option i ai q p Eh e 3 Select Save bevel DR Qi Plain Ready to Copy Paper Supply Auto Refer to the Auto option explained previously Presets Allows you to select a paper tray from up to four presets Bypass Displays the Tray 5 Bypass screen Tray 5 Bypass Screen You can temporarily use the bypass tray to load paper that is unavailable from the preprogrammed trays Up to a 10 mm or 0 4 inch stack of paper approximately 95 sheets of 80 g m paper can be loaded into the bypass tray Follow the steps below to make full use of the bypass tray 1 Select Bypass Tray on the Paper Supply screen Ready to Copy a Tray 5 Bypass cance 2 Select the required option Paper Size a Auto Size Detect 3 Select Save o feed ooo o Standard Size Plain Side 2 Transparency ox Lightweight y Paper Size Auto Size Detect Automatically senses the paper size fed from the bypass tray Standard Size Displays the preset paper sizes on the touch screen and allows you to select the paper size from the displayed paper size The preset paper size is set up by Key Operator e Non standard Size Allows you to specify the width and l
296. n Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching in the Paper and Other Media chapter on page 184 Tray 5 Bypass Paper Size Defaults Assign paper sizes to the 11 buttons that are listed in Standard Size for Tray 5 AIB Series Select from paper sizes in A and B series formats Inch Size Select from paper sizes presented in inches Others Select from other sizes such as postcards and envelopes Variable Size Specify the height and width of paper using the scroll buttons Auto Tray Switching Specify this option to enable Auto Tray Switching For more information on Auto Tray Switching refer to Auto Tray Switching in the Paper and Other Media chapter on page 184 Enable during Auto Paper Enables Auto Tray Switching only when Auto is selected for Paper Supply Always Enable Enables Auto Tray Switching no matter which option is selected for Paper Supply 196 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Auto Job Promotion Use this feature to specify whether to automatically promote a job ahead of the jobs that cannot be processed such as due to an empty paper tray 1 Select Auto Job Promotion on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Auto Job Promotion 2 Select the required option a elk 3 Select Close 1 Auto Job Promotion Change Settings Auto Job Promotion Select whether to enable the feat
297. n o a Zol 2al Z2 2 22 Sa T z2 2 a2 22 6 o o AD 30 o Uo o AD 30 D o o oO RO o o o o RO o A5 SEF 148 0 210 0 O O O O A5 LEF 210 0 148 0 5 5 x 8 5 LEF 215 9 139 7 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 139 7 215 9 O B5 SEF 182 0 257 0 O O O O O B5 LEF 257 0 182 0 O O O O O O A4 SEF 210 0 297 0 O O O O O A4 LEF 297 0 210 0 O O O O O O O O O O 202 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Tray 1 4 except for TTM Tray 3 4 TTM i a _ 2 A _ 2 gt Size Width Length 53 5 25 20 32 00 5 25 x5 8 mm mm xol al Zol Sal al xa o Sa Sal o z2 2 0 9 20 0 98 0 0 A a N xa 3 Qa 2 2 xa 3 0 Ad 20 o 0 o Ad a0 n N n Oo n n N n Oo an 8 5 x 11 SEF 215 9 279 4 O O O O O Letter 8 5 x 11 LEF 279 4 215 9 O O O O O O O O O O Letter 8 5 x 13 SEF 215 9 330 2 O O O O O Legal 8 5 x 14 SEF 215 9 355 6 O O O O O Legal B4 SEF 257 0 364 0 O O O O O 16K SEF 194 0 267 0 16K LEF 267 0 194 0 O O 8K SEF 267 0 388 0 O O O O O A3 SEF 297 0 420 0 O O O O O 11 x 17 SEF 279 4 431 8 O O O O O 7 25 x 10 5 SEF 184 2 266 7 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 LEF 266 7 184 2 O O O O Executive C4 Envelope SEF 229 0 324 0 C5 Envelope LEF 229 0 162 0 C5 Envelope SEF 162 0 229 0 Commercial 10 241 3 104 8 Envelope LEF DL Envel
298. n the Login Setup Auditron Administration screen Login Setup Auditron Mode Password Off Local Machine off Access O Network Access ps 2 Select the required option If you select Local Machine Access Login Setup Auditron Mode or Network Access the Auditron Qo Password Mode and Mailbox Access buttons ab E Mitron tae O arg d ispl ayed O Sn m Mailbox Access 3 Perform the necessary Dr acs operations 4 Select Save NOTE Select Network Access to configure the authentication settings for services requested through a network Off Disables the authentication feature Local Machine Access Enables the authentication feature User registration can be performed using the touch screen or the PC application If authentication is enabled all corresponding services need to be authenticated You can respectively turn off the authentication as required Network Access Enables the authentication feature User registration can be performed using the external server Auditron Mode Displays the Auditron Mode screen On this screen you can specify whether to perform authentication for copy fax scan or print services NOTE If you enable any of the services listed the User Login screen is displayed when you press the lt Log In Out gt button on the control panel Mailbox Access Displays the Mailbox Access screen On this screen you can specify whether to perform au
299. n the machine begins with The template created with the CentreWare Scan Services carries the name you specified For information on the CentreWare Scan Services refer to the CentreWare Scan Services Manual Job template list Select a job template to be used Go to Specify the start number of a job template from which job templates are to be displayed Template Description Allows you to view the description on the required job template Refresh Updates the list of available job templates 1 Press the lt All Services gt button ress Out button and enter User Details did ai on the control panel 2 Select Network Scanning on 001_ PDFSO00dpi Jlooz_Tiff 2sided E the touch screen 3 Select the job template to be used Dd 4 Press the lt Start gt button on the control panel Go to 001 500 gt UN Template Description 116 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Save in Scan to FTP SMB Save in Scan to FTP SMB This section describes how to send scanned documents to specified destinations using FTP or SMB protocols For more information refer to the following Transfer Protocol page 117 Address Book page 118 Server Specify the address of the destination server Select a server name from the address book after selecting Address Book or enter a server s address after selecting Keyboard NOTE If a server name is us
300. nccconnnnnnnnnnnnnncnannns 209 Stamp S ZE iiini ieri 209 Application Communication Settings 244 Audio Tones Common Settings 193 Auditron Administration oooonnininnnnnonccnncnccnnnnn 298 features and services e eceeeeeeeeeees 298 OVEFV EW oo eecceccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaceeeeeeeeeeteees 298 Auditron Settings CentreWare Internet Services 05 168 Authentication ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 285 job flow sheet and mailbox 288 O aeaiiai aaia aane eani 285 PES tai tati e dando 286 authentication document storage cancellation on failure 270 Authentication and Auditron Administration ccccccooonncnnccccooronencnnnonono 285 298 Authentication System s es 219 AOLE AAT 192 Auto Clear Alert Tone cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Auto Exposure CODY diiran aa E AE 58 Scan E mail coocooccnnnnnccnnnnconcnononcncncnnnnnnnnnns 124 Auto Job Promotion COMMON 05 197 Auto Job Release ooocooccccccccccoconccoccncncncccncnnnnns 192 Auto Paper Off einna aa eea t tiitddds 209 Auto Power Saver eceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 192 AUO Pinta aaea a dea ete 192 Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail 242 Auto Print Error Mail cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Auto Reduce on Receipt cocoocococcccccccccccccncncnnnns 232 Auto otait cst act ante ci n 135 Auto
301. nce the government of a state other than Canada or a department board Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada 7 Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada 8 Documents registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof 9 Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance but it is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your solicitor Other Countries Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty of making such reproductions e Currency notes Bank notes and cheques Bank and government bonds and securities e Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner e Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt contact your legal counsel Product Recycling and Dis
302. ncncnnnnnononononencncnnnnnonnnonencnnnnennnnns 197 limage QUAY errata adiccion tase datan oda 197 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents O tag EEEE 198 Maintenance DiagnostiCS cocconnonnnncocnnonccononcnnnnncnnnnnnnnanan nn ccnnnnnnns 199 Other Settings A ncn ranlaleadedadyedershtisetape tart tee meee 200 Copy Mode Settings 4 coos kano Sac ce te cacvectadaninct bedehdacshtcotedctedsostcretentvareet 205 Basic COPYING Tab atras cds 205 Copy Detalla drstansnt in atlante 206 COPY CONTO duarte e bs 208 Original Size DefalllS vita bs 210 Reduce Enlarge Presets ccnerceesescesecceeeeeeeteeserneceeeeeeeeseeees 210 Network Settings iso 212 Port Settings cocoa teens ii oi 212 Protocol SEtINOS icono iaa die di 215 Machine E mail Address Host NaM ooooocccccccccococoncccncccnnnnanancnnnnnnno 216 POPS Server SCUINGS ld reed 217 SMTP Server SUIS rara 218 DOMAIN Flo De a 219 Remote Authentication Server SettidQS ooooooccccnnnnnnnccccocccccccnnnnnos 219 Other Send 220 Print Mode Se Mins csi ici darte ri td 220 Allocate MeMO ci td circa 221 Other Settings Jive cscs cis ias io ees Sieh ance eee eee 223 Scan Mode Settings oooooococcccccconccnccnncnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnononnnnnnninnss 224 Scan Detalla 225 Scan to FTP SMB Defaults ecccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesenneeneeeeees 226 Can Size Defaults ocio dcir cit is dada 226 Output Size D
303. ncnnncnanannns 309 Inserting the New Toner Cartridg oooococccocccccnnncccconccocanccnnncnnnnnnns 310 Loading Staples aca id 310 16 Problem Solving iiusiiracidanicnra oia a ia ti 315 Fault Clearance Procedure 2 sc ccccceeceeeeseeeecteceeeseeeessenseeeeeneeetentens 315 A A O 316 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 11 Table of Contents 17 18 19 Paper Jams in Cover A oocccccncncccononnncnnnnnnnnnonnnnocnnnnnnnnononononinnnnenenonnns 318 Paper Jams in Cover B occcccccnnccoconnncnnoncnnnccnnoconononononononononinennnnononnns 319 Paper Jams in Cove Cicas isbn 320 Paper Jams in Cover E oocccccnnnncnononcncnnnncnnnnnnnoconononennnnnonononinennnneninons 320 Paper Jams in Trays 1 2 and 3 4 Optional oooooooncccnnnnnnnncccccc o 321 Paper Jams in the Tandem Tray Module Optional 321 Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass ccccccccnnnoconcconicononannanncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 322 Paper Jams in the Duplex Module Cover D Optional 322 Paper Jams in the Finisher Optional eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneaes 323 DOCUMENT JAMS e a a e a eae aaea a e a a Taanit 324 Troubleshooting Tables mtocooooiiii ici 325 Fault COGS A es 329 Screen MESA cc da 338 O tp t ANY ate arts ccnss Oia 339 Xerox Welcome Center cccccccceccceccceccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 339 SPeCifi Cations seirian aiina aea cede aneda aa aha daaa aci
304. ne frequently used document sizes you can set the size of the original quickly and easily The Scan Size Defaults screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Scan Size Defaults on the Fax Mode Settings screen 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close Scan Size Defaults Items Current Settings a 2 Scan Size 2 AJO 3 Scan Size 3 Asa 4 Scan Size 4 Asa Change EET za Y Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 235 11 Setups Scan Size 1 11 Allows you to assign your choice of document sizes to each of the 11 buttons AIB Series Size Displays the 10 standard document size in A or B series Inch Size Displays the 12 document size in inches Others Allows you to select the size from other settings such as 5 x 7 inches Portrait Landscape 3 5 x 5 inches Portrait Landscape and Postcard You can use the Next Page button to switch between screens Local Terminal Information Use this feature to register or change the local terminal information The Local Terminal Information screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Local Terminal Information on the Fax Mode Choose an item and select Change Settings A Local Terminal Information Settings screen items Current Settings 1 Local Name Xerox 2 Use the scroll buttons to
305. network Association of Japan The F Code standard is based on Recommendation T 30 defined by ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector ITU T and allows communication with remote machines that support the same standard regardless of their manufacturers You must know the F Code and the password if one is set up of the remote machine before sending or retrieving a document If you are retrieving a document from a remote machine the machine holding the document must know the F Code preceded with 0 to indicate the confidential fax transmission and the password of your machine as well e Confidential sending using F Code You can send a confidential fax document using F Code if a confidential mailbox is set up in the remote machine You must know the remote machine s F Code and password if set up before sending the document 100 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Send Options Fax Internet Fax Example F Code 0 to designate an F Code transmission followed by the mailbox number Password if required the password for the mailbox e Confidential polling using F Code You can send a polling request to receive a document from a remote machine using F Code if a confidential mailbox is set up in the remote machine to hold the document to be polled When polling to receive a document from a remote machine you must know the following information F Code 0 to designate an F Code transm
306. ng documents to specified destinations through the FTP or SMB protocol 1 Select Scan to FTP SMB Defaults on the Scan Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Scan to FTP SMB Defaults Items Current Settings 1 Transfer Protocol 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close Transfer Protocol Specify the default transfer protocol Scan Size Defaults Use this feature to configure or change the scan size buttons on the Scan Size screen displayed under the Scan Options tab 226 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Mode Settings 1 Select Scan Size Defaults on the Scan Mode Settings Choose an item and select Scan Size Defaults screen Items Current Settings ABO 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch gamers MA between screens Gsus A 4 Scan Size 4 A5O 3 Perform the necessary EEES aS Y La operations 4 Select Close AIB Series Size Select from paper sizes in A and B series formats Inch Size Select from paper sizes presented in inches Others Select from other various sizes such as postcards and envelopes Variable Size Specify the height and width using the scroll buttons Output Size Defaults Use this feature to configure or change the output size buttons displayed when Auto is selected on the Reduce Enlarge screen under the Scan
307. nine 325 procedures COPYING airea a E and 45 fault clearance cooocicocccoconococcnnccnnnnnannnnnnnnns 315 Fax Internet Fax cooocococcccoococccnccoccnnccnncnncnnnnnns 78 SCA ici 107 System SettidQS ia a aai 189 product OVE NIESW os eseina ien td Ea aE 33 recycling and disposal seeen 30 product safety certification 00 eects 21 Properties CentreWare Internet Services 00006 160 Properties Features CentreWare Internet Services 0006 161 Protocol Settings CentreWare Internet Services 170 Network Settings n 215 PS Logical Printer List esseci ar 281 Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode 209 233 Public MallboX sico ienai tiki cectbeadacsectialaaa de 104 Public Mailbox Stored Documents 273 R radio frequency EMISSIONS 20 Read Receipts MDN esceeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeneaes 242 Read Status MDN Scan E mail 129 Receive E mail ccecceseceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 215 Receiving Buffer EthertalK cito a 222 IPP SPOOL acc ccoo at tada 222 LPD SpOOl iia ina 221 Netware cooococcoccccccccccccncccncnnnnno cnn nncnnnnnnnnnnnns 222 Parallel enren ee diia 221 POOTO coincide 223 SMB SPOOL vicodin data 222 USB iii ae 221 Recipient on Activity Report cee 199 Recipient Print Sets Fax Internet Fax 99 CNA 44 recycling drum cartridge ooooonoocccccnnnocccccccnncncnnninnna
308. nnanccncnanana 191 Default Language ooooccccccoconccccccononcccnnnnannncncnannns 195 Default Print Paper Size 0oooooococcnnccicccccccccconcnnoos 200 Default User ID and Password CentreWare Internet Services cere 160 Delayed Print oooocccccncccconoonocncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 141 272 Delete All Data cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 199 Delete Change Print Documents 08 244 Delete Print ia ai aaa ieee 272 Delete Sample Print Documents 005 244 356 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 Index Delete Secure Print Documents 0oncccconnnncccccnnn 244 Delivery Confirmation Method l 237 Detailed Settings Scan to FTP SMB 118 Dial Pause Dutton rarei raa T A 35 Direct Printing siansa aae aE Ea REAREA 141 discarding douments after expiry date eee 244 display interface Interface Options CentreWare Internet Services cere 150 disposing O product esceceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Doc for Polling Auto Delete cere 232 Document Feeder ccccecceeecesseeeeeeeanees 33 46 document feeder MAINTAINING raa A 306 document feeder and output trays ee 306 Document GIASS cccoconocncccnccccncononcconocononananon 33 46 document glass MAINTAINING eaa r ETRS 306 document glass and constant velocity transport QlaSS oiei arenira Enn 306 document JAMS asieran EET 324 Document
309. nnnnn rra rra 47 3 Emter the Quanity sc ui iaa 48 A SLAM the COPY Joc aii 48 5 Confirm the Copy Job in the Job Status eee 48 Stop the Copy JOD RE EE E E EAST 49 Basic COPYING EE E 49 Reduce Endara 50 Paper SUPP Vcr EE E EEEE 51 o PELETE AEE AA ET T 53 Copy Oulpubsuc A ante ASE 54 Image Quality Copy wes ee A ER ee eee hers 56 ORIG IRA Ty PO hin ce eeerer ts TET E nee eee tech TT 56 Come Darke senti dodo crisi aiaa 57 Shar pne SSe tiei i A A eaveceeisPhdvexs 57 Auto EXPOSUTO noti A A 58 Scan Options COPY ii or 58 Bo nd ONGS E 59 2 Sided BOOK COPY a 60 Original SZE sii a 60 Mixed Size Oiga St tad edi 61 BOrdeh ES die 61 A A ston 62 Image AA a aa EAEE aaa 64 Mirror Image Negative Image ocomoooocococcnnanccnanccnrernnnanancnncnnans 65 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents Original Orientation eneee Output Format COPY oocccoccconcccccnnncnnccnnccnnncnnnonnnonnnoninoss Booklet Creation oooccccccccccnnccnncconnninnninnninnninininnnns OVENS ET EET Transparency Separators ooooooccccccccccccccconccinnninnno M ltiple U Preerias eee anaitt a Postea e a a a ai Repeat Image irene stands bocce ies Annotation iia A JOD Assembly ccocoococio sico irrita Build JD mania 4 FaxInternetF Aunado Country Code for Fax Option coccccccccccccnccnncnnncnnnnno Fax Internet Fax ProCedure cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
310. nnnnnos 72 replacing drum Cartridge areenaa AE 306 toner Cartridge o ieesie ninine a ran a 309 Reports Common Settings 0 0 0 eee 198 Reset User Accounts Auditron Administration 260 Resolution Fax Internet Fax eeen 89 FESOUICES cenit 16 Response to Read Receipts MDN 242 retrieving fax from remote machines 103 RFID regulatory information ooooonccnnnnnnnnocicncnnnnnns 24 RINGING YOMEN E 194 Rotate 90 degrees cnnincccccccncccconcccnonanancnanonnnn ns 232 S safety consumables cooocooccccccnococcnccnnnoncnnno nana nanancnnnnns 20 CISCHICAL A A 18 a unica ida 18 MAINTENANCE 0 eect eeeeeetteeeeeeeetateeeeeeeaas 20 Operational cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 19 OZONG a rl ates dl 20 product safety certification 0 0 0 21 radio frequency emissions eeeeeee 20 Safety notes oo cceeecececeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeteeeenes 16 Salltatio iii 214 Sample PriNt iessen iiae 141 Sample Print Stored Documents 055 272 Save in Scan to FTP SMB aa eirian E T R 117 Scan to MailDOX eiai a 115 Scan Basic SCANNING serorea nr an 119 Scan Defaults Scan Mode settings 225 Scan Mode Settings ooooonniccccnnnnnncccconnnncancccnnns 281 Scan Mode settings 224 Scan Options COPY cooccoccccococccccccccccnccnanananonnnnnnos 58 Scan Options Fax Internet Fax u 90 Scan Options Scan E mail oooooconnnnnnnnncnnccnonnos 124
311. nsmissions for relay broadcasting Off Disables the feature 198 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Send to Relay Station Causes the machine to automatically send a Relay Broadcast Report to relay stations Print at Local Station Causes the machine to automatically print out a Relay Broadcast Report Send to Relay Print at Local Causes the machine to automatically print out a Relay Broadcast Report and send it to the relay stations 2 Sided Report Specify whether or not a report is to be automatically output to both sides of paper if the report will not fit on one side Recipient on Activity Report Specify the number of characters of the destination s information to be printed on an Activity Report Select First 40 characters or Last 40 characters Maintenance Diagnostics Use this feature to initialize the hard disk on the machine or delete all document data stored in the machine 1 Select Maintenance Diagnostics on the Common Settings screen Maintenance Diagnostics H rizo Hard Disk B Delete All Data 2 Perform the necessary O Software ions operations 3 Select Close Initialize Hard Disk Use this feature to initialize the hard disk on the machine After selecting Initialize Hard Disk select a partition and then select Start Then select Yes to execute initialization After the initialization finishes sel
312. nt cooccncnnnccccnncnn 243 NGtWOMK ai triada 212 Print Mod unicos ala 220 SCAN Mode cocccocoonccnnncncnoccnononononononenonononananos 224 Setup Men A ene ee eindina 245 Stored Document ceceseeceeeeeeeseeeeeeees 244 SIM E E E ae 190 System Administrator ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 256 S tup MENU e e tania aeieeiaii aa 37 245 TAT O A E E E eateen ce teases 189 Sharpness Copy oa e a a a aaa aeoea t 57 Sharpness Scan E mail ooocnnccnccnncnnnnnncncccnnnns 123 Short edge feed SEF assesseer 182 sleep mode 2 2 eeeeeeeccecceceeceeeeceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 40 SS MB ieee tennant te aide wicker aioe 214 SMTP AUTH Login Name seenen 218 SMTP AUTH Password c ceecceeeeeseeeeeeeees 218 SMTP Server IP Address ccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 218 SMTP Server Name cccccceeseseceeeeeceeeeeeeenes 218 SMTP Server Port Number cccssceeeeees 218 SMTP Server Settings Network Settings 218 SMTP Server Setup cococcoccnccoconooncnncnnnnnnnnncninnnnnns 218 SNMP iia a 214 SOAP Port Status ccccccoonnccnnccconoconencconoconenanos 245 Software Download cccccoconncnnccoconocnnonononononnnnns 204 Software Version ooooccccccononoconocooonocnnnncnonononnnnns 276 special characters Fax Internet Fax 85 SPECIFICATIONS ceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeentteeeeees 341 specifications for the Fax feature 25 345 specifying destinati
313. nt Mode screen an ltem Number and select Confirm PCL Emulation 2 Enter the parameter item tern No Current Value l number in the Item No field gt O EA 3 Select Change Value to change the displayed value Select Confirm if no change is required Change Value Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 277 13 Machine Status 4 Enter the required value in the New Value field using the numeric keypad on the control panel 5 Select Save PDF Displays the PDF screen PDF Screen Use this feature to set parameter values and a password for PDF direct printing which allows you to bypass driver software and send a PDF file directly to the machine 1 Select PDF on the Print Mode screen 2 Perform the necessary E eeso operations 3 Select Close Setup Allows you to set parameter values for PDF direct printing 1 Select Setup on the PDF r an Item Number and select Confirm rs screen POF Setup 2 Enter the parameter item hem Number Current Value number in the Item Number gt O field 3 Select Change Value to change the displayed value Select Confirm if no change is required 4 Enter the required value in the New Value field using the numeric keypad on the control panel 5 Select Save Password Allows you to enter a password to restrict access to PDF direct printing
314. nt on from First Page Only or All pages Date Displays the Annotation Date screen Use this screen to print the current date on the copies based on the selections made The following options are available e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature Print On Displays the Annotation Date Print On screen Specify which pages you wish to print the date on from First Page Only or All Pages e Position Displays the Annotation Date Position screen Select where to place the date on the page Page Number Displays the Annotation Page Number screen Use this screen to print page numbers on the copies The following options are available e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 73 3 Copy Style Displays the Annotation Page Number Style screen Select a style for the page number If you select a 1 N 2 N 3 N option the N Total Pages option displays Select Auto to enable the machine to count the page automatically to find the total or select Enter Number to manually enter the total number of pages The number is then printed after the individual page number e Position Displays the Annotation Page Number Position screen Select where to place the page number on the page e Print On Displays the Annotation Page Number Print On screen Specify pages whi
315. ntation and staple position and select the correct settings or cancel the staple feature Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 329 16 Problem Solving Code Description and Remedy 003 981 Stapling mixed size documents is available only for documents with the same width Cancel the staple feature or reset the documents with the same width 005 275 An error occurred in the document feeder Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 005 280 005 283 005 284 005 285 005 286 012 211 An error occurred in the finisher Contact the Xerox Welcome Center 012 212 012 221 012 223 012 224 012 260 012 263 012 282 012 283 012 284 012 285 012 291 012 293 012 294 012 295 012 296 016 210 An error occurred on the software option settings Contact the Xerox Welcome 016 211 Center 016 212 016 213 016 214 016 215 016 450 The SMB host name has been set twice Change the host name 016 454 Could not acquire the IP address from DNS Check the DNS settings and IP address acquisition method setting 016 503 Could not determine the name of the SMTP server when e mail was transmitted Check if the SMTP server is set correctly Also check that the DNS server is set correctly 016 504 Could not determine the name of the POP3 server when e mail was transmitted Check if the POP3 server is set correctly Also check that the DNS server is set correctly 016
316. ntre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Emulation Settings Variable X Allows you to specify the X between 25 to 100 Up Down Adjustment Allows you to specify a value between 250 and 250 mm 9 8 9 8 inches to adjust the vertical position Left Right Adjustment Allows you to specify a value between 250 and 250 mm 9 8 9 8 inches to adjust the horizontal position Paper Margin Allows you to specify a value between 0 and 99 mm for the paper margin Collated Allows you to specify whether to collate the output Stapling Allows you to select the stapling method Image Enhancement Allows you to enable or disable image enhancement Bypass Tray Wait User Allows you to specify whether to enable or disable this feature when Tray 5 Bypass is selected PCL This page allows you to configure the settings when PCL is enabled Paper Tray Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size Paper Size Bypass Allows you to select the paper size for Tray 5 Bypass Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output Quantity Allows you to specify the number of sets to print between 1 and 999 2 Sided Print Allows you to select whether to print both sides of paper Image Orientation Allows you to select the image orientation Form Lines Allows you to specify th
317. ntre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 279 13 Machine Status User Account Billing Meter Allows you to view the number of per session and total impressions of copying or scanning made for a user account the impression limit set for the account and the available balance NOTE This button is displayed with Key Operator access 1 Select User Account Billing Meter on the Billing Meter Print Report screen Print Report List to return to the job programming screen User Account Billing Meter Copy Meter Q Scan Meter A This Session 10 Total Account Limit Available Balance Allows you to print various reports and lists for each service 1 Select Print Report List on the Billing Meter Print Report screen Job Status Activity Report to return to the job programming screen m Print Mode Settings m Mailbox List Print Report List Job Status m Copy Mode Settings Activity Report Fax Mode Settings J Scan Mode Settings Auditron m Job Counter Report J Administration Displays the Job Status Activity Report screen Select a report option and press the lt Start gt button on the control panel to output the following e Job History Report Lists the jobs recorded on the machine e Activity Report Lists the results of the fax transmissions e Error History Report Lists the errors that occurred in the machine e Stor
318. nts on the Login Setup Auditron TRAIL Administration screen All User Accounts OQ Print Meters Choose an option and select Reset 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close Q y Account Limits Reset Total Impressions All User Accounts Clears all parameters of all accounts All Account Limits Clears the upper limit imposed on the total number of pages to be copied and or scanned If cleared account limits for all accounts will return to the default value of 9 999 999 Total Impressions Clears all data tracked for all accounts including the Key Operator Print Meters Clears all data about the number of prints recorded by the machine 260 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Login Setup Auditron Administration System Administrator Copy Meter Use this feature to check and or reset the number of pages which are copied faxed scanned and printed when in the Key Operator mode 1 Select System Administrator Copy Meter on the Login System Administrator Copy Meter Setup Auditron Administration vota impressions screen 2 Toclear the total number select 1o Reset 3 Select Close User Details Setup Use this feature to configure the settings for user ID authentication 1 Select User Details Setup on the Login Setup Auditron ite User Details Setup Admin istration screen User ID Characters Failed Acces
319. o This feature is not available for iFax recipients However the selected mode is applied to another 3 Select Save O oe eiii dede used as a relay station O G4 Auto G3 Auto Select this mode if the remote machine is G3 compatible This mode is the one usually selected The machine automatically switches modes depending on the capabilities of the remote machine F4800 Select this mode when transmitting over noisy or bad telephone lines for example when sending international faxes Can also be useful for transmitting over poor telephone lines domestically G4 Auto Select this mode when relay broadcasting to Internet Fax destinations Priority Send Delayed Start These features allow you to set the priority and start time for fax and polling jobs Although you can set Delayed Start in combination with Priority Send a fax will be sent at the time specified using the Delayed Start option NOTE These features are not available for Internet Fax transmissions 1 Select Priority Send Delayed Enter recipient Use C but To Start on the Send Options Priority Send Delayed Start screen Priority Send Delayed Start e j 2 Perform the necessary oi oft i operations O O 3 Select Save O O Priority Send e Off Disables the feature On Sends or polls the job prior to the already stored documents Delayed Start Off Disables the feature 94 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre W
320. o enter the Key Operator mode enter the Key Operator ID into the user ID entry field on the authentication screen Entered Users These are users who are registered with the machine When an Entered User uses a service that is restricted the user must enter their user ID on the authentication screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 285 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration Unentered Users These are users who are not registered with the machine An Unentered User cannot use services that are restricted General Users These are general users who are not permitted to use the machine in the authenticated mode Types of Authentication Two types of authentication are used by the machine depending on where user information is stored Direct Authentication Direct Authentication uses the user information stored in the machine to manage authentication Network Authentication Network Authentication uses the user information from a remote account server to manage authentication User information on a remote account server is sent to and stored in the machine When the user information on the server is changed that information must be sent from the server to update the machine This authentication method is used to simplify the management of user information on multiple machines Functions Controlled by Authentication The following explains the functions that are r
321. o poll a document from a remote machine the remote mailbox feature must be enabled For more information refer to Remote Mailbox on page 100 NOTE The DTMF dual tone multi frequency method and F Code ITU T subaddress method can be also used to poll a document from a remote machine For more information refer to Special Characters on page 85 or F Code on page 100 NOTE This feature is not available for Internet Fax transmissions 1 Select Polling on the On hook Ente recipient Use C button to cancel entry Mernory 100 Others screen taco J Save 2 Select On to enable the This feature allows you to retrieve documents featu re Q off from a remote machine However it is not available for iFax recipients 3 Select Save Polling Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 103 4 Fax Internet Fax Store for Polling This feature allows you to store documents in public and private mailboxes on the machine that a remote machine can retrieve later for public polling Memory 100 1 Select Store for Polling on the On hook Others screen Store for Polling 2 Perform the necessary Qo Save in operations Oo O Public Mailbox Public Mailbox J Number of Documents 5 Private Mailbox Off Disables the feature Public Mailbox Stores public documents which are available to be polled When you select this option Save in P
322. o the following Communication Mode page 94 Priority Send Delayed Start page 94 Send Header page 96 Cover Note page 96 Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents page 97 Transmission Report Read Receipts MDN and Delivery Receipts DSN page 98 Recipient Print Sets page 99 Remote Mailbox page 100 F Code page 100 Internet Fax Profile page 102 1 Press the lt All Services gt button ENEE Memory 100 Next Recipien a e WE 2 Select Fax l ntern et Fax on the 9 Communication Mode Q Priority Send Delayed Start Send Header G3 Auto Priority Send Off On 1 touch screen Delayed Start Off O Cover Note Fax Comment Mail Contents Report Read Receipts 3 Select the Send Options tab a O ort eo Use the side tabs to switch screens 4 Select the required option Enter recipien Memory 100 Tc E ntry o o aci EEA Image Quality een Send Options On hook Others ul 9 Recipient Print Sets O Remote Mailbox 9 F Code J 1 Sets B off DB off Q Fax Profile m TIFF S Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 93 4 Fax Internet Fax Communication Mode Use this feature to select a communication mode for fax transmissions 1 Select Com mun ication Mod el l Ente recipient Use C button to cancel entry Memory 100 on the Send Options screen SSeS 2 Select the req uired option G3 Aut
323. occcccconaccnnncnconennnnnnnancccrnnnnnannnaas Read Receipts MDN ooococoooni ncccononnnonanocccorennnnananano SPIES iere tens a E NA Document NaM occnccccnncnoconcncnnnnnononononinonennnnnonononanenennss Login Namee od alte ad tcp PassWord li acia ql cid Meta Data ios ica 6 Check MallboX 0 oia a rta ds Gheck Mail DOx a a dis Document List e 7 Stored PrograMmMiNQ cconnnnccccnoninnnnnnnanncccnnnennnnnaaannnnnnnns Using Stored Programming ccoooccononcccnnncccnonananannncnnnnnnnanos Stored Progra Ges cee tess wecsces editada Emulation Parameters cccccecceeeceeeceeeceeeceseeseeneeeeneees PGE Emulationia Aen e T 9 CentreWare Internet Services ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Target Computer S err e aa a aaan Accessing CentreWare Internet Services 5 Standard Features CentreWare Internet Services Interface Options cece cece a aE Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Table of Contents 10 11 SLEINE TEE AAA T EE E tadeseehendt 151 Job SUBMISSION cional iii 151 JOD Templates iia id 152 A E OS EN 156 Job Sturm dad 157 o A na a aR ete 157 JOD Manage Midi A ia cias 158 Sal iii A eden 158 Goal ad 158 A dee haath Mina hs et a E Mina cba nts achat 159 COMSUMADICS ccoo a adidas aii 159 PODEMOS iii a A AA A es 160 Default User ID and Password oooooooccooooccccccconcnnnconnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnncnnnons 160 Properties Feat
324. occurs the machine will print a Power Off Report when the machine is switched on This will show a list of the fax jobs lost Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 315 16 Problem Solving Paper Jams When paper jams inside the machine the machine stops the operation and beeps and a message is displayed on the touch screen Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it If paper is torn while it is being removed from the machine remove all the torn pieces making sure that none remain inside If a paper jam message is displayed again paper is probably jammed at another location Clear this by following the message on the display When you have finished clearing a paper jam printing automatically resumes from the point before the paper jam occurred WARNING When removing jammed paper make sure that no bits of paper are left in the machine since they could cause more jams or even fire If a piece of paper is stuck in a hidden area or wrapped around the fuser unit or rollers do not remove it forcefully you could get injured or burned Switch off the machine immediately and contact the Xerox Welcome Center This section describes how to clear paper jams in the following locations Document Feeder Tray Cover Cover E Cover A Center Output Tray Duplex Module Cover D Front Cover Tray 5 Bypass 7 Tray 1
325. oe 2 Sided cl O First Page 1 Sided 1 Sided Scans single sided documents 2 Sided Scans double sided documents When you select this option Originals is displayed at the right side of the screen 2 Sided First Page 1 Sided Scans documents when the first page of the document is single sided and the rest of the document is double sided When you select this option Originals is displayed at the right side of the screen Originals e Head to Head Select to scan double sided documents opened side by side e Head to Toe Select to scan double sided documents opened vertically 88 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Features Fax Internet Fax Resolution The scan resolution affects the quality of the fax the remote machine receives A higher resolution yields better quality A lower resolution redu cipien ces communica ntry tion time M xt Recipient Basic Features Image Quality EXA Send Options On hook Others 2 Sided Originals Original Type Resolution iFax Fax GD si SB et GD sua GY Sided H to H Dy Text amp Photo Fre m Address Book gt sided H to 1 Pho JD Superfine 4004p Core C Superfine 600dpi B Keyboard Standard Scans documents with a resolution of 200 x 100 dpi This option is recommended for text documents It requires less communication time but does not produce the best image quality for g
326. of documents have the same dimension Auto Size Sensing Yes NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the Key Operator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 Paper Supply NOTE The standard sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on the paper size table specified by the Key Operator For information on setting the paper size table refer to Paper Size Settings in the Setups chapter on page 201 Trays 1 2 8 3 4 Two Tray Module Capacity 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond paper per tray Paper Weights 60 to 105 g m for Tray 1 and 60 to 216 g m for Trays 2 3 and 4 Paper Sizes For width 140 to 297 mm 5 5 to 11 7 for length 182 to 432 mm 7 2 to 17 0 Auto Size Sensing Yes Tray 5 Bypass Capacity Approximately 95 sheets of 80 g m paper 100 sheets of 20 Ib bond paper Using standard paper 4200 3R2047 NOTE The paper stack height must not exceed 10 mm 0 4 inches Paper Weight 60 to 216 g m Paper Sizes For width 89 to 297 mm 3 5 to 11 7 for length 99 to 432 mm 3 9 to 17 0 Auto Size Sensing Yes Tray 3 4 Tandem Tray Module Capacity Tray 3 Left hand tray 800 sheets Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 343 17 Specifications Tray 4 Right hand tray 1 200 sheets Paper We
327. office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line make sure that the installation of this Xerox equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your Telephone Company or a qualified installer NOTE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users must make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should make sure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe
328. ommunication Mode feature on the Send Options screen Transmission Interval Sets the period between transmissions within the range of 3 to 255 seconds using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel The longer the transmission interval the longer the total time spent for operation but the machine can receive faxes during the standby time Batch Send Sets whether to send up to four pending documents automatically to an identical destination with a single phone call thereby reducing telephone charges Manual Send Receive Default Sets the default for whether the Manual Receive or Manual Send button is to be selected when you use the On Hook feature on the On Hook Others screen Fax Receiving Mode Sets the default for fax reception mode choosing between Auto Receive or Manual Receive Border Limit Sets the value to divide a document onto two pages when the received documents are longer than the loaded paper size You can set the value within the range of 0 127 mm 0 5 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel We recommend setting this feature with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt feature Auto Reduce on Receipt If the received document length exceeds the length of the loaded paper but is within the value set in the Border Limit feature the machine reduces and reproduces an image onto a single page We recommend setting this feature with the above Bord
329. ons Fax Internet Fax 81 Speed Dial Fax Internet Fax snesen 83 Speed Dial button oooooococcccccccccccocincnanononcncnnnnnn 35 Split Send Scan E mail a nns 129 Stamp eseeeiss ethan sue e E a R 73 Stamp Position on Side 2 ceeceeeeeeees 209 Standard Features CentreWare Internet Services 006 150 Staple Position cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 55 Stapler acta ac ceci detona rear ere re rete 310 staples DAI nuit id 310 Start DUO dd ia 35 Status CentreWare Internet Services 158 SLOP DUO Mia toa 35 stopping A COPY JOD c ooooncoccccnononococcnononanananannnanns 49 stopping a Fax Internet Fax job esene 81 stopping A SCAN JOD ooo eee este irian 110 Store for Polling Fax ooooocccccnnnnoccccccconcncccccnanns 104 Stored Document List eeeeeeeeeeeees 280 Stored Document Settings eee 244 stored documents Job Status 0 0 ee 270 Stored Programming ccceeeseeeeeeeeneees 37 139 Stored Programming Tone ssec 194 storing and handling paper seeen 184 storing fax for retrieval from remote machines 104 storing multiple operations 0cceee 139 Substitute Tray riroraa aE RETS 223 supplies A aretora a ky 305 Support CentreWare Internet Services 179 supported paper sizes and types 05 185 System Administrator Copy Meter Auditron Administration oin ra aciertan iia
330. ons and press the lt Start gt button to output the lists Fax Mode Settings Displays the Fax Mode Settings screen Settings List Displays the following options on the right hand side Select an option and press the lt Start gt button to output the list Setting List Common Items Box Selector List Extended Features Settings List Domain List Address Book Displays ten Address Book options Group Send and Select All on the right hand side Each Address Book option represents 50 addresses giving 500 in total Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 281 13 Machine Status Select one or more Address Book options and or the Group Send or Select All and press the lt Start gt button to output the lists Comments List Select this option and press the lt Start gt button to output this list e Billing Data List Displays the billing data for fax jobs Select this option and press the lt Start gt button to output this list NOTE This option is displayed with Key Operator access Mailbox List Displays the Mailbox List screen NOTE This button is displayed with Key Operator access e Mailbox List Displays ten Mailbox options and the Select All button on the right hand side Each Mailbox option represents 50 mailboxes giving 500 in total Select one or more Mailbox options or Select All and press the lt Start gt button to output the lists
331. ope LEF 220 0 110 0 Monarch Envelope 190 5 98 4 LEF Youkei 0 Envelope 235 0 120 0 LEF A6 SEF 105 0 148 0 A6 LEF 148 0 105 0 Postcard SEF 100 0 148 0 Postcard LEF 148 0 100 0 4 x 6 LEF 152 4 101 6 4 x 6 SEF 101 6 152 4 Prepaid Postcard 200 0 148 0 LEF 3 5 x 5 5 SEF 88 9 139 7 B6 LEF 182 0 128 0 B6 SEF 128 0 182 0 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 203 11 Setups Millimeters Inches Select Millimeters or Inches as the unit for entering document or scan sizes Keyboard Input Restriction Specify whether the machine is to allow entry of only ASCII characters or characters including those specific to the selected language Selecting On Standard ASCII Only causes the screen keyboard to show only standard ASCII characters Operation of Up Down Buttons Specify whether the machine is to allow the up and down buttons scroll buttons on the touch screen to provide fast scrolling when they are pressed continuously Overwrite Hard Disk Select whether or not to enable overwriting the hard disk If enabled random data will be written to the disk area released by the data deletion to avoid illegal data retrievals from the hard disk You can select the number of overwrite passes from one time or three times This also overwrites temporarily saved data such as copy documents Data Encryption Select whether to enable encoding when data is
332. open When paper feeding starts and the selected tray malfunctions NOTE The bypass tray cannot be used with Auto Tray Switching NOTE Key Operator access is required to set target trays and priorities For more information refer to Paper Tray Priority in the Setups chapter on page 196 and Paper Type Priority in the Setups chapter on page 196 When not in use the paper trays can be opened and paper can be loaded while the machine is running However do not open the active tray This will cause the machine to stop the job being processed Storing and Handling Paper Always use high quality xerographic grade paper in the machine Damaged curled or damp paper can cause jams and image quality problems Follow these simple rules to store paper 184 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Supported Paper Sizes and Types e Store paper in dry conditions away from extreme heat or cold such as radiators or open windows Store paper flat on a shelf or pallet above floor level e Leave the paper wrapped and boxed until ready to be used Re wrap partly used packages of paper NOTE Paper should not be stored in the paper trays Supported Paper Sizes and Types This section lists the sizes and types of paper that can be used with the machine Supported Paper Sizes The following table lists the paper sizes supported for each paper tray duplex module and the finisher NOTE
333. opyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Specifications for the Fax Feature Electrical Voltage 110 127 VAC amp 220 240 VAC Power Consumption Maximum average 1 33 KVA 110 VAC 1 524 KVA 127 VAC 1 76 KVA 220 VAC 1 92 KVA 240 VAC Specifications for the Fax Feature Fax Transmission Speed Automatic fallback 33 6 Kbps Page Transmission Time ITU No 1 document 33 6 Kbps standard less than 4 seconds reference data Telephone Line Type Standard public analogue switched telephone line or equivalent Compatibility Super G3 ECM G3 Resolution Capability Standard 200 x 100 dpi 8 x 3 85 lines mm Fine 200 x 200 dpi 8 x 7 7 lines mm Superfine 400 x 400 dpi 16 x 15 4 lines mm Superfine 600 x 600 dpi Resolution Conversion Available for sending and receiving smooth on receiving Image Compression JBIG MH MR MMR Long Page Scan Feature 600 mm 23 6 inches maximum length NOTE This feature is only available when using the document feeder NOTE This feature is not available in double sided mode NOTE When using this feature to scan long documents which exceed 432 mm 17 0 inches the operator must feed the document one sheet at a time The paper weight should be between 60 and 90 g m Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 345 17 Specifications Connection Approvals EU EEA certified to TBR21 USA approved to FCC Pt 6
334. opying Tab m Copy Defaults D Copy Control 3 Select Close k m Original Size Reduce Enlarge Defaults Presets Basic Copying Tab Use this feature to define the functions of the paper tray buttons and magnification buttons shown in Paper Supply and Reduce Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen 1 Select Basic Copying Tab on the Copy Mode Settings TA scree n Items Current Settings Choose an item and select Change Settings 1 Paper Supply 2nd Button 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch 2 P supy 34 Bum Tray 2 between screens 3 Paper Supply 4th Button Tray 3 4 Reduce Enlarge 3rd Button R E Preset 1 3 Perform the necessary 5 Reduce Enlarge 4th Button R E Preset 2 operations 4 Select Close Paper Supply 2nd 4th Button Sets the display contents on the second to fourth rows of paper tray buttons shown in Paper Supply on the Basic Copying screen This allocation allows you to select easily the paper trays you frequently use with the exception of Tray 3 and 4 of the optional TTM Reduce Enlarge 3rd 4th Button Sets the display contents on the third to fourth rows of magnification buttons shown in Reduce Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen This allocation allows you to select easily the reduction enlargement ratios you frequently use Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 205 11 Setups The preset
335. ore any changes to the button position will result in changes to the stored operation The button position changes when adding deleting Job Flow Sheet Job Template or Address Book to and from a stored job 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Sel Settings before Clear All or Stored Programming 2 Select Setup Menu on the ES G nw touch screen xi Not in Use 5 Not in Use O Not in Use O Not in Use 3 Select Stored Programming on oz the Setup Menu screen jota Oewnvss win 4 Perform the necessary operations 5 Select Save Store Allows you to register a series of operations in a job number After selecting the required job number 1 to 40 perform a series of operations to be stored Once all operations have been programmed press the lt Start gt button on the control panel to register the operations in the job number Delete Clears the contents of a selected job number Select this button followed by the job number you want to clear Enter Change Name Allows you to assign or change a name for a job number Select this button followed by ajob number Then enter a name up to 18 characters using the screen keyboard For information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 140 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 8 Print This chapter contains information on the optional
336. orkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Send Options Fax Internet Fax e On Applies the delayed start time When you select this option Start Time is displayed at the right side of the screen Start Time Displays the delayed start time and displays the Delayed Start Start Time screen to change the delayed start time Delayed Start Start Time Screen You can set the delayed start time using a 12 hour or 24 hour format You cannot specify a date for transmission NOTE The format of the start time can be set on the Machine Clock Timer screen in the System Settings AM PM is displayed only when the 12 hour format is used For more information refer to Machine Clock Timers in the Setups chapter on page 191 1 Select On for Delayed Start on the Priority Send Delayed Start screen 2 Select Start Time 3 Set the delayed start time using the scroll buttons 4 Select Save AM Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Memory 100 Next Recipient Delayed Start Start Time Cancel Hours 1 12 Om e 4 Minutes 00 59 CD Current Time 9 35 PM The delayed start time is before noon PM The delayed start time is after noon Hours Sets the hour of the delayed start time from 1 to 12 Minutes Sets the minutes of the delayed start time from 00 to 59 Current Time Displays the current time Xerox Copy
337. orkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 201 11 Setups Document Glass Document Feeder i gt 2 gt 2 gt Size MGM A e e o a ees Ser Ls S mm mm xp vu 3ul2ol u volu du uo o 32 2 2 L2 o za 2 z2 P 0 gt a gt xa 3 Wa gt gt xa 3 o Ad 30 o oO Ad 30 D n n n n N n n n n N C5 Envelope SEF 162 0 229 0 Commercial 10 241 3 104 8 Envelope LEF DL Envelope LEF 220 0 110 0 Monarch Envelope 190 5 98 4 LEF Youkei O Envelope 235 0 120 0 LEF A6 SEF 105 0 148 0 O O O O A6 LEF 148 0 105 0 Postcard SEF 100 0 148 0 Postcard LEF 148 0 100 0 4 x 6 LEF 152 4 101 6 4 x 6 SEF 101 6 152 4 O Prepaid Postcard 200 0 148 0 LEF 3 5 x 5 5 SEF 89 0 139 7 5 x 7 SEF 127 0 177 8 O B6 LEF 182 0 128 0 B6 SEF 128 0 182 0 O O O O 1 When scanning mixed size originals automatic size detection is not available Paper Size The machine automatically recognizes the following sizes when recording media is loaded in Trays 1 4 and Trays 3 and 4 of the Tandem Tray Module NOTE For Tray 5 Bypass 11 paper sizes can be selected as presets by the Key Operator from the sizes listed in the following table Tray 1 4 except for TTM Tray 3 4 TTM i _ gt S gt _ 2 5 Size Width Length sas las 3 es 189 2500 mm mm xolul lu 20l
338. ort Undelivered 198 Transmission Report Read Status MDN Send Status DSN Fax Internet Fax 0 0 eee 98 transmitting 2 sided documents Fax ieee 88 Transparency Separators seseeeeeeeeeteeees 70 TA cog Siena acca 2d pan ae AE lilas 33 MY prcrer erect 33 TAY 2 seats A 33 O peerren or ererenrn et repr errr ree yee creer e 33 34 VAY Aaa A AT 33 34 Tray 5 Bypass paper JAMS 002 eee eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeceeeeteeeeeteeees 322 Tray 5 Bypass Paper Size Defaults 196 Trays CentreWare Internet Services 159 Trays 1 2 and 3 4 paper JAMS 002 eee eee e cece eeeeeeneeeeeceeceeeeeeteeeees 321 troubleshooting tables n 325 TUPNING ON OFF aia conan cnn cnnnnn nana rcnnno 38 Two Tray Module ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 34 types of Authentication a se 286 types of mailboxes Authentication 292 U Unentered Users 0000 20 22 cccceeeeeeeeeececcteeeeeeeeeteeees 286 Unit iii a 204 Unregistered Forms cooccocccccnccococcnononananananonann no 224 UPnP DiSCOVETY oesi deiei 215 USA illegal copies ceeceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 28 USB ica 213 User Account Billing Meter 0 0 eee 280 User Details Setup Auditron Administration 261 Using Stored Programming seese 139 vV volume Audio TONES s es 193 W wWamng S eric T atin 18 website Xerox oiana n a a aa 13 welcome center XerOX sssss sesnsrirerssrrrr
339. ows you to delete jobs as well Follow the steps below to select the features available on the Jobs tab 1 Click Jobs on the Main Panel of the home page 156 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Jobs 2 Onthe collapsible menu of the Menu Panel click Job List to view the list of active jobs or click Job History List then Job History to view the list of completed jobs Job List This page displays the list of active jobs being processed when you select Job List Details include the following Job Name Displays the name of the job Owner Displays the name of the client user that has sent the job Status Displays the status of the job Job Type Displays the type of job Quantity Displays the number of sets that have been processed Job History List This page displays a list of completed jobs Details include the following Job Name Displays the name of the job Owner Displays the name of the client user who sent the job Job Status Displays the status of the job The status includes Completed Error Deleted Shutdown Cancelled Aborted and Unknown Job Type Displays the type of job Pages Displays the number of pages printed printed jobs only Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 157 9 CentreWare Internet Services Output Destination Displays the output destination address document
340. pecifying scan ratio for original 92 specifying SCAN SIZE eee 92 specifying scanning resolution 89 stopping a JOD aoaaa eA EAE 81 storing for retrieval from remote machines 104 transmitting documents with cover page 96 transmitting facing pages on separate sheets 91 using remote Mailbox 100 features easier iiaae 43 features and services Auditron Administration 298 Features button ooococccccccccncccccoconcnnoncconcnnncnnnnnanns 43 File Destination Output Destination Fax Mode settings cccceeeeeseeeeeeeesteeeeeeentaees 234 File Format Scan E mail cceeeeeeees 122 File Repository Setup CentreWare Internet Services cee 156 FINISHER usina dica 34 310 Finisher Top Cover ee eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 Finisher Transport Cover F ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 323 Finisher Paper Jams ooococcocococcccncncnnnnnncnononnnns 323 Front GOVeR ae aaa lace aa saai a a idee 33 ETP Cliente italia 214 Functions Controlled by Authentication 286 G Cita er ETES 94 E 94 General CentreWare Internet Services 158 General Settings CentreWare Internet Services ieee 156 General Users coooocccccccoccoccccccncccnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 286 Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet 288 Ground Fault Interrupter GFI s 38 Group Send Setup Menu coccccinncnccononccnccnnncnnnn 255 H Host Name cccccccecec
341. phone Company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the 22 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Regulatory Information CANADA Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this Xerox equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the appropriate service center details of which are displayed either on the machine or contained within the User Guide If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox Service Representative or an authorized Xerox Service Provider This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period If unauthorized repair is performed the remainder of the warranty period is null and void This equipment must not be used on party lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your
342. pies from bound documents using the document glass A blank sheet is automatically inserted as the first page 1 Select 2 Sided Book Copy on the Scan Options screen 2 Sided Book Copy Cancel Save 2 Select the required option Qo start Page amp End Page SE Lon yor gs Left Page 3 Select Save e bi E Left Page 0 50 Our Lo i Oi lc ID NOTE This feature and the Bound Originals feature cannot be activated simultaneously Off Disables the feature Left Page then Right Copies both pages of an open book from left to right Right Page then left Copies both pages of an open book from right to left Top Page then Bottom Copies both pages of an open book from top to bottom Start Page amp End Page Displays the 2 Sided Book Copy Start Page amp End Page screen Specifies the front or back of the page to be the starting or ending side for copying The specified page sides must be identified using the bound originals Center Erase Erases printing of the central gutter area of the book that tends to be shadowed Use the scroll buttons to specify the area to be erased from the center of an open book within the range of 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inches in 1mm 0 1 inch increments Original Size Using this feature the size of the document can be automatically detected selected from a list of preset sizes or manually specified using the custom option If Custom is 60 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCen
343. pness Specify the default for the sharpness level of fine lines and edges Auto Exposure Specify the default for suppressing the background color of documents Original Orientation Specify the default orientation of documents to be scanned Scan Resolution Specify the default resolution for scanning documents Mixed Size Originals Specify the default for scanning mixed size documents and saving in a single file when using the document feeder Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 225 11 Setups Border Erase Specify the default for erasing black marks that may appear around the edges or at the center binding area of scanned results when scanning bound documents or documents with the platen glass cover open Border Erase Top amp Bottom Specify the default for the top and bottom width to be erased Select the width in the range from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 inches Border Erase Left amp Right Specify the default for the left and right width to be erased Select the width in the range from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 inches Center Erase Specify the center width to be erased Select the width in the range from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Image Compression Specify the default for compressing scanned data Scan to FTP SMB Defaults Use this feature to configure or change the default settings for scanning and sendi
344. posal If you are managing the disposal of your Xerox product please note that the product does not contain lead mercury and other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations in certain countries or states The presence of lead and mercury is fully consistent with global regulations applicable at the time that the product was placed on the market 30 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Product Recycling and Disposal USA Canada Xerox operates an equipment takeback and reuse recycle program Contact your Xerox sales representative 1 800 ASK XEROX to determine whether this Xerox product is part of the program For more information about Xerox environmental programs visit www xerox com environment or for recycling and disposal information contact your local authorities In the United States you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org European Union Application of this symbol on your equipment is confirmation that you should not dispose of the equipment in the normal household waste stream In accordance with European legislation end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be segregated from household waste Private households within EU Member States may return used electrical and electronic equipment to designated collection facilities free of charge Please contact your local disposal au
345. put prime signal received USB Use this feature to specify whether to enable the USB port and to configure the relative parameter settings Port Status Specify whether to enable the USB port Print Mode Specify the PDL to be used for print jobs Only pre installed PDLs are available PJL Specify whether to enable the PJL Printer Job Language Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 213 11 Setups Auto Eject Time Specify the time out period when print data is not sent to the machine sequentially If the specified time elapses the remaining data inside the machine is automatically printed out You can enter a time within the range of 5 1 275 seconds in 5 second increments Adobe Communication Protocol Specify the communication protocol format for Adobe Communication Protocol Standard Select this option when the communication protocol is in the ASCII format Binary Select this option when the communication protocol is in the binary format Depending on the data the print job may be completed faster than Standard TBCP Select this option to switch the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats LPD Use this feature to specify whether to enable the LPD port NetWare Use this feature to specify whether to enable the NetWare port SMB Use this feature to specify whether to enable the SMB port IPP Use this feature
346. pyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Mode Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets Use this feature to set magnification presets These are displayed when you select Variable in the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Scan Options screen If you predefine frequently used magnifications the draft original can be expanded or reduced quickly and easily The Reduce Enlarge Presets screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Reduce Enlarge Presets on the Fax Mode Settings screen 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close R E Preset 1 7 Choose an item and select Change Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets Items Current Settings 2 R E Preset 2 70 A3 gt A4 B4 gt B5 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 B5 gt A5 4 R E Preset 4 86 A3 gt B4 A4 gt B5 Change 5 R E Preset 5 115 B4 gt A3 B5 gt A4 J y a Allows you to assign your choice of magnifications to each of the seven buttons within the range of 50 400 Preset Allows you to select a magnification ratio from 23 options Variable Allows you to specify a magnification ratio using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad within a range of 50 400 Scan Size Defaults Use this feature to set document size presets These are displayed when you use the Scan Size feature in the Scan Options screen If you predefi
347. r 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Select the required service Copy Select the required service All Services Ba Copy Es E mail g Fax Internet Fax gi Network Scanning ES sen to Mailbox Select the required service All Services CB sean to FTP SMB cree Mailbox Setup Menu a Stored Programming Allows you to copy documents in various ways For example you can produce output which has been reduced or enlarged to a different size or copy two or four independent documents onto one sheet of paper For more information refer to the Copy chapter E mail Allows you to send scanned documents by e mail in various ways For example you can set the density for scanning or specify the file format for saving the documents For more information refer to the Scan E mail chapter 36 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Services and Features Fax Internet Fax Allows you to fax documents in various ways For example you can send documents in a reduced or enlarged format or specify destinations using the Address Book or speed dialing features Internet Fax allows you to send and receive faxes over the Internet or intranet Internet Fax provides reduced cost of transmissions compared to the use of a conventional phone line After scanning documents you can send scanned data by e ma
348. r Cancel to return to the previous screen information on the individual tabs refer to the following Basic Features Fax Internet Fax page 87 Image Quality Fax Internet Fax page 90 Scan Options Fax Internet Fax page 90 Send Options Fax Internet Fax page 93 On hook Others Fax page 103 3 Specify the Destination The following explains how to specify a destination The machine allows the following dialing methods fax numbers or e mail addresses Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 79 4 Fax Internet Fax Using the keypad on the control panel Using the Address Book refer to Address Book on page 82 Using the Speed Dial refer to Speed Dial on page 83 For Internet Fax Using the screen keyboard on the touch screen refer to Keyboard on page 83 1 Enter the destination using any method from the above You can send a document to multiple destinations in a single operation For more information refer to Next Recipient on page 82 If you need to insert a pause in a fax N number for example when using a calling card press the lt Dial Pause gt E O ZO O o lt Dial Pause gt M CAS button button When you dial manually lt Dial Pause gt is not required You can simply wait for a voice prompt and proceed accordingly For more information
349. r Volume Select the volume level of the tone generated for the line monitor which allows you to hear call and response signals when connecting to a destination Ringing Volume Select the volume level of the tone generated when a call is received Stored Programming Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated each time operation is performed during job memory registration You cannot completely turn off the volume for this tone Auto Clear Alert Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated just before the machine performs auto clear Base Tone Select the volume level of the base tone generated when you toggle settings The machine emits a base tone when it exits the interrupted mode Screen Defaults This feature allows you to customize the initial screen and select the initial language to be displayed on the touch screen 1 Select Screen Defaults on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Screen Defaults 2 Perform the necessary ee aki a 1 Screen Default at Power On O pe rati ons 2 Features Screen Default Copy 3 Screen After Auto Clear Last Selection Screen 3 Select Close 4 Job Type on Job Status screen All Ch 5 Default Language English i Screen Default at Power On Specify the initial screen to be displayed when the machine is switched on You can change the preset initial screen to the Features Job Status or the Machine St
350. r paper guides on the trays are properly positioned to match the size of paper loaded If there is a gap between the paper stack and the guides paper may not be fed to the machine properly or paper jams may occur For information on configurable paper sizes and media types for each tray refer to Supported Paper Sizes and Types on page 185 For information on the acceptable range of paper sizes and capacity for each tray refer to Paper Supply in the Specifications chapter on page 343 Preparing Paper for Loading Before loading paper into the paper trays fan the edges This procedure separates any sheets of paper that are stuck together and reduces the possibility of paper jams NOTE To avoid paper jams and misfeeds do not remove paper from its packaging until required Loading the Paper Trays Depending on the machine configuration up to four paper trays will be available excluding the bypass tray NOTE If the machine is processing a job do not open the active paper tray 1 Pull out the paper tray towards you Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 181 10 Paper and Other Media NOTE To avoid jams and misfeeds do not load paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray Remove the paper and reload it on top of the new stock loaded 2 If required move the paper tray EY guides further out to load the new stock To adjust the side and rear guides pinc
351. r print various reports For more information on each tab refer to the following Machine Status page 275 Billing Meter Print Report page 279 Consumables page 282 Faults page 283 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt E X button on the control panel O O O O Press the lt Features gt or lt All O lt gt Q O COS Services gt button at any time to o D exit A o lt Machine Status gt button 2 Select the required option tton to return to the job programming screen re Machine Billing Meter Combi Status Print Report Print Mode J Machine Information J Paper Tray m Onine Overwrite Hard Disk Fax Receiving Mode m Standby B Auto Receive Machine Status This screen allows you to view the general information on the machine and the status of paper trays and the hard disk and change the print mode or fax receiving mode For more information on the features available refer to the following Machine Information page 276 Paper Tray page 276 Overwrite Hard Disk page 277 Print Mode page 277 Fax Receiving Mode page 278 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 275 13 Machine Status 1 Press the lt Machine Status gt y E 1 to return to the job programming screen button on the control panel n m 2 Select the Machine Status tab a a a g Machine Information Paper Tray O
352. raphics and photos Fine Scans documents with a resolution of 200 x 200 dpi This option is recommended for line art and the best choice in most cases Superfine 400dpi Scans documents with a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi This option is recommended for photos and halftone illustrations or grayscale images It requires more communication time but produces higher image quality Superfine 600dpi Scans documents with a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi Use this option to produce the best image quality at the cost of increased transmission time Original Type This feature allows you to select the type of documents y Enter recipient Use C ntry To ou are scanning M Next Recipient Basic Features Image Quality SAA Send Options On hook Others eal 2 Sided Originals Original Type Resolution m iFax Fax E Siea AG GD Strana RD Sided H to H C Text amp Photo Fre m Address Book gt sided H to 1 Pho C Superfine 4004p Doe CD Superfine 600dpi B Keyboard Text Select this option for documents that contain text only Text amp Photo With this option text and photographs are automatically identified and an appropriate quality mode is selected for the individual areas Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 89 4 Fax Internet Fax Photo Select this option for documents that contain photographs only Image Quality Fax Internet Fax You can also
353. rd Disk Display the overwriting status of the hard disk NOTE This option is displayed if the feature is enabled in the System Settings 1 Select Overwrite Hard Disk on the Machine Status screen Machine Pres tton to return to the job programming screen Overwrite Hard Disk Status Standby This feature prevents the document image and registered data recorded on the hard disk from being illegally retrieved Such data including saved document imags that are temporarily kept by the system is deleted frorn the hard disk by overwriting with meaningless data Deleted data is irrecoverable The number of overwrites is set by the Systern Administrator The Standby status indicates the completion of the overwriting process Print Mode Allows you to change the default printer mode and emulation parameter settings For the lists of emulation parameters and their values refer to Emulation Parameters in the Print chapter on page 144 1 Select Print Mode on the Machine Status screen Off line Onine 3 PCL Emulation m PDF Off line Sets the printer mode to off line On line Sets the printer mode to on line PCL Emulation Displays the PCL Emulation screen PCL Emulation Screen Use this feature to set parameter values for PCL emulation which allows you to print documents without using print driver software on your PC 1 Select PCL Emulation on the Pri
354. re WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 18 Glossary Landscape LDAP Long Page Scan Long Edge Feed LEF Low Power Mode Mailbox Manual Receive Mask Data Memory Node Non Standard Paper On hook Open System Options Report Output Password Paper Jam PCL Files Printer Control Language file The image orientation on a sheet of paper where the short edge of the paper runs from top to bottom An abbreviation of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A protocol that allows sharing or corporate phone book information A feature which enables scanning long document up to 600 mm 23 6 inches The long edge of the paper is positioned to enter the machine first A Power Saver Mode that reduces power consumption when the machine is not in use A storage area in the memory of the machine where fax documents are stored A fax mode that starts receiving a fax or polling after you have communicated with a caller and confirmed that the call is a fax job Press lt Start gt to begin receiving Mask data is displayed as special characters in the place of the private data Data is masked when the forward slash key is selected A capacity for storing documents A number that identifies on access point on a network lt works like an address Customized paper sizes within the range of 89 297 mm 3 5 11 7 inches for width and 99 432 mm 3 9 17 0 inches for length for making single sided
355. remove dry ink smudges and other marks Document glass ZA The Control Panel and Touch Screen Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen and control panel free from dust and dirt To remove finger prints and smudges clean the control panel and touch screen with a soft lint free cloth slightly moistened with water NOTE The machine should be switched off before cleaning the control panel to prevent unintended operation The Document Feeder and Output Trays Use a cloth moistened with water to clean the document feeder output trays paper trays and the outside areas of the machine Replacing the Drum Cartridge The drum cartridge is a customer replaceable unit After approximately 60 000 copies prints the machine will display a warning message before the drum reaches the end of life Order a replacement cartridge now to insure continuous operation Removing the Old Drum Cartridge 1 Pull the front cover towards you to open it 306 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Replacing the Drum Cartridge 2 Open the bypass tray and then open Cover A while lifting up the release lever 3 Lift up the colored lever and slide the drum cartridge out until Ras you can lift the handle on top of e the cartridge 4 Hold the handle and remove the E cartridge from the machine US E SC LA NOTE When replacin
356. rent size documents 61 selecting a paper tray eeens 51 selecting image quality oooooooocinnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncono 56 selecting original type seeen 56 Shifting Mage sirine 62 soring output oie aT nana nonnno no 54 specifying orientation eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eeen 66 specifying scan size for the document 60 A OEA 49 using different settings in a single operation 75 Counters CentreWare Internet Services 161 Country Code ee E E E T 204 country code for fax Option oocoooonnocccccnnncccnccccnnnns 77 Cover A Paper jamS ceceecceceeeeeeeeeteeeeees 318 Cover B paper jams cceccceceeeeeeeeeteeeeees 319 Cover C paper jamS cocoocccoccccccccccccccncninnnns 319 320 Cover E paper jams c cccccceeeeeteeteeeeeees 320 Cover Note Fax Internet Fax neen 96 cover note Comments connniccicnnnnacccccnnnccnncccnnns 256 cover Page for faX coocoonocccccnncconcccccnnancncnnnanancnnnnnnnn 96 Covers COPY erai E EE 69 Create Change Link ooccccnnnnnccccnnnnnacccccnnnacnncncnns 136 Create Check User Accounts Auditron Administration oooooonnnnnnnnnncnnnnciniccnnns 259 current and pending JODS 268 Custom Paper Name cccceceeeeeeeeeteeeeees 195 D Data Encryption essiccare aii 204 Dates causadas 73 191 Date Format ini han kerni ieaiai aiak 200 Date Position on Side 2 ooooooccnnnnninnicnocconccnnco 209 Daylight Savings ooooooccccinnoccccconnconcccccn
357. rently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Off Allows you to change the memory capacity within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Memory Allows you to change the memory capacity within the range of 0 50 32 00 MB in 0 25 MB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Hard Disk Specifies the spool location to the hard disk Receiving Buffer IPP Spool Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for IPP interface The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB Off Allows you to change the memory capacity within the range of 64 1 024 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Hard Disk Specifies the spool location to the hard disk Receiving Buffer Ethertalk Allows you to change the input buffer memory capacity for Ethertalk interface within the range of 1 024 2 048 KB in 32 KB increments using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad The currently available memory will be displayed at the top of the screen with the following message Memory Available XXX MB 222 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Print Mode Settings Receiving Buffer Port9100 Allows you to change the input buffer memory capac
358. rlin 3 Select the required option a Hard Disk oe Mode Standby Auto Receive Machine Information Allows you to view user support information serial number of the machine as well as the machine configuration and the software version 1 Select Machine Information on the Machine Status screen 1 utton to return to the job programming screen Machine Information For enquiry on maintenance and operation Machine Configuration Call your local Service Representative m XXXXXX Serial Number Software Version XXXXXX B XX XX Machine Configuration Displays the Machine Configuration screen You can view the status of the machine components Software Version Displays the Software Version screen You can identify the software versions of the components of the machine Paper Tray Allows you to check the status of each paper tray including the bypass tray and the optional Tandem Tray Module It also displays the size type and remaining amount of media in each tray n utton to return to the job programming screen 1 Select Paper Tray on the Machine Status screen Paper Tray Items Status Filled Paper Size Paper Type Tray 1 OK 100 A4D Plain Tray 2 OK 25 AID Plain Tray 3 OK 75 851 Plain Tray 4 OK 50 A4D Plain Tray 5 Size Detect Plain 276 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 User Guide Machine Status Overwrite Ha
359. rt Edge to align to the short edge of the paper 142 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Print Driver Features Multiple Up Prints multiple documents onto one sheet of paper The machine automatically reduces enlarges the images as needed to fit on one page Poster Divides and enlarges a single image and prints it over multiple pages so that you can join all the pages to make one large poster Print Mode Specifies the resolution value for printing You can select Standard or High Resolution The higher the resolution selected the slower will be the speed of printing Contrast Adjusts the rate of change in brightness from white to black for printing Specify the rate that ranges from 100 to 100 using the keyboard or slider bar You can check the outcome of a changed settings using the picture quality image displayed on the left of the window Watermarks Makes settings for printing a watermark over a file Skip Blank Pages Does not print blank pages when printing documents that contain blank pages Draft Mode Prints the text and graphic in gray rather than black thus reducing the amount of toner used Notify Job End by E mail Specifies whether you want to be notified by e mail when your print job is finished Specify Job Owner Selects how the job owner is specified This job owner is used when print job tabulation functions are used Information on printing from UNIX
360. rvice The types of jobs you can manage using the Auditron Administration feature vary for print scan and fax services This section lists the items that can be managed for each service Print The items you can manage for print jobs using the Auditron Administration feature are as follows Authentication Manageable Sore Required UserType Items Regular Print Print driver for Yes Entered Pages sheets the machine Other print ze Unentered Pages sheets drivers Secure Print Store documents Yes Print documents No Entered Pages sheets Sample Print Sample Print Yes Entered Pages sheets store print documents Sample Print No Entered Pages sheets Print stored documents Delayed Print Store documents Yes 7 Print documents No Entered Pages sheets Charge Print Store documents No Print documents Yes Entered Pages sheets E mail Print ae Unentered Pages sheets 1 Authentication unnecessary when printing because a print job is authenticated when received by the machine 2 Printing available only if Non account Print is enabled in the CentreWare Internet Services Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Overview of Auditron Administration Fax The items you can manage for fax jobs using the Auditron Administration feature are as follows Jobs Authentication User Document Mana
361. rview of Auditron Administration This section is an overview of the Auditron Administration feature used with the machine Authentication and Auditron Administration The Auditron Administration feature operates in conjunction with the Authentication feature Two types of authentication are used Direct Authentication You can perform Auditron Administration using an Entered User Additionally fax jobs from a computer can be received after being authenticated by referencing the account information user ID password and user name The account information stored in the machine must also be set through the client fax driver For more information refer to Fax Driver On line Help Network Authentication You can perform Auditron Administration using the user information managed by a remote account server This is for unified management of user information and Auditron Administration by multiple devices Manageable Features and Services The following explains the features and services that you can manage using the Auditron Administration feature Features and Services that Can be Managed with Authentication The features and services that can be managed using the Authentication feature vary depending on whether the user information is stored in the machine or in a remote account server e Direct Authentication Network Authentication Direct Authentication The features and services that can be managed using th
362. ry data from the hard disk or documents in mailboxes 024 746 The selected option i e paper size document tray output tray or double sided printing is incompatible with the specified paper quality Check the print data 024 747 An illegal print parameter combination was set Check the print data For example a custom size was specified and Paper Supply was set to Auto In this case select the bypass tray 024 958 The document size set in the bypass tray was not consistent with the selected print size Check the document size then set the correct size of document or change the print size 024 985 An error occurred in the bypass tray Check the document size orientation and paper type and try again 024 966 Could not delete the job from CentreWare Internet Services Cancel the job pressing the lt C gt button on the control panel 027 452 The same IP address has been set twice Change the IP address 027 500 Could not determine the name of the SMTP server when reply e mail was transmitted Check from CentreWare Internet Services to see if the SMTP server is set correctly 027 501 Could not determine the name of the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol Check from CentreWare Internet Services to see if the POP3 server is set correctly 027 502 Could not log in to the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol Check from CentreWare Internet Services to see if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly
363. ry field After selecting this button select To CC BCC to switch the recipient type as necessary Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide 113 5 Scan E mail Sender Use this feature to add the sender s address to an address entry field Memory 100 1 Select Sender on the E mail screen Enter the recipient s address Select Sender as recipient 2 Select the required option 3 Select Save Ou To Adds the sender s address in the To field cc Adds the sender s address in the Cc field BCC Adds the sender s address in the Bcc field The address entered in this field is not displayed on the message received by the recipient Sender s Details Use this feature to add information in the message header sender s address subject reply to address and file name 1 Select Sender s Details on the J E mail screen and 2 Perform the necessary From crip Adress operations E mail Subject Auto Set tr Ser Reply To Not Set ARE 3 Select Save File Name Auto Set Address Book From Displays the preset sender s address To change the address select this entry field and then select Keyboard or Address Book E mail Subject To change the subject automatically assigned select this entry field and then select Keyboard Reply To Enter a reply to address After selecting t
364. s each group can contain up to 20 Address Numbers 1 Select Group Send on the Setup Menu screen 2 Select a group number 3 Select Create Delete 4 Enter a 3 digit Address Number using the numeric keypad on the control panel 5 Select Add Group Send Group Total Address Number 02 1 002 03 20 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 04 0 a8 05 2 001 002 y csentenetee Cancel Save Group 01 Create Delete Recipients Address No Total Entries 1 001 999 001 gt OOo Add Delete NOTE You can use an asterisk to specify multiple Address Numbers at a time If you enter 01 Address Numbers from 010 to 019 are specified If you enter all the Address Numbers are specified Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 255 11 Setups NOTE To delete a registered Address Number in a group enter the Address Number and then select Delete Comments Use this feature to register a comment to be used when attaching a cover note You can register up to 50 comments each comment can include up to 18 alphanumeric characters 1 Select Comments on the Setup Menu screen Comments 2 Perform the necessary No Comment 1 Report for Month operations 2 urgent confidential 3 Select Close Not in Use Not in Use J Create Delete
365. s 92 Send Options Fax Internet Fax cooooocccococococccoccconooononononnnnnonononononnoncnnnnnos 93 Communication MOde cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeneeeees 94 Priority Send Delayed Start ooooooccononicoccccnnnconanncanancconncnnnnannnnnnenns 94 A deviveretanssoe a a a a aa a aS 96 Cover Note veiens inaron eaa aa a aa a A aA 96 Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents oooocccncccccnncccnnccnncncancccninnnns 97 Transmission Report Read Receipts MDN and Delivery Receipts DSN usina ssl irradia 98 Recipient Prnt SETS turis dd caian 99 Remote MailboOx ccocococccocccnccnnccnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnonnnnnnnnconnnoninenonoss 100 ECO a a AA ea E bined 100 Internet Fax Profile oooooocoocccocccnccnncconccnnnnnnnnnncnonononcnnnnononoss 102 On hook Others Fax cccccecceeeccee cece eeee eee nin 103 POMC it ai 103 Store for PolliNg lt lt rides 104 On hook Manual Send Receive cooocccocococccccncccccccnnnnannncnnncncnnnnnnns 106 5 Sc Ea iii deba andadas ani 107 SCANNING Prod UTE ei 107 1 Load the Document oococccnccnnnnnncnnnnnninnnnnnnnnnnnnenineninineninineninininen 108 2 Select the Features ooocccccccnnccnncnnnccnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnininincnns 108 3 Start the Scan JOD ooccoooccicccocinicconcconcnnncnnnncnnnnnnnrnnnrnrnrnnr 109 4 Confirm the Scan Job in the Job Status oooooconiccnnnnniccncccnccncccn 109 5 Save the Scanned Data ooococicinicc
366. s Book on the Save in screen Address Book Cancel Save 2 Perfo rm th e necessa ry No Recipient Name Protocol Server IP Address 3 6 scan_server SMB scanserver xerox operations 3 Select Save Show Details Show Details Displays detailed settings of the selected server Detailed Settings Use this feature to assign a file name to a document to be scanned 1 Select Detailed Settings on the Save in screen Detailed Settings 2 Perform the necessary File Name Buesa ear ret operations File Name Conflict Change Narne Save i 3 Select Close 118 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Basic Scanning File Name Specify a file name to be assigned to the document A file name is automatically assigned by the machine To assign a different file name select Change Settings and use the displayed keyboard File Name Conflict Specify one of the following after selecting Change Settings If a file with the same name already exists at the destination the file will be processed according to this selection e Cancel Job Does not save the file in that destination Change Name and Save Saves the file under a different name A new file name is created by adding a 3 digit number e g 001 to the end of the current file name Overwrite Name and Save Overwrites the old file with the new file Clear Field Deletes the
367. s Log UserlD Error to be logged every 5 attempts 2 Perform the necessary caes arene operations Q sw 3 Select Save User ID Characters Displays the screen keyboard Enter a name to be displayed on the touch screen the browsing screen of the CentreWare Internet Services or printed on reports instead of a user ID This name can be up to 15 characters long Hide User ID Specify whether a user ID is to be displayed or hidden when it is entered Failed Access Log Displays the Failed Access Log screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 261 11 Setups Failed Access Log Screen With this feature enabled the machine records an error when the number of authentication failures exceeds the selected number within a certain period 1 Select Failed Access Log on the User Details Setup screen Use the Numeric Keypad to enter the maximum number of attempts Failed Access Log 2 Select On to enable the he a Enter the maximum number of 1 600 h feature O PED ieam ee it is logged as an error E Failed Attempts Use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select the maximum number of authentication failures to be allowed Charge Print Settings This feature allows you to specify how to treat the print jobs that are received when the machine is in the Auditron Administration mode 1 Select Charge Print Settings on the Login Setup Audi
368. s by their names or the dates they were last updated Selecting the same option again toggles the order in which they are listed as indicated with an upward ascending order or downward descending order triangle shown to the right of the name of the option selected Sheet Filtering Refer to Sheet Filtering on page 136 Create Allows you to create a new job flow sheet to be linked with the mailbox NOTE The job flow sheets you create on this screen can only be executed modified or deleted from this mailbox Show Details This option becomes active and selectable when you select a job flow sheet If you select this option you can view and or modify the processes registered in the selected job flow sheet For more information refer to Job Flow Sheets in the Setups chapter on page 247 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 137 6 Check Mailbox Edit Destination Refer to Job Flow Sheets in the Setups chapter on page 247 138 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 7 Stored Programming This chapter describes how to use the Stored Programming feature to simplify multiple operations into a simple procedure First you register a series of operations in a job number Later you can select the job number to execute the stored operations when required You can store operations both on the touch screen and the control panel up to immediately before pressing the lt Start
369. s the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry Mernory 100 To Image Quality Send Options On hook Others Q 2 Sided Originals 9 Bound Originals 9 Scan Size m 1 Sided m off a Auto Size Detect O Mixed Size Originals O Reduce Enlarge m off DB Auto Scan Options 2 Select Fax Internet Fax on the touch screen 3 Select the Scan Options tab 4 Select the required option Bound Originals Use this feature to scan facing pages of a bound document in the correct page sequence using the document glass The facing pages will be scanned as two separate pages 1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry Mernory 100 To cancel Save 2 Select the required options Qo Load your originals as shown below Bound Originals Left Page 3 Select Save O usr peso O Page then Left O 1 anaes Q Right Page Only NOTE The facing pages of a bound document must be placed in a horizontal orientation on the document glass Off Disables the feature Left Page then Right Scans both pages of an open book from left to right Right Page then Left Scans both pages of an open book from right to left Top Page then Bottom Scans both pages of an open book from top to bottom Both Pages Scans both pages of an open book and sends each pag
370. s the document in its original size Use Nearest Size Switches to the tray loaded with the paper in the size closest to the selected paper Image size may be automatically reduced as required NOTE The job sent from the PC takes priority over the job set on the machine Paper Type Mismatch Sets whether to display or hide the confirmation screen when a paper type mismatch occurs Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 223 11 Setups Unregistered Forms Sets whether to abort a job which is specified to use form overlay when the form is not found not registered in the machine Banner Sheet Sets whether to add sorting sheets banner sheets This is effective for sorting classifying to differentiate printed sheets from the rest You can add banner sheets before and or at the end of the print job NOTE Even if using the Finisher banner sheets will not be stapled Banner Sheet Tray Specifies a tray for the banner sheets PostScript Paper Supply Sets whether to use the DMS Deferred Media Selection feature of PostScript PostScript Font Absence Sets to replace the font automatically and continues the print job when the required font is not found NOTE This feature is available only when PostScript is loaded PostScript Font Substitution Sets whether to use ATCx for font replacement NOTE This feature is available only when PostScript is loaded Scan Mode Settings This scr
371. s the images as needed to print them on one page 1 Select Multiple Up on the Output Format screen 2 Select the required option Ow riage Ont 3 Select Save O O i Ott Ready to Copy Cancel nA 1 Up Disables the feature 2 Up Copies two documents onto one sheet of paper 4 Up Copies four documents onto one sheet of paper 8 Up Copies eight documents onto one sheet of paper Image Order Sets how to lay out the documents on a page For 2 Up you can select either Left to Right Head to Toe or Right to Left Head to Toe For 4 Up or 8 Up you can select either Left Start Horizontal Right Start Horizontal Left Start Vertical or Right Start Vertical Poster This feature allows you to divide and enlarge an original document and to copy each divided part onto multiple sheets of paper You can paste them all together to make one large poster 1 Select Poster on the Output Format screen Memory 100 Ready to Copy Sani 1 Quantity Poster 2 Perform the necessary o 00 400 operations ae i a 3 Select Save O Enlargement v v lw NOTE The machine automatically overlaps partitioned images when copying to allow for cutting and pasting The overlap width is set at 10 mm 0 4 inch Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 71 3 Copy Off Disables the feature Output Siz
372. s the print drivers and manages software Orientation is used to mean the direction of images on the page When the image is upright the paper or other media can be either long edge feed or short edge feed Long Edge Feed LEF When loading documents long edge feed into the document feeder load with one of the long edges facing into the document feeder The short edges appear at the top and bottom of the paper facing the front and back of the document feeder When loading paper long edge feed into a paper tray place the paper with one of the long edges on the left hand side and one of the short edges toward the front of the tray Short Edge Feed SEF When loading documents short edge feed into the document feeder load with one of the short edges facing into the document feeder The long edges appear on the top and bottom of the paper facing the front and back of the document feeder When loading 14 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Conventions paper short edge feed into a paper tray place the paper with one of the short edges on the left hand side and one of the long edges toward the front of the tray LEF Orientation SEF Orientation lt H A Paper feed direction Paper feed direction Text in Square Brackets Indicate that these are names of the screens tabs buttons features and option categories on the screen They are also used when referring to file and folder names ona PC
373. saved to RAM NV RAM backed up memory chips or the optional hard disk of the machine Enter a 12 digit encoding code using the screen keyboard The default encoding code is 111111111111 When the setting is changed the machine needs to be switched off and then on to make it effective Note that all data corresponding to the encoding then will be initialized NOTE Encrypted data cannot be recovered if a problem occurs in the hard disk Software Download Specify whether the machine is to allow software downloads Country Specify the country code for the line type used in your area NOTE When setting up Fax options users in European countries and North American countries may be required to set the country code for the line Also refer to Country Code for Fax Option on page 77 204 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Copy Mode Settings Copy Mode Settings This screen allows you to change the default settings for each copy feature There are five main setup options available for the copy mode For more information refer to the following NOTE Key Operator access is required for this feature Basic Copying Tab page 205 Copy Defaults page 206 Copy Control page 208 Original Size Defaults page 210 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 210 1 Select Copy Mode Settings on the System Settings screen Copy Mode Settings 2 Select the req u red option m Basic C
374. scale Use for documents containing shading or halftones Select this option when documents include images or shades of gray Text amp Photo Use for documents that contain both text and photographs Text and photographs are automatically identified and an appropriate quality mode is selected for individual areas Text Use for documents that contain text only Photo Use for documents that contain photographs only File Format Select the file format to save scanned data from the following options NOTE The selections for the feature are not displayed if you have selected Scan to Mailbox Memory 100 Use Address Book or Keyboard to enter the Save In location Lighten Darken 2 Sided Originals Original Type File Format EN si KDDeanyscale KDnutipage TIFF 4 XDD Sided HoH GD Tert amp Photo GA mr lt XDD Sided H to E Text Oro y Doe Pht JPEG Multi page TIFF Saves multiple pages into a single file in TIFF format TIFF Saves each page into a different file in TIFF format PDF Saves scanned data in PDF format 122 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Image Quality JPEG Saves scanned data in JPEG format Image Quality This section describes how to adjust the quality of scanned data such as contrast and sharpness For more information refer to the following Lighten Darken Contrast page 123 Sharpness page 123 Auto Exposure page
375. ser Guide On hook Others Fax Select all of the fax documents stored for polling when you want to delete or print all documents Delete Deletes the documents stored for polling Select the documents requiring deletion using the scroll buttons or Select All Print Prints out the documents stored for polling Select the documents you want to print using the scroll buttons or Select All Mailbox Screen You can specify the mailbox for storing documents or confirm the status of stored documents in the mailbox 1 Select Save in Private Memory 100 Select a Mailbox to store documents Mailbox on the Store for Polling screen 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Save Go to The mailbox number you entered in this field is displayed at the top of the list You can specify the number using the numeric keypad on the control panel Document List Displays Mailbox Document List to confirm or delete documents in a mailbox For more information refer to Document List in the Check Mailbox chapter on page 134 NOTE If the machine s memory is full when trying to store a document for polling cancel the operation and try again later when more memory is available NOTE You can send an Internet Fax document to a mailbox on a remote machine Specify the required mailbox on the remote machine s e mail address as follows BOX1230wcm128 xerox com Where 123 The mailbox
376. set Original Type or Lighten Darken features as follows Original Type page 90 Lighten Darken page 90 Memory 100 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Original Type Q Lighten Darken m Text amp Photo Normal Image Quality 2 Select Fax Internet Fax on the touch screen 3 Select the Image Quality tab 4 Select the required option Original Type This feature allows you to select the type of document you are scanning This is the same feature found in the Basic Features tab of Fax Internet Fax For more information refer to Original Type on page 89 Lighten Darken This feature allows you to adjust the density of the scanned image in seven levels Use the scroll buttons to increase or decrease the darkness Enter recipient Use C button to can To Memory 100 Lighten Darken Lighter Normal Darker Scan Options Fax Internet Fax This section describes features to adjust the layout on the Scan Options screen For information on the features available refer to the following 2 Sided Originals page 88 Bound Originals page 91 Scan Size page 92 Mixed Size Originals page 92 90 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Options Fax Internet Fax Reduce Enlarge page 92 1 Pres
377. signed to an address using the numeric keypad on the control panel Show Details Displays detailed information on the selected address Local Address List Displays the list of addresses registered in the local address book on the machine Selectable when the remote address book is displayed on the screen Local Search Displays the Address Book screen for searching the local address book on the machine Remote Search Directory Svc Displays the Address Book screen for searching the remote address book on the directory server Selectable when the local address book is displayed on the screen Address Book Screen Use this feature to search the address book You can select a destination from search results Memory 100 1 Select Local Search or Remote Search on the Address Book screen Local Address Book Next Recipient Local Address List Recipient Name 2 Perform the necessary Email Address TE O pe rati ons Custom Item None Local Search Enter Change E E Remote Search 3 Select Search Now nercianas Search Now rectory Sve For more information on keyboard entry refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 NOTE If you specify keywords in multiple fields the machine searches for entries that match all the keywords specified Recipient Name Select to use part of aname as a keyword The machine searches for a first name last name or a nickn
378. size orientation currently loaded in Tray 5 Bypass is different from the setting or The paper size orientation in Tray X is different from the selected size Load xxx on the touch screen open the Finisher Top Cover and remove the wrong size paper load the correct size paper in a tray and restart the job If you simply replace the paper in a tray and resume the job without removing the processed paper in the finisher the machine will staple the wrong size paper still in the finisher and the correct size paper from the tray together Ready to Copy Quantit Quantity Basic Copying Reduce Enlarge 2 Sided Copy Output ae o lt il D 1 1 Sided Dro Dr DD 2H tom KDD ro Left KDDs aas E GB Hite DD staples Lef I Gam sa esr 2 1 ton rom Right Doe Dv Davor EB Were Auto Automatically applies either Collated or Uncollated for sorting copy output The Collated option is applied when you use the document feeder or you have enabled Bound Originals Covers Blank Separators N Sets Stapling Build Job Sample Set or Booklet Creation For all other options Uncollated is applied Top Left Staples the top left corner of the output 54 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Copying 2 Staples Left Staples two positions on the left of the output Top Right Staples the top right corner of the output More D
379. st of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 27 1 Before Using the Machine 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER
380. sted to and is compliant with TBR21 a specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area This product provides an user adjustable setting of the country code Refer to the customer documentation for this procedure Country codes should be set prior to connecting this product to the network NOTE Although this product can use either loop disconnect pulse or DTMF tone signaling it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup Modification of this product connection to external control software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox will invalidate its certification Regulatory Information for RFID This product generates 13 56 MHz using an Inductive Loop System as a radio frequency identification system device RFID This system is certified in compliance with European Council Directive 99 5 EC and applicable local laws or regulations as applicable Environmental Compliance USA Energy Star OS A As an ENERGY STAR partner Xerox Corporation Fuji Xerox has determined that the basic configuration of this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency The ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR MARK are registered United States trademarks The ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is a team effort between U S European Union and Japanese governments and the of
381. switch 2cm top Not Set between screens 3 Machine Password 01234567890123456789 4 G3 Line O Ext Fax ID Not Set J 3 Perform the necessary 5 G3 Line 0 Ext Dial T Tone a operations 4 Select Close Local Name Registers the local name so that the remote machine can identify your machine Up to 20 characters can be entered using the screen keyboard on the touch screen The local name will be shown in the display or communication management report of the destination For information on the screen keyboard refer to Keyboard in the Fax Internet Fax chapter on page 83 Company Logo Registers the sender name company logo Up to 30 characters can be entered using the screen keyboard on the touch screen The sender name is printed in the Send Header or Cover Note 236 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Mode Settings Machine Password Registers the password to restrict the remote machines which send documents By setting a machine password your machine can accept receiving or polling only from remote machines that send a correct machine password in F Code Up to 20 digits can be set using the screen keyboard on the touch screen Permissible characters are O to 9 and space When using this feature you cannot receive documents from remote machines without the F Code function Internet Fax Control Use this feature to define Internet Fax control functions s
382. systems if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate NOTE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalent Numbers of all of the devices does not exceed 5 The Canadian REN value of this equipment is 0 1 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 23 1 Before Using the Machine EUROPE Radio Equipment 8 Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive This Xerox product has been self certified by Xerox for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the following countries Austria Germany Luxembourg Sweden Belgium Greece Netherlands Switzerland Denmark Iceland Norway United Kingdom France Ireland Portugal Finland Italy Spain In the event of a problem you should contact your authorized local dealer in the first instance This product has been te
383. t Report press the lt Start gt button on the control panel to output the Sele win Billing Meter 3 Select Error History Report and eon report Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 283 13 Machine Status 284 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use functions and an Auditron Administration feature that manages the use of each machine feature This chapter contains information for Key Operators on the features used to change the settings and on the setting procedures Overview of Authentication page 285 Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox page 288 Overview of Auditron Administration page 298 Overview of Authentication This section is an overview of the Authentication feature used with the machine Users Controlled by Authentication The following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the Authentication feature Users are classified into the following four types The Authentication feature restricts operations according to the user type e Key Operators Entered Users Unentered Users e General Users Key Operators These are users who can enter and change system settings A Key Operator uses a special user ID called a Key Operator ID T
384. t If you select 12 Hour Clock the buttons for specifying AM or PM are displayed The time set here is printed on lists and reports Time Zone Set the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings With this feature enabled the machine automatically adjusts the current time when Daylight Savings time starts and ends Specify the start and end dates of Daylight Savings time Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 191 11 Setups Auto Clear With this feature enabled the machine displays the default screen if you do not perform any operation within the selected period of time You can select the time period in the range from 1 to 4 minutes The time entry field appears only when you select On NTP Time Synchronization With this feature enabled the Network Time Protocol NTP is used to synchronize the time of the machine with that of the specified time server NOTE If the time server connection fails the machine uses its own time without synchronization Connection to Time Server Specify whether to disable or enable this feature Connection Interval Select the time span for being connected to the specified server in the range from 1 to 500 hours Time Server IP Address Specify the IP address of the time server using the numeric keypad on the control panel Auto Job Release Auto Print With this feature enabled if a problem such as a paper jam interrupts t
385. t On on the Comment 1 A 3 confidential screen 4 Not in Use 5 Not in Use ly 4 Select a comment from the comment list using the scroll buttons 5 Select Save Off Disables the feature On Adds the selected Comment 1 No Comment Allows you to select a comment from the list of comments already registered For information on how to register comments refer to Comments in the Setups chapter on page 256 Comment 2 Screen The procedures are the same as the Comment 1 screen Transmission Report Read Receipts MDN and Delivery Receipts DSN These features allow you to print the transmission results report and or receive a notification e mail that the Internet Fax you sent has been opened by the recipient MDN Mail Delivery Notification or delivered to the destination DSN Delivery Status Notification Whether to use Read Receipts MDN or Delivery Receipts DSN can be selected on the Internet Fax Control screen in the Fax Mode Settings For more information refer to Other Settings in the Setups chapter on page 220 Transmission Report is used for regular faxes and Read Receipts MDN and Delivery Receipts DSN are used for Internet Fax if the remote machine supports these features 98 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Send Options Fax Internet Fax 1 Select Report Read Receipts or Report Send Receipts on Nex
386. t button once on the control panel to cancel any previous selections 4 Perform the necessary operations 108 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128133 User Guide Scanning Procedure If necessary press one of the tabs and configure the scan settings For information on the individual tabs refer to the following E mail page 111 Save in Scan to Mailbox page 115 Job Templates Network Scanning page 116 Save in Scan to FTP SMB page 117 Basic Scanning page 119 Image Quality page 123 Scan Options page 124 Output Format page 128 3 Start the Scan Job 1 Press the lt Start gt button to scan x o the documents O O O O NOTE If the Authentication feature O S is enabled you may be required to x enter the user ID and password if set up If you need assistance O COS lt Start gt Z S eee contact the Key Operator O OOO bution 4 Confirm the Scan Job in the Job Status 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel to display the Job Status screen C Pending Jobs ogramming screen Print Documents Waiting Jobs Doc No Job Type Status Remote Terminal Contents Progress 00002 Scan Job Scanning A4D 100 141 A The queued scan job will be displayed If no job is displayed on the screen it may have already been processed g For more information refer to
387. t 7 Automatic No Incoming Receptions pages confidential Internet Fax receiving Printing confidential Yes Entered Printed pages sheets documents Forward Receiving relayed No Incoming Receptions pages Internet Internet Fax Internet Fax Fax documents Document s Automatic fax No Incoming Sent faxes pages forwarding Internet Fax forwarded faxes transmissions 1 If Print Service on the Auditron Mode screen is set to Off in the Key Operator mode no authentication is required to access mailboxes shared by Key Operators and the machine will print the job as unauthenticated When using the Authentication and Auditron Administration features for fax jobs note the following Sending documents from different user accounts to the same destination will not be counted as combined sending The communication rate is calculated using the machine s built in timer Accordingly the fees calculated may be slightly different from those calculated by the telephone company When you receive faxes divided into pages the machine counts the page numbers received instead of the page numbers printed Fax jobs are not counted in the following cases When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel or the On hook feature When using a speed dial code in which the billing information is not registered When a phone conversation took place including the one before a transmission
388. t Name This feature allows you to set e mail address host name or domain name for the machine 1 Select Machine E mail Address Host Name on the Network Settings screen 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close E mail Address Choose an item and select Change Settings Machine E mail Address Host Name Items Current Settings 1 E mail Address smtpMail Address 2 Host Name serverHostName 3 Domain Name serverDomainMame Change Settings Allows you to enter the e mail address of the machine up to 128 characters Host Name Allows you to enter the host name of the machine up to 64 characters Domain Name Allows you to enter the domain name of the machine up to 64 characters 216 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Network Settings POP3 Server Settings This feature allows you to set up the POP3 server settings such as port number IP address server name and password 1 Select POP3 Sever Settings on the Network Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings POP3 Server Settings 2 Perform the necessary repo cayenne operations 2 POPS Server P Adress Not Se 3 S l t Cl 3 POP3 Server Name Not Set J elec osej 4 POP3 Server Port Number no 5 POP3 Server Check Interval 10 Minutes y POP3 Server Setup Select the method of specifying the PO
389. t Recipient E Line Transmission Report Read Receipts MDN Cancel Save the Send Options screen Transmission Report Read Receipts MDN The Transmission Report feature automatically prints a report after each fax transmission H A indicating the transmission result 2 Select the re uired O tion fi ff The Read Receipts feature is used to request off Ol q the iFax recipient to send a confirmation mail to the sender indicating the iFax transmission 3 Select Save result On On The recipient s server must support the MDN standard Transmission Report Off Disables the feature On Outputs the result after the transmission is completed Read Receipts MDN or Delivery Receipts DSN e Off Disables the feature e On Requests the mail delivery notification Recipient Print Sets This feature allows you to specify the number of copies the remote machine will output The number of copies can be between 1 and 99 NOTE This feature is not available for Internet Fax transmissions and supported only on Xerox machines 1 Select Recipient Print Sets on the Send Options screen Enter recipient Use C button to To Recipient Print Sets 2 Perform the necessary O a n operations e A B 3 Select Save gt 1 Set The remote machine will output one copy Multiple Sets Allows you to specify the number of copies the remote machine will output When you select
390. t and photographs are automatically identified and an appropriate quality mode is selected for individual areas Photo Use this option to copy documents that contain photographs only Pencil Text Use this option to copy documents written in pencil These images are light and difficult to see and are therefore printed darker Lighten Darken This feature allows you to select the density for copying documents 1 Select Lighten Darken on the Image Quality screen Ready to Copy Cancel Lighten Darken 2 Select the density level Lighter 3 Select Save Normal Darker Sharpness This feature allows you to increase or decrease the sharpness level of fine lines and edges 1 Select Sharpness on the Image Quality screen Ready to Copy Sharpness Cancel 2 Select the sharpness level 3 Select Save Sharper A Normal Softer y Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 57 3 Copy Auto Exposure This feature allows you to specify whether or not to suppress the background color of documents when copying NOTE This feature is disabled when selecting Photo on the Original Type screen 1 Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality screen 2 Select On to enable the feature 3 Select Save Scan Options Copy Ready to Copy Auto Exposure This feature
391. t in the Job Status chapter on page 271 Sample Print This feature allows you to print one set of a document prior to printing the whole quantity You can choose whether or not to print more sets of the same document A user ID and a password are required to access the stored document and the number of sets can be specified from the PC For more information refer to Sample Print in the Job Status chapter on page 272 e Delayed Print This feature allows you to print documents at the specified time within 24 hours The documents will be printed automatically at the specified time For more information refer to Delayed Print in the Job Status chapter on page 272 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 141 8 Print e PCL emulation This feature allows you to print documents from a PC not supported by the supplied PCL print driver according to the emulation parameters i e paper size set on the machine For information on how to set parameters for PCL emulation refer to PCL Emulation in the Machine Status chapter on page 277 For the list of parameters and their values for PCL emulation refer to PCL Emulation on page 144 PDF direct printing This feature allows you to bypass print driver software and send PDF files directly to the machine for printing according to the emulation parameters set on the machine For information on how to set emulation parameters for PDF direct printing refer to P
392. t s NOTE The documents stored in a private mailbox by scanning cannot be printed Job Flow Settings Displays the Job Flow Settings screen Job Flow Settings Screen This screen allows you to set modify or release linkage with a job flow sheet You can also execute the linked job flow sheet from this screen A job flow sheet allows you to process the documents stored in private mailboxes You can link a mailbox to a job flow sheet in advance to automatically execute the job flow sheet when a new document is saved in the mailbox or you can manually start a job flow sheet as necessary NOTE The job flow sheet you created from this screen can be executed modified duplicated or deleted only from the private mailbox in which it was created This job flow sheet is not displayed on the Job Flow Sheets screen in Setup Menu on the All Services screen NOTE The job flow sheet feature is available only when the hard disk is installed on the machine 134 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Check Mailbox NOTE The job flow sheet feature is available only when the optional hard disk is installed on the machine You can register the following types of document processing in a job flow sheet e Specifying destinations FTP SMB e mail fax and Internet Fax e Specifying multiple destinations and processing e Printing e Deleting automatically after specified days e Deleting The
393. te per unit of fax transmissions NOTE This button is displayed with Key Operator access 1 Select Fax Billing Data on the Login Setup Auditron TTR Administration screen hosts Current Settings 1 Charge Rate per Unit 1 Unit 10 0 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close Charge Rate per Unit Allows you to specify the charge rate per unit in 0 1 increments using the numeric keypad on the screen Remote Login Setup This feature allows you to configure the authentication settings for scan services which utilize the network resources with the exception of the Scan to Mailbox service The available authentication service is Kerberos 1 Select Remote Login Setup on the Login Setup Auditron Administration screen Remote Login Setup o O On Including Guests 2 Select the required option 3 Select Save Off Disables the remote authentication service On Requires authentication via a remote authentication server On Including Guests Requires authentication via a remote authentication server In addition the Guest user account is enabled Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 263 11 Setups Login Setup Auditron Mode This screen allows you to enable or disable the Auditron Administration feature and specify the types of jobs that require authentication 1 Select Login Setup Auditron Mode o
394. ter Displays the Booklet Creation Gutter screen Covers Displays the Booklet Creation Covers screen Originals Displays the Booklet Creation Originals screen Booklet Creation Gutter Screen Allows you to specify the amount of inside margin in 1 mm 0 1 inch increments between 0 to 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 67 3 Copy 1 Select Booklet Creation Gutter on the Booklet Creation Pera creation Gutter A screen E Ready to Copy 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Save Booklet Creation Covers Screen Allows you to select the required option to add a cover sheet to the booklet 1 Select Booklet Creation Covers on the Booklet oi Creation screen di J Paper Tray Settings 2 Select the required option OQ Qo Body Pages Tray Covers Tray 3 Select Save O O KA A Plain Plain Off Makes a booklet without a cover sheet On Adds a cover sheet to the booklet from the cover stock tray When selected the Printed Covers option becomes available Printed Covers e Off Adds a blank cover to the booklet automatically On Copies the first page of the set of documents onto the cover stock You must add blank sheets to the set of documents if you want only the front or the back covers to be printed Paper Tray Settings Displays the Bookl
395. the IP address allocated to the printer in the xxx xxx xxx xxx format Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask in the xxx xxx xxX XXX format Gateway Address Enter the gateway address in the XXX XXX XXX XXX format DNS Allows you to configure DNS settings as follows e Get DNS Address Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the DNS server address via DHCP DNS Address 1 3 Enter the DNS address 1 DNS address 2 and DNS address 3 in the xxx xxX xxX XXX format DNS Name Enter the DNS domain name e Generate Domain Search List Automatically Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting to generate the domain search list Domain Name 1 3 Enter the domain name for domain name 1 domain name 2 and domain name 3 e Connection Time Out Allows you to specify the time out period when searching the domain e Dynamic DNS Update Allows you to enable or disable the dynamic DNS update WINS Server e Get WINS Server Address Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary WINS server address via DHCP Primary WINS Server Address Enter the primary WINS address in the xxx xxx xxx xxx format Secondary WINS Server Address Enter the secondary backup WINS address in the xxx xxx xxx xxx format 172 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Protocol S
396. the communication mode used for transmission to a remote fax machine from G3 or F4800 Communications network which can offer audio data telephone image data fax picture data videotext and PC data PC communication service over the same channel In this guide referred to as transmitting and receiving images as well as speaking with a remote user The intensity of the display of an image or the degree of difference between the gray tones on a document page See also Halftone and Photo Groups of copies of a multi page set of documents If you have a four page document and you want to make 10 copies of a document you will be making 10 copy sets Card or paper used to add to the front or back of a copy set A screen displayed immediately after switching on the power or pressing the Clear All button The screen is also displayed when the Auto Clear feature is used The settings used by the machine when the user does not specify settings Values set on a preset screen Programming that enables the machine to process a document at a later time To use a telephone number for document transmission The methods of dialing provided by the machine include manual dialing using the numeric keypad speed dialing and using the Address Book etc Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 18 Glossary Dial Tone Dial Type Direct Fax Document Document Feeder Double sided DPI Drum
397. the screen should appear when scanning is finished If you select Hide Message and Screen no message is displayed when scanning is finished Fax Mode Settings This screen allows you to change the default settings for the fax mode There are eight main setup options available For more information refer to the following Screen Defaults page 229 Fax Defaults page 230 Fax Control page 231 File Destination Output Destination page 234 Reduce Enlarge Presets page 235 Scan Size Defaults page 235 Local Terminal Information page 236 Internet Fax Control page 237 1 Select Fax Mode Settings on the System Settings screen 2 Select the required option 3 Select Close Screen Defaults Fax Mode Settings B Screen Defaults J Fax Defaults a Fax Control File Destination m Output Destination m Reduce Enlarge Presets D Scan Size Defaults Local Ton asia Fax Control Information Use this feature to define the initial settings for the fax feature screens to suit your needs 1 Select Screen Defaults on the Fax Mode Settings screen 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Perform the necessary operations Choose an item and select Change Settings Screen Defaults Items Current Settings 1 Fax Screen Default 2 Address Book Default 1 3 Transmission Screen Off Change Settings Xerox Copy
398. the screen type settings Image Enhancement Allows you to specify whether to enable or disable image enhancement Resolution Allows you to specify the resolution Bypass Tray Wait User Allows you to specify whether to enable disable this feature when the Tray 5 Bypass is selected TIFF Allows you to configure the settings when TIFF is enabled Logical Printer Number Enter the logical printer number and click the Edit button Memory Settings Allows you to select a memory setting when the machine is switched off on Document Size Allows you to select image size or standard size Paper Tray Allows you to select the paper tray Output Size Allows you to select the paper size Output Destination Allows you to select the destination for your output Print Quantity Setup Allows you to select the Print Quantity Setup that has priority over other settings Quantity Enter the number of sets to print when stored jobs is selected for Print Quantity Setup 2 Sided Print Allows you to select whether to print on both sides of paper Origin Allows you to specify the origin of the coordinates Image Orientation Allows you to select the orientation of the document Multiple Up Allows you to specify settings for Multiple Up Zoom Allows you to specify the zoom ratio Variable Y Allows you to specify the Y between 25 and 100 176 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCe
399. thentication when an attempt is made to print out or retrieve documents stored in mailboxes 264 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Login Setup Auditron Administration Password Specify whether to require password entry at the time of authentication Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 265 11 Setups 266 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 12 Job Status This chapter contains information on the job status screens and the features available Job Status This feature allows you to check the progress of a job or display the log and detailed information of completed jobs The newest job will be displayed at the top of the list It can also check delete or print various special printings or the documents in the public mailbox of the machine Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens For more information on each button refer to the following Current and Pending Jobs page 268 Completed Jobs page 269 Stored Documents page 270 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button sn x o on the control panel A O O O O Press the lt Features gt or lt All D Services gt button at any time to o gt A S are yea eres o ox gt lt Job Status gt C OOO button AN O COCO 2 Select the required option to return to the job programming screen re C
400. thority for information In some Member States when you purchase new equipment your local retailer may be required to take back your old equipment free of charge Please ask your retailer for information Other Countries Please contact your local waste authorities and request disposal guidance Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 31 1 Before Using the Machine 32 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 2 Product Overview This machine is not simply a conventional copier but a digital device capable of copying faxing printing and scanning depending on the configuration The touch screens shown in this manual are from a fully configured machine to cover all the features The content of the touch screens may vary slightly depending on Key Operator settings and machine configuration The button names and icons on the control panel also vary depending on machine configuration However machine features described here remain the same For more information on available options not described here visit the Xerox website or contact your Xerox Sales Representative Machine Components The following diagrams show the standard and optional components of the machine Configuration may vary depending on the model Document Feeder Document Glass under the Document Feeder SER is Control Panel a gt DSS Touch Screen Xa Poni oi Swich
401. tically 168 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Port Status Port Status Allows you to select whether to enable or disable different ports used on the machine Parallel Allows you to select the check box to enable USB Allows you to select the check box to enable EtherTalk Allows you to select the check box to enable SMB Allows you to select check box to enable You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select the check box of TCP IP and or NetBEUI NetWare Allows you to select check box to enable You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select the check box of IPX SPX and or TCP IP LPD Allows you to select the check box to enable SNMP Allows you to select the check box to enable You can also configure the transport protocol to be used To enable the transport protocol select the check box of UDP and or IPX IPP Allows you to select the check box to enable Port9100 Allows you to select the check box to enable UPnP Allows you to select the check box to enable FTP Client Allows you to select the check box to enable Receive E mail Allows you to select the check box to enable Send E mail Allows you to select the check box to enable Mail Notice Service Allows you to select the check box to
402. tion outside of your building Always locate the equipment in an area that has adequate ventilation and space for servicing See installation instructions for minimum dimensions Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for your Xerox Fuji Xerox equipment Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning Do Not Do These Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet Never attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the customer documentation This equipment should not be placed in a built in unit unless proper ventilation is provided Please contact your authorized local dealer for further information Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers Never locate the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings Never override or cheat any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 19 1 Before Using the Machine Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and contact your local Xerox Fuji Xerox Service Representative or Service Provider immediat
403. to suspend the current copy job NOTE Select the lt Start gt button on the control panel to resume the suspended copy job 2 If required press lt Job Status gt button to display the Job Status screen To exit the Job Status screen press the lt Features gt button 3 Press the lt C gt button on the control panel to delete the suspended copy job Basic Copying o OPO AC E E CE lt Stop gt button o lt C gt button Cur Pending Jobs Doc No Job Type Status Or rn to the job programming screen Stored Documents Remote Terminal Contents Print Waiting Jobs 00002 Copy Job Scanning A4D 100 Progress gt J This section describes the basic features for a copy job on the Basic Copying screen For information on the features available refer to the following Reduce Enlarge page 50 Paper Supply page 51 2 Sided page 53 Copy Output page 54 1 Press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel 2 Select Copy on the touch screen Ensure that the Basic Copying screen is displayed 3 Select the required option Ready to Copy Quantity 1 Basic Copying Image Quality EEE Job Assembly z Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply a Duu A Gnu 43245 Deo Ca 43244 Des e More e More 2 Sided EA sis D HoH B22 Ho De 0H Crore Copy Output Dro
404. to 40 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen For more information refer to Attribute Name of Custom ltem 2 on page 241 Custom Item 3 Enter supplemental information such as an address up to 60 characters NOTE This item can be renamed on the Address Search Directory Service screen For more information refer to Attribute Name of Custom ltem 3 on page 241 254 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Setup Menu With Server selected Item Description Default Recipient Name Enter a recipient name up to 18 characters Transfer Protocol Select FTP or SMB as the transfer FTP protocol Server Name IP Address Enter the name and IP address of the destination server Shared Name SMB Only Enter a name assigned for sharing a folder Save In Specify the location or path of the directory for saving documents Login Name Enter a log in name if required by the destination server Password Enter a password if required by the destination server Port Number Select an appropriate port number to be used Group Send Use this feature to group multiple Address Numbers Documents are then sent to all Address Numbers registered under a group number when the group number is specified You can register Address Numbers under up to 50 group number
405. to print more sets after checking the print result A user ID and a password are required to access the stored document and the number of copies can be specified from the print driver 1 Select Sample Print on the Stored Documents screen Select the User ID you want to check Sample Print 001 Jane Smith Refresh Brings the information up to date Go to Use this field to specify the Sample Print number to be displayed at the top of the screen You can set the number within the range of 1 to 200 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad Document List You can select a user ID from the list and this option to display the documents for the user ID specified in the print driver Use the following options to output or delete the documents e Select All Selects all documents in the list Print Prints a document selected in the list After printing the documents are deleted e Delete Deletes a document selected in the list Delayed Print The documents with the start time for printing as specified from the print driver can be stored in the machine You can confirm or output the stored documents before the specified time You can also delete the stored job 1 Select Delayed Print on the Stored Documents screen Current Time 1255 PM Delayed Print __ Refresl LJ Case J No Document Name Print Time Pages No of Docs 1 1 Report for month 125 AM 2l i a
406. to specify whether to enable the IPP port EtherTalk Use this feature to specify whether to enable the EtherTalk port Salutation Use this feature to specify whether to enable the Salutation port This setting item is available only when the hard disk is installed on the machine Port9100 Use this feature to specify whether to enable the Port9100 port SNMP Use this feature to specify whether to enable the SNMP agent FTP Client Use this feature to specify whether to enable the FTP Client port This setting item is available only when the hard disk is installed on the machine 214 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Network Settings Receive E mail Use this feature to specify whether to enable the mail receiving port Send E mail Use this feature to specify whether to enable the mail transmission port Mail Notice Service Use this feature to specify whether to enable the mail notification service UPnP Discovery Use this feature to specify whether to enable the UPnP port Internet Services HTTP Use this feature to specify whether to enable the Internet Services port Port Status Specify whether to enable the Internet Services port Internet Services Port Number Specify the port number for Internet Services from 0 80 or any port from 8000 to 9999 Protocol Settings This feature allows you to configure the machine settings that correspond with the protocol being used 1 Select Pro
407. tocol Settings on the Network Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Protocol Settings 2 Perform the necessary i dics A i 1 Ethernet Setting 10BASE T Half Duplex operations 2 TCP P Get IP Address DHCP E 3 TCP IP IP Address DHCP in Progress 3 Select Close 3 4 TCP P Subnet Mask DHCP in Progress 5_TCP IP Gateway Address DHCP in Progress ly Ethernet Setting Specify the Ethernet port speed according to the network environment to which the machine is connected TCP IP Get IP Address Specify the method of obtaining an IP address for the machine TCP IP IP Address Allows you to enter the IP address in the form of vvwv xxx yyy zzz The IP address entry is required when selecting Manual on the TCP IP Get IP Address screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 215 11 Setups TCP IP Subnet Mask Allows you to enter the subnet mask in the form of vwv xxx yyy Zzz TCP IP Gateway Address Allows you to enter the gateway address in the form of vvv xxX yyy ZZZ TCP IP IP Filter Specify whether to restrict the remote machines which send print jobs using LPD HTTP SSL TLS Communication Specify whether to enable the SSL TLS communication HTTP SSL TLS Port Number Allows you to enter the port number for the SSL TLS communication within the range of 443 8000 9999 Machine E mail Address Hos
408. ton on the back of the machine is not in the tripped popped up position Push the button to reset Check that the AC outlet is supplying voltage Connect another appliance to the outlet to verify the voltage supply The document will not feed through the document feeder Check that the document feeder is not overloaded The document feeder can hold a maximum of 50 sheets Check that the document is fully inserted into the document feeder The machine does not display the Tandem Tray Module or one of the paper trays as one the Paper Supply selections Check that no paper trays are open If a tray is ajar the machine cannot sense its connection Open and close each paper tray and the Tandem Tray Module If this does not rectify the problem then power the machine off and then on The machine does not display the Finisher Stapler option Check that the cables from the finisher are securely connected to the machine Slide the Finisher into its correct position The machine configures itself when additional options are attached The machine does not accept documents into memory Check with the Key Operator about available memory If the memory is almost full print and delete unnecessary files The machine displays a memory full error message Check with the Key Operator about available memory Divide the remaining pages of the job into several small jobs and run the job again
409. tre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Scan Options Copy used documents will be copied according to the specified size regardless of their actual size Memory 100 1 Select Original Size on the Scan Options screen Ready to Copy Quanti Quantity Original Size 2 Select the required option O O O 3 Select Save a gt gt Q or Qu O Auto Size Detect Automatically detects the size of standard sized documents Presets Select from the 11 preset standard sizes in portrait or landscape orientations The presets are set up by the Key Operator Custom Specify the document size manually using scroll buttons within the ranges of 15 297 mm 0 6 11 7 inches for width and 15 432 mm 0 6 17 0 inches for length Mixed Size Originals This feature allows you to load different size documents in the document feeder at the same time NOTE To enable the feature select Auto Size Detect on the Original Size screen NOTE To use this feature the document orientation must be specified to indicate top of the document in Original Orientation on the Output Format screen NOTE When loading standard size documents you may still see a message asking you to manually input the document size Follow the messages to input the size manually Load mixed size documents short edge first 1 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen Ready to Copy
410. trolled by Authentication ooooooocccccnnnccccccccocccccncnnnnnnos 286 Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox oooooooonocccnnnnnccccccccncos 288 Job Flow Sheet Types nce Bae ee oa ah eae Oak 288 Types Ol Wall DOK CS uc sc ceced ety ee athe lad ies Ae 292 Linking Job Flow Sheets to Mailboxes 296 Overview of Auditron Administration oooococccnnnccnoncccocccccccnnnannaancncncnnnnos 298 Authentication and Auditron AdministratiON oooonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 298 Manageable Features and Services cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 15 MaiNCON AN CC eats cccscicvsstecesccceececseecsecstisvedtseissdsuvstit ciberrbesvved ses Seeunteietet s 305 Ordering SUPPNES ise 5s leashes hence leadeenes da datos 305 Cleaning the Machi acaso eigatintiasdaceacapeatacd 305 The Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass 306 The Control Panel and Touch Screen ooococccccccnncccocancnncnnnnnononanannnnos 306 The Document Feeder and Output Trays cocccconnonconccccncncccncnannnnnnos 306 Replacing the Drum Cartridge ocaso biie 306 Removing the Old Drum Cartridge coomoninnnccccninnconnsnacrnonnnnninananano 306 Recycling the Drum Cartridge 222 c cccesccsecceeeeeeeeseeeeneneeeenenteeees 307 Inserting the New Drum Cartridge ccoooocooonccccnnccccconnccanccncncnnnnnnns 308 Replacing the Toner Cartridge iiccocosiorr tiritas 309 Removing the Old Toner Cartridge ooooocoooccccnnnncccnnncccon
411. tron Choose an tem and select Change Settings Charge Print Settings Administration screen ies Caran Setini According to Print Auditron 2 Perform the necessary 2 Docurnent Expiry Date Off operations Change 3 Select Close Receive Control Allows you to specify the receiving control for externally submitted jobs According to Print Auditron The receiving control depends on the setting made on the machine The Job Login Failure options are displayed Save All Saves all jobs to be received Job Login Failure Specifies how to treat the print jobs with a user ID or password authentication failure If you select Save All all jobs are saved If you select Cancel Job job receipt will be rejected Job without User ID Specifies how to treat the jobs without a user ID If you select Save All all jobs are saved If you select Cancel Job job receipt will be rejected Document Expiry Date Allows you to specify the storage period for the authenticated print jobs Documents kept for Specify the storage period within the range of 1 14 days Documents deleted at Specify the time to delete jobs when storage period expires You can set the time in the ranges of 0 23 hours and 0 59 minutes 262 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Login Setup Auditron Administration Fax Billing Data This feature allows you to set the charge ra
412. ts North 8 South America 6R1184 Europe Asia amp Africa 6R1183 All Countries 6R1182 Only for selected Xerox maintenance agreements Removing the Old Toner Cartridge 1 Pull the front cover towards you to open it 2 Pull the toner cartridge out until you can lift the handle on top of the cartridge Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 309 15 Maintenance 3 Hold the handle and remove the cartridge from the machine NOTE Hold the empty cartridge away from you to avoid spilling any toner residue Inserting the New Toner Cartridge 1 Remove the new toner cartridge from the box Before removing it from its bag vigorously shake the cartridge from side to side 2 Place the cartridge in position as shown and slide it into the machine until it clicks 3 Close the front cover Loading Staples The finisher contains an automatic stapler The stapler cartridge contains 5 000 staples When the machine runs out of the staples a message is displayed on the touch screen When this message is displayed load a new staple case into the staple cartridge by following the steps below NOTE Load the correct staple case specified for the product model of the machine 310 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Loading Staples 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Hold
413. ts the default for the Original Type feature on the Image Quality screen Lighten Darken Sets the default for the Lighten Darken feature on the Image Quality screen Sharpness Sets the default for the Sharpness feature on the Image Quality screen Auto Exposure Sets the default for the Auto Exposure feature on the Image Quality screen 206 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Copy Mode Settings 2 Sided Sets the default for the 2 Sided feature on the More Basic Copying screen Mixed Size Originals Sets the default for the Mixed Size Originals feature on the Scan Options screen Border Erase Top 8 Bottom Sets the defaults for top and bottom margins of the Border Erase feature on the Scan Options screen You can set the margins within a range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Border Erase Left amp Right Sets the defaults for left and right margins of the Border Erase feature on the Scan Options screen You can set the margins within a range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons Center Erase Sets the default for the width of the center margin of the Border Erase feature on the Scan Options screen You can set the margins within a range of 0 50 mm 0 2 0 inches using the scroll buttons Margin Shift Side 1 If your machine is configured to perform double sided cop
414. ttings page 243 Stored Document Settings page 244 1 Select Mailbox Stored Document Setnds lor the System Settings screen eno ST Settings 2 Perform the necessary operations 3 Select Close Mailbox Settings This screen allows you to specify whether to discard documents once received from a client and whether received Internet Fax documents can be forwarded 1 Select Mailbox Settings 2 Select the item to be set or Choose an item and select Change Settings Mailbox Settings changed and select Change fla prlde 1 Documents Retrieved By Client Delete according to Mailbox settings Settings 2 Fax to Fan Disabled 3 3 Fax to E mail Disabled Set the setting value Change Setting 4 Select Save Documents Retrieved By Client Use this feature to specify an option for discarding documents in mailboxes after they are retrieved Specify whether those documents should always be discarded or should be discarded according to the settings made on the individual mailboxes Internet Fax to Internet Fax Use this feature to specify whether to allow documents received through the Internet Fax service to be retransmitted through the Internet Fax service Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 243 11 Setups Internet Fax to E mail Use this feature to specify whether to allow documents received through the Int
415. ttings such as 5 x 7 inches Portrait Landscape 3 5 x 5 inches Portrait Landscape and Postcard You can use the Next Page button to switch between screens Variable Size Allows you to specify documents size by using the scroll buttons within the ranges of 15 297 mm 0 6 11 7 inches for width and 15 432 mm 0 6 17 0 inches for length Reduce Enlarge Presets Use this feature to preset magnification buttons These are displayed when you select Preset in the Reduce Enlarge feature on the Basic Copying screen If you predefine frequently used magnifications the original can be expanded or reduced quickly and easily The Reduce Enlarge Presets screen consists of multiple pages 210 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Copy Mode Settings 1 Select Reduce Enlarge Presets on the Copy Mode n item and select Change Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets Settings screen Items Current Settings 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch rem TRUS RETR between screens 3 R E Preset 3 81 B4 gt A4 B5 gt A5 3 Perform the necessary 5 R E Preset 5 115 B4 gt A3 B5 gt A4 ly operations 4 Select Close R E Preset 1 7 Allows you to assign your choice of magnifications to each of the seven buttons within the range of 25 400 by selecting from 25 options Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 211
416. ture On Attaches a Cover Note When you select this option Comment is displayed at the right side of the screen Comment Displays the status of Recipient s Comment and Sender s Comment and displays the Comment screens to specify comments You can add two comments on a cover sheet Recipient s Comment and Senders Comment You can specify the same comment in both screens 96 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Send Options Fax Internet Fax Comment Recipient s Comment Screen Memory 100 1 Select On on the Cover Note screen Enter recipient Use C button to cancel entry To Next Recipient Cancel Cover Note Comment Recipient s Comment 2 Select Comment No Comment 1 Report for Month Off we E urgen J 3 Select Recipient s Comment O On z 4 Not in Use 5 Not in Use J ly 4 Select On on the Comment Recipient s Comment screen 5 Select a comment from the comment list using the scroll buttons 6 Select Save No Comment Allows you to select a comment from the list of comments already registered For information on how to register comments refer to Comments in the Setups chapter on page 256 Comment Sender s Comment Screen The procedures are the same as the Comment Recipient s Comment screen Internet Fax Comment Mail Contents Th
417. ture Set Numbering Density Specify the density of text used for the Set Numbering feature Offset Stacking Center Output Tray When printing to the Center Output Tray the machine can slightly offset the paper output positions for each set copies or job individually instructed print job This allows you to identify the start of each set or job Offset Stacking Finisher Tray When printing to the Finisher Tray the machine can slightly offset paper output positions for each set copies or job individually instructed print job This allows you to identify the start of each set or job Extended Tray Module Select the type of the Extended Tray Module used If the optional finisher is installed select Offset Stacking Module to enable the Center Output Tray Default Print Paper Size Specify the paper size to be used as the initial setting 200 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Common Settings Odd Page 2 Sided Select whether to add a blank page to a document that contains an odd number of pages so that the document prints as an even number of pages Paper Size Settings Specify the paper size table used when the machine is set to detect standard sizes of documents and recording media automatically You can select from the following tables A B Series 8 x 13 A B Series A B Series 8K 16K A B Series 8 x 13 8 x 14 and Inch Series Documents The ma
418. ture Setting items Protocol Settings Unicode Support Allows you to specify whether to enable Unicode support in the host name and workgroup name during SMB transmission Auto Master Mode Allows you to enable or disable on off Auto Master Mode Encrypt Password Allows you to enable or disable password encryption during SMB transmission NetWare Allows you to configure the settings for NDS transport protocol and SLP as follows Host Name Enter the host name Active Mode Selects the Active Mode for the printer when using NetWare Bindery PServer Mode Select this when using the printer server mode in bindery service e Directory PServer Mode Select this when using the printer server mode in directory service File Server Name Enter the file server name Polling Interval Allows you to set the time interval from when print data enter the print queue until printing starts Number of searches Enter the maximum number of searches Password Enter the print server PServer password Re enter Password Allows you to verify the PServer password by re entering the same password TBCP Filter This is only displayed when PostScript is enabled NDS Configure the NDS settings Tree Name Enter the tree name Context Name Enter the context name of the Print Server Object Up to 511 characters can be entered with the exception of plus sign 1 backslash
419. type to be used for printing Address Book Use this feature to program the Address Book with recipients of documents Register destinations to which documents are to be occasionally sent through fax Internet Fax e mail FTP protocols or SMB protocols Destinations are registered under 3 digit Address Numbers by which you can quickly specify destinations when sending documents NOTE You can program the Address Book with up to 500 destinations in total NOTE When storing the new Address Book as CSV format all the previous addresses are replaced by the new ones NOTE Do not open the CSV file using software such as Microsoft Excel Once opening the CSV file on the software it is automatically edited and the edited file cannot be used for the machine NOTE Address Numbers registered for the Address Book can be used as speed dial codes NOTE Addresses may be specified in two different modes the User mode may be utilized to allow the general user to add or delete specific addresses To add delete addresses press the lt All Services gt button on the control panel scroll down to and select Setup Menu then begin at step 1 below The System Admin mode may be utilized to creade addresses that can only be deleted by the System Administrator To add delete addresses Refer to 1 Entering the System Settings Mode on page 189 steps 1 2 amp 3 to log into Systems Settings Once Systems Settings is selected select Setup Menu
420. u to select the date of the month on which to send the monthly status e mail Notice Time Allows you to specify the time to send the e mail notice IP Reject Frequency Allows you to specify the number of rejections before sending an e mail notice to users whose IP address is not allowed Domain Reject Frequency Allows you to specify the number of rejections before sending an e mail notice to users whose domain is not allowed Next Notice Date Displays the date on which the next notice will be sent Mail Recipient Settings Recipient Mail Address Allows you to specify up to three recipient e mail addresses Regular Notice Allows you to enable or disable sending regular notices to the specified recipients IP Reject Notice Allows you to enable or disable sending IP reject notices to the specified recipients Domain Reject Notice Allows you to enable or disable sending domain reject notices to the specified recipients Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 167 9 CentreWare Internet Services Feature Setting items Auditron Settings Auditron Settings Allows you to enable or disable the Auditron feature for each service Auditron Mode Displays the Auditron mode enabled Auditron Print Select to enable the Auditron feature for printing Auditron Copy Select to enable the Auditron feature for copying Auditron Scan Select to
421. uantity yO l lt C gt button A 4 Start the Copy Job 1 Press the lt Start gt button Each x E document is scanned only once A O O O O The number of copies remaining O O is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the touch screen gt amp o o e lt Start gt button While copying if the document feeder or document glass is ready and the machine is equipped with the optional hard disk you can scan the next document or program the next job While the machine is warming up you can also program the next job 5 Confirm the Copy Job in the Job Status 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel to display the Job Status screen Current and Pending Jobs ee Completed Jobs Stored Print Documents Waiting Jobs Doc No Job Type Status Remote Terminal Contents 00002 Copy Job Scanning A4D 100 Progress gt A g 48 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Basic Copying The queued copy job will be displayed If no job is displayed on the touch screen it may have already been processed For more information refer to Current and Pending Jobs in the Job Status chapter on page 268 Stop the Copy Job Follow the steps below to manually cancel the activated copy job 1 Select Stop on the touch screen or press the lt Stop gt button on the control panel
422. ublic Mailbox is displayed at the right side of the screen Private Mailbox Stores confidential documents in the private mailbox ready to be polled When you select this option Save in Private Mailbox is displayed at the right side of the screen Save in Public Mailbox Displays the Public Mailbox Document List screen to confirm the status or delete stored documents from the list Save in Private Mailbox Displays the Mailbox screen to specify the mailbox for storing documents Public Mailbox Document List Screen Displays the list of stored documents for polling You can also delete or print the documents in the list NOTE You can also display this screen by pressing the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel and selecting Stored Documents gt Public Mailbox on the Job Status screen Memory 100 1 Select Save in Public Mailbox on the Store for Public Mailbox Document List Polling screen Number oc No Type Stored Date Pages Ne of bcs 5 1 00010 Doc for Polling 2 3 2001 ADAM 655 gt 2 Perform the necessary 2 00020 Doe for Polling 4 6 2002 ED AM 1 operations 3 J0030 Doc for Polling 6 9 2003 125 PM 10 Delete 4 00040 Doc for Polling 7 7 2000 430PM 100 7 7 Print 3 Select Save i 5 00050 Doc for Polling 11 1 2000 830 AM 999 rin Select All 104 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 1239 128 133 U
423. uces single sided copies from double sided documents NOTE When using the document glass for 1 gt 2 H to H or 2 gt 2 H to H the machine will display a message when it is ready to scan the next document More Displays the 2 Sided screen Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 53 3 Copy 2 Sided Screen Allows you to select the previous option and whether to rotate side 2 pages head to toe on the printouts 1 Select More for 2 Sided feature on the Basic Copying Ready to Copy Side ES screen 2 Select the required option O sus _ Rotate side 2 p M E 3 Select Save 2 O 2 gt 1 Sided Rotate Side 2 Select this check box to rotate side 2 of the printouts head to toe NOTE This option is available only for 1 gt 2 H to H and 2 gt 2 H to H Copy Output This feature allows you to sort copy outputs If the optional finisher has been installed the stapling feature is also available You can select the staple position on the copy output NOTE The features displayed on the screen vary if the finisher is not installed NOTE If the correct size paper is not loaded in the machine when the stapling feature is applied to a copy or print job a paper size error may occur while processing the job When this happens the finisher contains the wrong size paper already processed up to this point If the machine displays The paper
424. uch as profile designation in multiple address and delivery confirmation mode setting The Internet Fax Control screen consists of multiple pages 1 Select Internet Fax Control on the Fax Mode Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings iFax Control 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch reas Sellada a betwee n screens 2 Broadcast Communication Mode G3 Auto iss 3 Delivery Confirmation Method Read Receipts MDN 3 P e rfo rm th e necessa ry 4 Incoming Fax Print Options Print Basic Headers and Contents J Giana operati ons 5 Incorning iFax Output Destination Center Output Tray y 4 Select Close Broadcast Internet Fax Profile Sets the default for the profile of Internet Fax for broadcasting For more information on Internet Fax profile refer to Internet Fax Profile on page 231 NOTE Although TIFF S can be received by any remote machine supporting Internet Fax TIFF F and TIFF J may not be received When you set to TIFF F or TIFF J check the capability of the remote machine in advance Broadcast Communication Mode Sets the default for the transmission mode for broadcasting Internet Fax Delivery Confirmation Method Sets the method of confirming delivery of Internet Fax transmission If Delivery Receipts DSN is selected you will receive a notification mail that informs you whether an Internet Fax is delivered to the destination If Read Re
425. um Login Attempts Use this feature to change the default System Administrator Login ID Program a new ID between 1 and 32 alphanumeric characters 1 Select System Administrator Login ID on the System Administrator Settings screen 2 Select On 3 Enter a new System Administrator ID Cancel New System Administrator Login ID Re enter System Administrator Login ID Keyboard Use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Keyboard to display the screen keyboard 4 Select Next 5 Enter the same System Administrator Login ID as you entered in step 3 6 Select Save System Administrator Password Use this feature to change the default System Administrator Password Program a new password between 4 and 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces 1 Select System Administrator Password on the System Administrator Settings screen 2 Enter anew System Administrator Password Use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Keyboard to display the screen keyboard 3 Select Next New Password Re enter Password 4 Enter the same System Administrator Password as you entered in step 2 5 Select Save Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 257 11 Setups Maximum Login Attempts With this feature enabled the machine denies access when an incorrect System Administrator ID is entered the
426. umber of times to repeat the image vertically or horizontally Between 1 to 23 for vertical repeat and 1 to 33 for horizontal repeat can be set Image Layout Even Copies the repeated images equally on the paper e Bias Copies the repeated images on the paper with no spaces between the images 72 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Output Format Copy Annotation This feature allows you to add the date page numbers and a predetermined phrase to the copy outputs 1 Select Annotation on the Output Format screen Ready to Copy Annotation Cancel O St 2 Select the required option g Original Orientation OD Head to Top 3 Select Save a O Page Number Stamp The print positions Off E Date indicated on this diagram 4 Page Number are for reference only Stamp Displays the Annotation Stamp screen Use this screen to add a predetermined phrase such as Confidential Draft etc to the output The following options are available e Off Disables the feature On Enables the feature e Text Displays the Annotation Stamp Text screen Select the predetermined phrase you wish to print on the copies e Position Displays the Annotation Stamp Position screen Select where to stamp on each page e Print On Displays the Annotation Stamp Print On screen Specify which of the pages you wish to pri
427. ument O O X O O O Job Display O O X O O O Flow 7 Sheet Link O X X O O O Auto Run O O X O O O Manual Run O O X O O O O Operation available X Operation not available 1 When storing documents into or retrieving documents from the mailbox authentication is not applicable to the following operations e Confidential fax reception e Confidential Internet Fax reception e Retrieving documents that use scan driver or Mailbox Viewer NOTE When job flow sheets not available for operation depending on changes made to the authentication status are linked to a mailbox you can still use them except for changing copying them If you release the link the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will be disabled Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 293 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled Unentered Users General Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key pare onal Shared Operators Create X X X Display X o X Delete X X X Change Settings X X X Display Document X o X Delete Document X o X Store Document X oO X Print Document X o X Job Flow Display X Xx x sie Link Xx xX
428. ument glass The two pages will be copied onto two separate pages Memory 100 1 1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen Ready to Copy ee Quantity Bound Originals 2 Perform the necessary Ou Same Fee Lo yow og operations Ons O 0 50 Right Page Only 3 Select Save Ome Right Page E Ozz p NOTE The facing pages of a bound document must be placed in a horizontal orientation on the document glass Off Disables the feature Left Page then Right Copies both pages of an open book from left to right Right Page then Left Copies both pages of an open book from right to left Top Page then Bottom Copies both pages of an open book from top to bottom Both Pages Copies both pages of an open book Left Page Only Copies only the left side page of an open book Right Page Only Copies only the right side page of an open book Top Page Only Copies only the upper side of an open book Bottom Page Only Copies only the lower side of an open book Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 59 3 Copy Center Erase Erases printing of the central gutter area of the book that tends to be shadowed Use the scroll buttons to specify the area to be erased from the center of an open book within the range of 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inches in 1 mm or 0 1 inch increments 2 Sided Book Copy This feature allows you to make double sided co
429. un Job the data read up to that point will be processed 208 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Copy Mode Settings Maximum Stored Pages Sets the maximum number of pages that can be stored in memory when you copy documents The maximum number can be set to 999 using the scroll buttons or the numeric keypad on the control panel Auto Paper Off Selects the paper tray used when you select Auto or Independent X Y in the Reduce Enlarge feature cancelling Auto in the Paper Supply feature Pseudo Photo Gradation Mode Sets the image processing format when you copy photographs with the machine Original Type Lightweight Originals Sets whether to hide or show the Lightweight Originals option on the Original Type screen Annotation Stamp Size Sets the character size of the predetermined phrase when you add Stamp in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Annotation Stamp Density Sets the character density of the predetermined phrase when you add Stamp in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Stamp Position on Side 2 Sets whether to position the character strings stamp in the same position on each side of the paper when printing on both sides of the paper This is when you use Stamp in the Annotation feature on the Output Format screen Date Position on Side 2 Sets whether to position the date in the same position on each
430. ure Image Quality Use this feature to configure various settings to adjust the quality of scanned data 1 Select Image Quality on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Change Settings Image Quality 2 Select Image Quality on the aie atheist 1 Photo Text Recognition Image Quality screen 2 Image Enhancement On 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close Photo amp Text Recognition Specify the level at which the machine judges text or photos during scanning If you select More Text very fine characters become more easily recognizable as text If you select More Photo halftone images on newspapers and flyers become more easily recognizable as photos Image Enhancement Specify whether or not to perform smoothing on print data for copy and fax jobs This will give smoother images on printed paper Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 197 11 Setups Reports Use this feature to specify how reports are to be automatically printed 1 Select Reports on the Common Settings screen Choose an item and select Reports 2 Perform the necessary items Ciment Seitas 1 Job History Report Auto Print Off a O pe rati ons 2 Activity Report Auto Print Off J 3 Transmission Report Undelivered Auto Print On J 3 Select Close 4 Transmission Report Canceled Auto Print Off J th 5
431. ure on the Basic Features screen Original Type Sets the default for the Original Type feature on the Basic Features screen Lighten Darken Sets the default for the Lighten Darken feature on the Basic Features screen Mixed Size Originals Sets the default for the Mixed Size Originals feature on the Scan Options screen 230 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Fax Mode Settings Communication Mode Sets the default for the Communication Mode feature on the Send Options screen Send Header Sets the default for the Send Header feature on the Send Options screen Transmission Report Sets the default for the Transmission Report feature on the Send Options screen Delivery Read Receipts Sets the default for the Delivery Receipts DSN or Read Receipts MDN feature on the Send Options screen NOTE You can use Read Receipts MDN only if the remote Internet Fax machine supports the feature Internet Fax Profile Sets the default for the Internet Fax Profile feature on the Send Options screen NOTE Although TIFF S can be received by any remote machine supporting Internet Fax TIFF F and TIFF J may not be received When you set to TIFF F or TIFF J check the capability of the remote machine in advance Fax Control Use this feature to conduct operational control of the various fax features The Fax Control screen consists of multiple pages
432. ures siii iia 161 Maintenance ineei eraa a aa a e A A era eena 179 ES 100 eLo y ORO COCO e aa a a a a a 179 Paper and Other Media ooooccccccocococononcccnncononononcnnncnananonononnnananans 181 loading Papers a ed dere 181 Preparing Paper for Loading oooooooooococccnnccnncnnncnnncnnncnnnnnnnncnnncnnnons 181 Loading the Paper Tray Seis IES 181 Bypass Tray Tay ens Cock peed a aaa eaaet 183 Tandem Tray Module TIM sccscca casintsneeetnenccontienstieeeaenetonss 184 Auto Tray Switching vcscedes saison ote ee sceepecane ete ne tteees de eesletevadeneece kc 184 Storing and Handling Paper 2 cccccceesseecenecceeeeteseesseeeeeeeseeeeteneneees 184 Supported Paper Sizes and Types 00 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 185 Supported Paper SIZES is ta nia 185 Supported Paper TyPe ce ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseeees 188 DOCU PS iria ii adi 189 System Settings Procedure oooccccccccccocococnnnonnnonnnn conc nnnnnrnnrnnnn nn nn 189 1 Entering the System Settings Mode oooocinccccccccccccnnccnonanccncnnnns 189 2 Customizing the SOtINOS coccion cocinar ie 190 Syst m Settings asiana ea S llei ee 190 Common SMN indi Gar eles eae hs 190 Machine ClocCk TiMerS cccccccccocononnncnnnnnononononcocononnnnnononononincnnonenonons 191 Audio TONGS ii A a eee eed 193 screen Def lS asinsi in ended 194 Paper Tray Atte iuris dis 195 Auto JOD ProMotiON ococccccccnccccconono
433. urrent and Completed Jobs Stored Print Pending Jobs Documents Waiting Jobs Doc No Job Type Status Remote Terminal Contents Progress A There are no jobs in progress or pending jobs y Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 267 12 Job Status Current and Pending Jobs This feature allows you to view incomplete jobs that are waiting in progress or suspended You can see job attributes or promote delete the job 1 Press the lt Job Status gt button on the control panel Print Waiting Jobs Progress gt Current and Pending Jobs 1 Documents Status Remote Terminal Contents A4D 100 2 Select the Current and Pending Jobs tab 3 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens Doc No Job Type 00002 Copy Job Scanning J 4 Select a job to cancel or promote as required Doc No Job Type Identifies each job by number and type Status Displays the status of the job such as copying printing and scanning Remote Terminal Contents Displays the name of the recipient for a fax job the paper size for a copy job or the box number for a scan job etc Progress Displays the current and total number of pages in a job that is printing scanning sending or receiving Job Screen Use this feature to select a job from the list to display detailed information on the job or to promote delete it The content
434. ut period when the machine enters the Low Power Mode from user operation Sleep Mode Time Out Allows you to specify the time out period when the machine enters the Sleep Mode from the Low Power Mode Address Book Allows you to store or retrieve address information in the CSV format When storing the new Address Book as CSV format all previous addresses are replaced by the new ones Import Allows you to store address information in the machine Specify the file name or click Browse to locate the CSV file and click Import a file in CSV Format NOTE Do not open the CSV file using software such as Microsoft Excel Once opening the CSV file on the software it is automatically edited and the edited file cannot be used for the machine Export Allows you to download the address information in a CSV file Click Get a file in CSV Format to download the CSV file 162 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Properties Feature Setting items Mailbox Mailbox Number Allows you to configure the settings of a mailbox number Edit Click this button to display the mailbox settings screen Document Order Allows you to select the display order of the documents saved in the mailbox Document List Click this button to display the mailbox document list Mailbox Document List Displays the list of documents in the mailbox Mailbox Number Displays the mai
435. value will be either 4 or 23 depending on the region of use Orientatio 205 O Default Portrait n 1 Landscape Sets the document orientation 144 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Emulation Parameters Parameter Item No Value 2 Side 206 O Default Off Print 1 On Sets whether to enable double sided printing Default 207 0 CG Times 41 Times New Bold Font 1 CG Times Italic 42 Times New Bold Italic 2 CG Times Bold 43 Symbol 3 CG Times Bold Italic 44 Wingdings 4 Univers Medium 45 Line Printer 5 Univers Medium Italic 46 Times Roman 6 Univers Bold 47 Times Italic 7 Univers Bold Italic 48 Times Bold 8 Univers Medium Condensed 49 Times Bold Italic 9 Univers Medium Condensed Italic 50 Helvetica 10 Univers Bold Condensed 51 Helvetica Oblique 11 Univers Bold Condensed Italic 52 Helvetica Bold 12 Antique Olive 53 Helvetica Bold Oblique 13 Antique Olive Italic 54 CourierPS 14 Antique Olive Bold 55 CourierPS Oblique 15 CG Omega 56 CourierPS Bold 16 CG Omega Italic 57 CourierPS Bold Oblique 17 CG Omega Bold 58 SymbolPS 18 CG Omega Bold Italic 59 Palatino Roman 19 Garamond Antiqua 60 Palatino Italic 20 Garamond Kursiv 61 Palatino Bold 21 Garamond Halbfett 62 Palatino Bold Italic 22 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 63 ITC Bookman Light 23 Default Courier 64 ITC Bookman Light Italic 24 Courier Italic 65 ITC Bookman Demi 25
436. ve Directory ExchangeServer 2003 Active Directory NetWare 5 240 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide E mail Internet Fax Settings Attribute Type of Recipient Name Specify the attribute type of destination names up to 32 characters Directory searches are often done by searching for a partial name in the common name cn attribute Attribute Type of Last Name Specify the attribute type of family names last name up to 32 characters Attribute Type of First Name Specify the attribute type of given names Attribute Type of E mail Address Specify the attribute type of e mail addresses Attribute Type of Custom Item 1 Specify the attribute type of auxiliary search parameter 1 Attribute Name of Custom Item 1 Specify the attribute name of auxiliary search parameter 1 The name specified here will be displayed on the Address Book when E mail is selected For more information refer to Address Book on page 250 Attribute Type of Custom Item 2 Specify the attribute type of auxiliary search parameter 2 Attribute Name of Custom Item 2 Specify the attribute name of auxiliary search parameter 2 The name specified here will be displayed on the Address Book when E mail is selected For more information refer to Address Book on page 250 Attribute Type of Custom Item 3 Specify the attribute type of auxiliary search parameter 3 Attribute Name of Custom Item 3 Specify the attri
437. w Sheet and Mailbox The following explains the restrictions for job flow sheets and mailboxes when the Authentication feature is enabled NOTE When a user account is deleted the mailboxes and job flow sheets associated with the account are also deleted Any documents stored in the mailboxes will also be deleted NOTE When the Authentication and Auditron Administration features are used with a remote account server the user information stored in the machine may be temporarily deleted to restrict user access When this happens the mailboxes and job flow sheets associated with the user will also be deleted When using a remote account server to manage authentication use of mailboxes and job flow sheets in the Key Operator mode is recommended Job Flow Sheet Types There are four types of job flow sheets that can be used with the machine NOTE You can create Mailbox Job Flow Sheets with the machine Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a General User without using the Authentication feature When the Authentication feature is not enabled this job flow sheet is shared and its settings may be changed by any user When the Authentication feature is enabled this job flow sheet can only be operated by a Key Operator Mailbox Job Flow Sheet This job flow sheet is created by a General User or a Key Operator using Mailbox on the Setup Menu screen The owner of this job flow sheet is set to the
438. witch aaa ee Satinas between screens 2 Control Panel Alert Tone Normal 3 Machine Ready Tone Normal 3 Perform the necessary 4 Copy db Completo Tore Nera S operation S 5_Non Copy Job Complete Tone Normal y 4 Select Close Control Panel Select Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when an appropriate button on the control panel is pressed and its action is accepted Control Panel Alert Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when an inappropriate button on the control panel is pressed Machine Ready Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when the machine becomes ready to copy or print for example after the power is switched on Copy Job Complete Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when copying finishes successfully Non Copy Job Complete Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when a job other than copying finishes successfully Fault Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when a job did not finish properly Alert Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when a job is suspended due to an error Out of Paper Warning Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when the machine runs out of paper Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 193 11 Setups Low Toner Alert Tone Select the volume level of the tone generated when it is time to replace the toner cartridge Line Monito
439. writers Laboratories Inc UL60950 1 1st 2003 USA Canada NEMKO IEC60950 1 Edition 1 2001 This product was manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system Regulatory Information CE Mark The CE mark applied to this product symbolizes Xerox s declaration of conformity with the following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated January 1 1995 Council Directive 72 23 EEC amended by Council directive 93 68 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council directive 89 336 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 99 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration of conformity defining the relevant directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your authorized local dealer WARNING In order to allow this equipment to operate in proximity to Industrial Scientific and Medical ISM equipment the external radiation from the ISM equipment may have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment the product may cause radio frequency interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures WARNING Shielded interface cables must be used with this product to mainta
440. y Shared by Key Generally Shared by Key Shared Operators Personal Shared Operators Personal Mailbox O X O O O Generally O X O O O Shared Shared by Key O X X O O O Operators Personal X X X O O O O Relationship available X Relationship not available 296 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox When the Authentication Feature is Enabled The following table shows the relationship with the mailboxes for each user type when the Authentication feature is enabled Unentered Users General Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key P r nal Shared Operators Generally Shared X X X Shared by Key Operators X X X Personal own X X X Personal other X X X Entered Users Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Personal Personal Shared Operators own other Generally Shared X X X X Shared by Key Operators X X O X Personal own X X O X Personal other X X X X Key Operators Mailbox Operations Generally Shared by Key Porsonal Shared Operators Generally Shared O O O Shared by Key Operators O O O Personal own O O O Personal other O O O O Relationship available X Relationship not available Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide 297 14 Authentication and Auditron Administration Ove
441. y Priority 1 3 Sets the attribute and priority to the fax documents in the mailboxes File Destination Output Destination Use these features to sort received documents by telephone number or by incoming line and specify the output trays for received documents by incoming line 1 Select File Destination Output Destination on the Fax Mode Settings screen File Destination Output Destination File Destination Output Destination Line Setup Line Setup 2 Use the scroll buttons to switch between screens 3 Perform the necessary operations 4 Select Close File Destination Line Setup You can specify the mailbox for storing received documents by selecting an item and Change Settings Up to 200 mailboxes can be registered NOTE Before using this feature select Enable in the Box Selector Line Setup feature on the Fax Control screen Line 1 Allows you to enter the mailbox number Select On to display the Mailbox Number Output Destination Line Setup You can specify the output trays by incoming line from this screen The output tray for Mailbox Printed Documents can also be set By selecting an item and Change Settings you can enter the following screens Line 1 Allows you to select the output tray Mailbox Printed Documents Allows you to select the output tray for documents printed from mailboxes both manually and automatically using job flow sheets 234 Xerox Co
442. y whether to enable the parallel port and to configure the relative parameter settings Port Status Specify whether to enable the parallel port 212 Xerox CopyCentre WorkCentre WorkCentre Pro 123 128 133 User Guide Network Settings Print Mode Specify the PDL Page Description Language to be used for print jobs Only pre installed PDLs are available PJL Specify whether to enable the PJL Printer Job Language Auto Eject Time Specify the time out period when print data is not sent to the machine sequentially If the specified time elapses the remaining data inside the machine is automatically printed out You can specify a time within the range of 5 1 275 seconds in 5 second increments Adobe Communication Protocol Specify the communication protocol format for Adobe Communication Protocol Standard Select this option when the communication protocol is in the ASCII format Binary Select this option when the communication protocol is in the binary format Depending on the data the print job may be completed faster than Standard e TBCP Tagged Binary Communications Protocol Select this option to switch the specific control codes when the communication protocols involve both ASCII and binary formats Bi directional Communication Select whether to enable the bi directional communication Input Prime Select whether to enable the input prime If enabled the reset processing is triggered by the in

Xerox 550 All in One Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents